6md663 664 en

3UHIDFH7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
,QWURGXFWLRQ 1
SIPROTEC 'HVLJQDQG&RQQHFWLRQ6\VWHP 2
)LUVW6WHSV 3
Bay Control Unit
6MD663/6MD664 6,3527(& 'HYLFHV 4
4.1
Manual &RQILJXUDWLRQ 5
)XQFWLRQV 6
&RQWUROGXULQJ2SHUDWLRQ 7
0RXQWLQJDQG&RPPLVVLRQLQJ 8
0DLQWHQDQFHDQGWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ 9
7HFKQLFDO'DWD 10
$SSHQGL[ A
$SSHQGL[ B
/LWHUDWXUH*ORVVDU\,QGH[
Edition: 26.07.01
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Notes on Safety This manual does not constitute a complete catalog of all safety measures required for
operating the respective equipment (module, device), since special operating conditions
may require additional measures. However, it does contain notes which must be adhered
to for your own personal safety and for avoiding property damage. These notes are high-
lighted with a warning triangle and different keywords indicating different degrees of dan-
ger:
Danger
means that death, severe injury or substantial property damage will occur if the appropriate
safety measures are not taken.
Warning
means that death, severe injury or substantial property damage may occur if the appropri-
ate safety measures are not taken.
Caution
means that minor injury or property damage may occur if the appropriate safety measures
are not taken.
Notice
is an important information about the product, the handling of the product or the part of the
documentation which should particularly be pointed out.
Qualified Personnel
Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual
must be performed by qualified personnel only. In the sense of the safety notes contained
in this manual, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission,
release, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety
standards.
Use as Prescribed
The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those
described in the Catalog and the technical description. If it is used together with third-party
devices and components, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct and safe operation of the product requires adequate transportation, storage, instal-
lation and mounting as well as appropriate use and maintenance.
During operation of electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that certain parts of this equip-
ment are carrying dangerous current. Severe injury or property damage may occur if the
appropriate measures are omitted:
Before making any connections at all, ground the equipment at the PE terminal.
Hazardous voltages may be present on all switching components connected to the
power supply.
Even after the supply voltage has been disconnected, hazardous voltages may still be
present in the equipment (capacitor storage).
Equipment with current transformer circuits may not be operated while open.
The limit values indicated in the manual or the operating instructions must not be exceeded;
this also applies to testing and commissioning.
Disclaimer of liability Copyright

Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication Copyright Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved
for conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot This document shall not be transmitted or reproduced, nor shall its
guarantee complete conformity since erorrs cannot be excluded. contents be exploited or disclosed to third persons without prior
The information provided in this manual is checked at regular inter- written consent from Siemens. Infringements shall entitle to dam-
vals and any corrections which might become necessary are includ- age claims. All rights reserved, in particular in case of a patent grant
ed in the next releases. Any suggestions for improvement are or utility model registration.
welcome.
Registered Trademarks
The contents of this manual is subject to change without prior DIGSI, SIPROTEC and SIMATIC NET are registered trade-
notice. marks of SIEMENS AG. All other product and brand names in this
2.00.01 manual may be trademarks, the use of which by third persons for
their purposes may infringe the rights of their respective owners.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Document-Nr. C53000-G1876-C102-2

Preface
Aim of this Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, mounting, and commissioning of the
device. In particular, you will find:
Information regarding configuration of the device Chapter 5,
Description of the device functions and setting facilities Chapter 6,
Instruction of operation while in service Chapter 7,
Instructions for mounting and commissioning Chapter 8,
List of the technical data Chapter 10,
Summary of the most significant data for the experienced user in the Appendix.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioners, persons who are involved in setting, testing and
maintenance of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation per-
sonnel in electrical plants and power stations.
Applicability of this This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664; Bay Control Unit; as of firm-
Manual ware version 4.1
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23 EEC).
Conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10
of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN
50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for low-voltage directive).
The device is designed in accordance with the international standards of IEC 255 and
the German standards DIN 57 435 part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435 part 303).
Additional support Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter should be referred to
the local Siemens representative.
Courses Individual course offers may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be di-
rected to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
6MD663/6MD664 Manual iii

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Preface
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an
Warnings appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following terms are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This is especially valid for damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and
the hazards involved. In addition, he or she has the following qualifications:
Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with es-
tablished safety practices.
Is trained in rendering first aid.
iv 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Preface
Typographic and The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the
Symbol Conven- device appear in the text flow:
tions
3DUDPHWHUQDPHV, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters, which
may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal
computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are marked in bold letters of a mono-
space type style.
3DUDPHWHURSWLRQV, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear
word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer
(with operation software DIGSI 4), are written in italic style, additionally.
$QQXQFLDWLRQV, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay
or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace
type style in quotes.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault device-internal logical input signal
Earth fault device-internal logical output signal
UL1L2 internal input signal of an analog value
>Release external binary input signal
Dev. Trip external binary output signal
Parameter address
Parameter name
)81&7,21 example of a parameter switch )81&7,21 with the address
2Q and the possible settings 2Q and 2II
2II
Parameter options
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 61712 IEC 61713 or similar are
used in most cases.
Liability statement Copyright

We have checked the contents of this manual against the de- Copyright SIEMENS AG 1999, 2000. All rights reserved.
scribed hardware and software. Nevertheless, deviations may oc- Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or
cur so that we cannot guarantee the entire harmony with the prod- communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without ex-
uct. press authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All
The contents of this manual will be checked in periodical intervals, rights are reserved, especially in the event or grant of a patent or
corrections will be made in the following edition. We look forward to registration of a utility model or design.
your suggestions for improvement.
Registered trademarks
Subject to technical alteration. SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM, and DIGSI are registered trade-
marks of SIEMENS AG. Other names and terms can be trade-
marks the use of which may violate the rights of thirds.
6MD663/6MD664 Manual v
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Preface
vi 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table of contents
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overall function ................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Fields of application............................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.4 Functional scope ................................................................................................................. 1-7
2 Design and Connection System ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Design 6MD663/6MD664 for panel surface and cabinet mounting ..................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Connections with screw terminals ....................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.3 Connections for plug-in terminals ...................................................................................... 2-10
2.1.4 Connections for fiber-optic cables ..................................................................................... 2-13
2.1.5 Connections for wired serial interfaces.............................................................................. 2-14
2.2 Type 6MD663/6MD664 with a separate operator unit....................................................... 2-15

2.2.1 Housing and operating unit ............................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.2 Connections with screw terminals ..................................................................................... 2-17
2.3 Type 6MD663/6MD664 without operating unit .................................................................. 2-26

2.3.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................. 2-26
2.3.2 Connections with screw terminals ..................................................................................... 2-28
3 First Steps ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Unpacking and re-packing the device ................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Receiving inspection and testing of the device.................................................................... 3-3

3.2.1 Checking nominal data ........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Electrical check.................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 User interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
6MD663/6MD664 Manual i
C53000-G1876-C102-2
3.3.1 Operation via the device user interface ............................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Operation via DIGSI 4 ....................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-12
4 SIPROTEC 4 Devices ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4.1.1 Protection concept ............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Communication.................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.4 Operations ........................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Operator control facilities ..................................................................................................... 4-5

4.2.1 Operator control panels ....................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 DIGSI 4 tools ..................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3 Information retrieval ............................................................................................................. 4-9

4.3.1 Annunciations .................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4 Controlling.......................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5 Manual overwrite / tagging................................................................................................. 4-16
4.6 General setting information................................................................................................ 4-17
4.7 Functional scope................................................................................................................ 4-20
4.8 Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.9 Display Editor..................................................................................................................... 4-24

4.9.1 Default display ................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.9.2 Control display ................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.10 CFC programmable logic................................................................................................... 4-26
4.11 Power system data ............................................................................................................ 4-27
4.12 Setting groups ................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.13 General device settings ..................................................................................................... 4-30
4.14 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-31
4.15 Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................. 4-32
4.16 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-34
5 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Specifying the functional scope ........................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Configuring information, measured variables and commands............................................. 5-4

5.2.1 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-4
ii 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
5.2.2 Structure and handling of the configuration matrix .............................................................. 5-9
5.2.3 Inserting information .......................................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.4 Specifying information properties ...................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.5 Performing configuration ................................................................................................... 5-25
5.2.6 Restoring metered values ................................................................................................. 5-33
5.2.7 Setting of Contact Chatter Blocking................................................................................... 5-34
5.3 Setting measuring transducers.......................................................................................... 5-36

5.3.1 Selecting measuring transducer from the functional scope............................................... 5-37
5.3.2 Configuring measuring transducers................................................................................... 5-40
5.4 Setting inter-relay communication ..................................................................................... 5-44

5.4.1 Inserting objects into the project structure......................................................................... 5-47
5.4.2 Selecting combination users.............................................................................................. 5-50
5.4.3 Routing information in participating devices ...................................................................... 5-51
5.4.4 Routing information between participating devices ........................................................... 5-54
5.4.5 Setting communication parameters for individual devices................................................. 5-56
5.4.6 Setting the communication parameters for the combination ............................................. 5-57
5.4.7 Updating parameter sets ................................................................................................... 5-59
5.4.8 Printing combination information ....................................................................................... 5-62
5.4.9 Time synchronization......................................................................................................... 5-63
5.5 Synchronizing circuit breakers........................................................................................... 5-65
5.6 Creating user-definable functions with CFC ..................................................................... 5-69
5.7 Establishing a default display ............................................................................................ 5-79
5.8 Designing a control display................................................................................................ 5-82
5.9 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-84
5.10 Date and time control ........................................................................................................ 5-88
5.11 Configuring metered values............................................................................................... 5-92

5.11.1 Using pulse metered value ................................................................................................ 5-92
5.11.2 Using measured value metered value ............................................................................... 5-95
5.12 Configuring limit values (LV).............................................................................................. 5-98
6 Functions........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Device, General Settings (Device, General)........................................................................ 6-3

6.2.1 Mode of operation ............................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Setting Notes ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Settings overview ................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.4 Information overview ........................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) ........................................................................... 6-8

6.3.1 Mode of operation ............................................................................................................... 6-8
6MD663/6MD664 Manual iii

C53000-G1876-C102-2
6.3.2 Setting Notes ....................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.3 Settings overview................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.4 Control Authorization (Cntrl Authority) ................................................................................. 6-9

6.4.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.4.2 Information overview.......................................................................................................... 6-10
6.5 Control Device (Control Device) ........................................................................................ 6-11

6.5.1 Mode of operation.............................................................................................................. 6-11
6.6 Measurement (Measurement) ........................................................................................... 6-12

6.7 Threshold-Switch (Thresh.-Switch).................................................................................... 6-13

6.8 Measurement U 1.packet (MU U_1) .................................................................................. 6-14

6.8.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.8.3 Settings overview............................................................................................................... 6-14
6.9 Measurement I 1.packet (MU I_1) ..................................................................................... 6-15

6.9.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.10 Measurement 1phase 1.packet (MU1P_1) ........................................................................ 6-16

6.10.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.11 Measurement 3phase 1.packet (MU3P_1) ........................................................................ 6-18

6.11.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.12 Measurement Aron 1.packet (MUAron_1) ......................................................................... 6-21

6.12.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.13 SYNC Function group 1 (SYNC function 1)....................................................................... 6-23

iv 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
6.13.2 Setting Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.13.3 Parameter overview........................................................................................................... 6-38
6.13.4 Information overview ......................................................................................................... 6-39
6.14 Command editing .............................................................................................................. 6-41

6.14.1 Command types ............................................................................................................... 6-42
6.14.2 Sequence in the command path........................................................................................ 6-43
6.14.3 Switching error protection.................................................................................................. 6-44
6.14.3.1 Locked/unlocked control.................................................................................................... 6-44
6.14.4 Command logging / acknowledgement ............................................................................. 6-52
7 Control during Operation................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Information retrieval............................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Annunciations ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.1 Message output ................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.2 Warning messages.............................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.1.3 Event log (operating messages).......................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.1.4 Saving and deleting message memories............................................................................. 7-6
7.1.1.5 General interrogation........................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous annunciation .................................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.2 Measured values and metered values................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.2.1 Measured values ................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.2.2 Energy meter ..................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.2 Controlling device functions............................................................................................... 7-14

7.2.1 Reading and setting date/time of day ................................................................................ 7-14
7.2.2 Influencing information on the system interface during a test operation .......................... 7-19
7.3 System control................................................................................................................... 7-22

7.3.1 Controlling via higher-level control technology .................................................................. 7-23
7.3.2 Displaying switch position and switching........................................................................... 7-23
7.3.3 Manual overwrite ............................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.4 Setting status..................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.3.5 Interlocks ........................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.3.6 Control authority ................................................................................................................ 7-31
7.3.7 Control mode ..................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.8 Control messages.............................................................................................................. 7-32
8 Mounting and Commissioning ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 Mounting and connection .................................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.1 Mounting.............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.2 Connection variants............................................................................................................. 8-5
8.1.3 Hardware adaptation ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.1.3.2 Dismounting the device ....................................................................................................... 8-7
8.1.3.3 Switching elements on printed-circuit boards (PCB) ........................................................... 8-9
8.1.3.4 Interface modules .............................................................................................................. 8-17
8.1.3.5 Assembly of the device...................................................................................................... 8-19
6MD663/6MD664 Manual v
C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.2 Checking the connections.................................................................................................. 8-20
8.2.1 Checking the data connections of the serial interfaces ..................................................... 8-20
8.2.2 Checking the system connections ..................................................................................... 8-22
8.3 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 8-24

8.3.1 User-definable functions .................................................................................................... 8-24
8.3.2 Switching on and of the test mode and the transmission blocking .................................... 8-25
8.3.3 Checking switching statuses of the binary inputs/outputs ................................................. 8-25
8.3.4 Switching test of the configured operating equipment ....................................................... 8-27
8.3.5 Testing system interface.................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4 Switching the device available for operation...................................................................... 8-30
9 Maintenance and troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Routine checks .................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Maintenance measures ....................................................................................................... 9-4

9.3.1 Replacing the buffer battery................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3.1.1 Replacing the battery with a housing for panel surface or cabinet mounting ...................... 9-4
9.3.1.2 Battery replacement with a housing for panel surface mounting with a remote operator
control unit ........................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.1.3 Battery replacement with a housing for panel surface mounting without a remote operator
control unit ........................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 Fault locating ....................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.5 Corrective action/repairs.................................................................................................... 9-12

9.5.1 Software measures............................................................................................................ 9-12
9.5.2 Hardware measures .......................................................................................................... 9-12
9.6 Return ................................................................................................................................ 9-16
10 Technical Data................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 General Device Data ......................................................................................................... 10-2

10.1.1 Analog inputs and outputs ................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.2 Auxiliary voltage................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.3 Binary inputs and outputs .................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.4 Communication interfaces ................................................................................................. 10-5
10.1.5 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests.................................................................................................... 10-9
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests ....................................................................................................... 10-10
10.1.8 Service Conditions........................................................................................................... 10-10
10.1.9 Construction..................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.2 Breaker Control................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.3 Circuit breaker synchronization ....................................................................................... 10-13
vi 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
10.4 Operational measured values.......................................................................................... 10-15
10.5 Additional functions ......................................................................................................... 10-17
10.6 Dimensions...................................................................................................................... 10-18
A Appendix ...........................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ................................................................................A-2

A.1.1 Accessories .........................................................................................................................A-3
A.2 Overview diagrams..............................................................................................................A-5

A.2.1 Housing for panel surface mounting and cabinet mounting ................................................A-6
A.2.2 Housing for surface mounting with remote operator control unit .......................................A-10
A.2.3 Housing for panel surface mounting without operator control unit .................................... A-14
A.3 Connection examples ........................................................................................................A-18
A.4 Pre-installed CFC plan ...................................................................................................... A-22
B Appendix ...........................................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Settings ...............................................................................................................................B-2
B.2 List of Information .............................................................................................................B-16
B.3 Metered Values ................................................................................................................B-36
6MD663/6MD664 Manual vii

C53000-G1876-C102-2
viii 6MD663/6MD664 Manual
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction 1
This chapter presents the SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 device. It provides an over-
view of the scopes of application, features and of the functional scope.
1.1 Overall function 1-2

1.2 Fields of application 1-5
1.3 Features 1-6
1.4 Functional scope 1-7
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 1-1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
1.1 Overall function
The SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 digital bay control device is equipped with a pow-
erful microprocessor system. It processes all tasks from the command input to the cir-
cuit breakers through to the capture of measured variables in a fully digital way. Figure
1-1 illustrates the basic structure of the device.
Analog inputs The measuring inputs (ILx, Ux) transform the currents and voltages coming from the
measuring transducers and adapt them to the internal processing level of the device.
The device is equipped with 3 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs. The current and
voltage inputs can be used individually for capturing measured values. Within the
framework of configuration, 1- or 3-phase evaluation functions are available for eval-
uating the analog inputs. Both phase-earth and phase-phase voltages can be applied
for the voltage inputs. Thanks to the fourth voltage input, an additional reference volt-
MI IA AD C
IL1 Error
Run
IL2
IL3 Output
relay
(configurable)
U1
LEDs
U2 on the
front cover
(configurable)
U3
Display on
U4 the front cover
C
# User to
MU1 interface PC
MU2 Service PC/

interface modem
7 8 9 System Control
Local 4 5 6 interface center
control panel
1 2 3 e.g.
. Time
(6& (17(5 0 +/- DCF77
synchronization
IRIG B
Binary inputs (configurable)
Inter-device Other
communication device
VS
UH Auxiliary voltage
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the des 6MD663/6MD664 digital control device
1-2 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
age for synchronization tasks or a Un residual voltage can be measured in addition to

a 3-phase system.
Moreover, two measuring transformer inputs are available.
The analog variables are transferred to the IA input amplifier board.
The EV input amplifier board ensures a high-resistance termination of the input vari-
ables and includes filters which are optimally adapted to measure-value processing
with regard to their band width and processing speed.
The AD analog/digital converter includes multiplexers, analog/digital converters and
memory blocks for data transfer to the microcomputer.
Microcomputer The C microcomputer system serves to process the control functions and the mea-
system sured variables, especially the following:
Controlling command outputs,
Deciding on trip and starting commands,
Processing signal inputs,
Stocking messages, fault data and fault values for fault analysis purposes,
Controlling signals for logic functions,
Filtering and preparing measured variables,
Constant monitoring of measured variables,
Monitoring the communication with other devices,
Scanning limit values and time sequences,
Managing the operating system and its functions, e.g. data memory, real-time
clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
Binary inputs and Binary inputs/outputs from and to the computer system are routed via the input/output
outputs modules (so-called inputs/outputs). Through these modules, the system obtains infor-
mation from the system (e.g. remote resetting) or from other equipment (e.g. blocking
commands). Outputs are above all commands to the switching devices and messages
for remote signalling of important events and conditions.
Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide
information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults,
status, and functional status of the 6MD663/6MD664.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the 6MD663/6MD664. All information of the device can be accessed using
the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and con-
trol settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter
7). The settings can be modified as are discussed in Chapter 6.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
Serial interfaces The serial user interface in the front cover serves to communicate with a personal
computer by means of the DIGSI 4 user program. This ensures convenient operation
of all device functions.
The serial service interface also allows to communicate with a personal computer by
means of the DIGSI 4 program. This interface is particularly well suited in case of
hard wiring between the devices and the PC or in case of an operation via modem.
The serial system interface serves to transmit all device data to a SICAM Station Con-
troller substation automation system (SICAM SAS). The following selections are pos-
sible: RS485 electrical, optical single ring and optical double ring.
The serial inter-device communication interface on the rear side of the device can be
used to communicate with other SIPROTEC 4 devices also equipped for inter-relay
communication (optional function). This method serves to reduce the workload of the
SICAM SAS central unit and to ensure a redundancy to the system interface.
An additional interface is designed for time synchronization of the internal clock by
means of external synchronization sources.
Additional communication protocols can be implemented via additional interface mod-
ules.
Power Supply The 6MD663/6MD664 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltag-
es. Transient dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the
power supply system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Sub-section
10.1.1).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
1.2 Fields of application
The SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 control device is an integrated part of the SICAM

energy automation system. The command outputs and signal inputs are optimized for
the requirements of high-voltage technology.
When connecting the circuit breaker, this control device can check if the synchroniza-
tion conditions of the two subnetworks to be connected are met (synchronization
check). Consequently, an additional, external synchronization device is no more nec-
essary. The synchronization conditions can be parameterized conveniently by means
of the DIGSI 4 operating program. The device distinguishes between synchronous
and asynchronous networks and reacts differently in case of the connection.
Messages and mea- Operational messages (Event Log) inform on the conditions of the system and the de-
sured values vice itself. Measured variables and values calculated from them can be displayed dur-
ing operations and via the interfaces.
Device messages can be issued for a number of LEDs on the front cover (config-
urable), can be externally further processed via output contacts, linked with user-de-
finable logic functions and/or via serial interfaces (see below: Communication).
Communication Serial interfaces are available for the communication with external operating, control
and memory systems as well as for inter-device communication.
A 9-pole DSUB socket on the front cover ensures the local communication with a per-
sonal computer. By means of the SIPROTEC DIGSI 4 operating software, all oper-
ational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this user interface, such as specify-
ing and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific
logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring de-
vice conditions and measured variables, issuing control commands.
Depending on the individual ordering version, additional interfaces are located on the
rear side of the device. These interfaces serve to establish an extensive communica-
tion with other digital operating, control and memory components:
The service interface can be operated via electrical data lines or fiber optics and also
allows communication via modem. For this reason, remote operation is possible via
personal computer and the DIGSI 4 operating software, e.g. to operate several de-
vices via a central PC.
The system interface ensures the central communication between the device and the
SICAM Substation Controller. It can also be operated via data lines or fiber optics.
An additional interface is optionally available for inter-device communication. This in-
terfaces ensures the communication with other SIPROTEC devices.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
1.3 Features
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system

Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from scanning and digitaliza-
tion of the measured variables through to the preparation and management of the
inter-device communication through to the switch-off and switch-on decisions for
the circuit breakers
Fully galvanic and fault-proof separation of the internal processing switching of the
measuring, control and supply circuits of the system by means of measured-value
transformers, binary input and output modules and d.c. and a.c. voltage converters.
Permanent calculation and display of operational measured values on the front cov-
er is possible
Convenient operation by means of an integrated operator panel or via a connected
personal computer with operator prompting
Communication with central control and memory components possible via serial in-
terfaces (depending on the individual ordering variant), optionally via data line,
modem or fiber optics
Optional inter-device communication for reducing the workload of the control center
Permanent monitoring of the measured variables as well as of the device hardware
and software

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction
1.4 Functional scope
The digital SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 control device includes the following func-
tions:
Synchronization of Monitoring the synchronization conditions of the two subnetworks

the circuit breakers
Distinction between synchronous and asynchronous networks
Consideration of the circuit-breaker operating times in case of asynchronous net-
works
Saving up to eight parameter sets for the synchronization function, to be able to
consider the individual features of circuit breakers
Control Interlock checks providing a high level of security against maloperation

High variance with regard to control device types and operating modes
Control authority Keylock switches for defining the control authority and the control mode
and control mode
Protocoling keylock-switch positions
Measured-value Connecting the measured values according to single- or three-phase system or

connection Aron control
Flexible measured-value processing with configurable measurement packages.
User-definable User-programmable links of internal and external signals for realizing user-defin-
functions able logic functions
Logic functions for Boolean and mathematical equations
Switching sequences and interlocks
Delays and limit-value inquiries
Monitoring Monitoring of internal measuring circuits, auxiliary-voltage supply as well as hard-

functions ware and software components ensures high reliability
Monitoring secondary circuits of current and voltage transformers by means of sum
and symmetry monitoring
Monitoring the communication including the evaluation of the number of faulty
transmission telegrams
Inter-relay Exchanging information between the switching relays, thus reducing the workload
communication of the SICAM SAS center
An interlocked control is also possible if the connection to the control center or the
control center itself is disturbed
Additional Battery-buffered clock which can be synchronized via a synchronization signal

functions (DCF77, IRIG B via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface
Signaling storage for the last 200 operational messages with real-time assignment

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Introduction

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Design and Connection System 2
This chapter describes the design and connections of the 6MD663/6MD664. It ex-
plains what housing versions are possible and what connection methods are used.
Recommended and permitted data for the wiring is given and suitable accessories and
tools are stated.
2.1 Design 6MD663/6MD664 for panel surface and cabinet mounting 2-2
2.2 Type 6MD663/6MD664 with a separate operator unit 2-15
2.3 Type 6MD663/6MD664 without operating unit 2-26

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Design and Connection System
2.1 Design 6MD663/6MD664 for panel surface and cabinet mounting
The 6MD663/6MD664 Bay Control Unit for panel surface and cabinet mounting is a
device in a 7XP20 housing, size 1/1 (of 19").
The different ordering variants have different connection methods.
2.1.1 Housing
The housing is a rectangular tube, that is, open at both ends, having rear panel and
front cover that are specific to the device. The top and bottom are perforated. Guiding
mats are mounted inside the tubular housing on the top and the bottom. The modules
are mounted on these mats. Each guiding mat has visible numbering from 1 to 42 to
indicate the module slots. The modules are interconnected and connected with the
front cover by means of ribbon cables with connectors. The rear panel screwed onto
the tubular housing contains the terminal blocks required for the connections of the de-
vice.
After you have removed the four caps located in the corners and the two covers locat-
ed in the center top and bottom, and unscrewed the six screws, you can remove the
front cover from the front. The front cover includes a membrane keyboard with the op-
erating and display elements necessary to operate the device. All lines of the operat-
ing and display elements are grouped together by means of a converter module in the
front cover and routed through a connector to the processor module (CPU).
There are two rating plates with important data about the device, such as auxiliary volt-
age, test voltages, and order number (MLFB), one located on the right-hand side of
the housing, looking at the terminal blocks, and one inside the front cover.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Front view
3) 1) 13)
13) 13)
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12) RUN ERROR 6MD66
6FKORSODW]
MENU
11)
2)
Breaker trip
$
Door open N9
Spring not charged.
*URXQGIHHGHUZLWK)
7)
LEDs CTRL ESC ENTER
10)
Indications F1 7 8 9
9) Local
Meas. values F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
8) OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
13) 13)
6) 4) 5) 13)
Figure 2-1 Front view of a 6MD663/6MD664 for panel surface mounting and cabinet mounting

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Here is an explanation of the operating and display elements:

1. MENU key
This key opens the main menu.
2. Display panel (LCD)
The LCD is used for graphic display of process and device information as a the
mimic control diagram or as text in various lists. Frequently displayed information
includes the position of the control devices and other process elements, measured
values, metered values, binary information about the status of the bay and the de-
vice, general messages and alarms.
3. Keys for navigation
These keys are used for navigating through the menus of the operator tree or in
the mimic control diagram.
4. Keys for controlling the process
The control axis below the LCDs contains the keys for controlling the process.
5. Numeric keys
The numeric keys are used for entering numeric values.
6. Function keys
Four function keys (F1 to F4) allow you to perform frequently recurring actions very
quickly and simply. Typical applications for them include jumps to a certain posi-
tion in the menu tree. For example, two keys have been pre-assigned in the factory
to display the lists of operation indications (F1) and operational measured values
(F2). Keys F3 to F4 are not pre-assigned. All function keys are freely programma-
ble. Next to the keys on the front cover, there is labeling strip for user-defined la-
beling of the function of each key.
7. CTRL key
This key is used to display the mimic control diagram.
8. Keyswitch
Two keyswitches ensure quick and safe access to the switching between local/
remote control and switching between interlocked/non-interlocked operation
functions.
The keyswitch for locked/non-locked operation cannot be withdrawn in the posi-

tion Interlocking OFF (non-interlocked operation) for safety reasons.
9. 9-way female sub D connector
The connector is used for connecting a PC for operation.
10. LED key
This key is used for testing the LEDs and for resetting the memories of the LEDs
and output relays.
11. LEDs
14 user-parametrizable LEDs are used for displaying any process and device in-
formation. Next to the LEDs on the front cover, there is a labeling strip for user-
defined labeling of the function of each LED.
12. Operating state displays
The two LEDs RUN and ERROR indicate the operating state of the device.
13. Cap of the screws for fixing the front cover.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Rear view Figure 2-2 shows a simplified representation of a device rear panel with screw termi-
nals.
2 2 2 2 2 2 Vaux+
1 1 1 1 1 Vaux- 1
4 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 3
6 6 6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5 5 5
8 8 8 8 8
F 8
7 7 7 7 7 7
R 10
P 10
M 10
K 10
H 10 10
9
9 9 9 9 9
12 12 12 12 12 12
11 11 11 11 11 11
14 14 14 14 14
13 13 13 13 13
16 16 16 16 16
15 15 15 15 15
18 18 18 18 18
17 17 17 17 17
2 2 2 2
C
UART
2
1 1 1 1 1 D
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
4 6 6 6 6
3
Q N 5
L 5
J 5
G 5
Ch2
8 8 8 8
6 7 7 7 7
5
10 10 10 10
9 9 9 9 B A
8 12 12 12 12
7
11 11 11 11
Ch1
not used on the 6MD663
Covers are used for that
Figure 2-2 Rear view of a 6MD663/6MD664 (example assembly)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
2.1.2 Connections with screw terminals
The following types of screw terminal are used for the connections:
Terminal blocks for voltage connections and
Terminal blocks for current connections.
The terminal screws are slot-head screws to be tightened and loosened using a
screwdriver. The heads of the terminal screws are designed for tightening or loosening
using a size 6 x 1 mm screwdriver for slot-head screws.
Terminal blocks The terminal blocks for voltage connections are available in two variants:
(voltage connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8 2
7 1
10 4
9 3
12 6
11 5
14 8
13 7
16 10
15 9
18 12
17 11
18 terminal 12 terminal
Figure 2-3 Terminal blocks with screw terminals for voltage connections rear view
The following figure shows an example of allocation of an individual screw terminal to

its terminal number.
2 Terminal 1
Terminal 2 1
Figure 2-4 Allocation of screw terminal to the terminal number example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Terminal blocks Type of terminal block for current connections:

(current connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
8 terminal
Figure 2-5 Terminal block with screw terminals rear view (example of an 8-terminal current
terminal block)
For terminals of the current connections, the same assignment of terminals to terminal
numbers applies as is shown in Figure 2-4.
The availabe number of contacts is subdivided into 2-pole pairs. A pair is always
formed from two adjacent contacts. The eight-pole current block therefore contains
four pairs.
These pairs in conjunction with the connector on the module side have an integrated
short-circuiting function that short-circuits pairs of adjacent conduction paths when the
module is removed. If the secondary circuit is open, high voltages can occur that pose
a hazard to operating personnel and the transformer insulation.
When the module is plugged in, the current path through the measurement inputs of
the module is terminated with a low resistance.
The short circuit of the current path is automatically interrupted while the module is be-
ing plugged in. This interruption does not occur until safe contacting with the connector
of the module side is guaranteed. This does not release you from your obligation to be
careful handling current transformer secondary circuits.
The short-circuiter of the current contacts is located in the terminal block of the hous-
ing side, the confirmation pin in the connector of the module side.
Connection method You can use ring or spade lugs. To comply with the required insulating clearance, use
(voltage connec- insulated cable lugs only. Otherwise, insulate the crimping zone by appropriate means
tions) (e.g. by covering with a schrink-on sleeve).
The following must be observed:
Cable lugs: diameter of lugs 4 mm;
maximum outer diameter 10 mm;
for conductor cross-sections 1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2, corresponding to AWG 16 to 14.
Use copper conductors only!
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Tyco Electronics AMP Co. are recommended, e.g.
Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 3205650
Spade cable lug: PIDG PN 3212330.
Direct connection: Solid or stranded conductors with end ferrules

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The connection end of an individual cable must be plugged into the terminal chamber
in such a way that it is drawn in as the terminal screw is tightened.
Strip the insulation on solid conductors back 9 mm to 10 mm.
Maximum tightening torque 1.8 Nm.
(current connec- insulated cable lugs only. Otherwise, insulate the crimping zone by appropriate means
for cross-sections of 2.6 mm2 to 6.6 mm2, corresponding to AWG 14 to 10.
Short-circuit links It is possible to group together several terminal points to form a function unit. That is
done using special links.
The short-circuit links can connect two terminal points on the same side of the terminal
block. By connecting further links, you can loop through to further neighboring terminal
points. Make sure that the links are connected on alternate sides. You can connect
two short-circuit links, or one link and one lug, or one single conductor to each termi-
nal point.
The links comply with requirements for protection against electric shock.
There are short-circuit links for voltage and current connections (Figure 2-6).
Link for Link for

voltage connections current connections
Figure 2-6 Short-circuit links for voltage and current connections
The order numbers of the short-circuit links are given in Section A.1 under Accesso-
ries.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Cover caps For terminal blocks with screw terminals, cover caps are available to increase the pro-
tection of personnel against hazardous voltages (degree of protection against access
to dangerous parts) of the terminal module from the standard back of the hand pro-
tection (IP1x) to finger protection (IP2x).
The cover caps provide an enclosure and safely cover all live parts. They are simply
snapped onto the terminal block. Make sure that all screws of the block are screwed
in first. The cover caps are simple to remove using a 6x1 mm screwdriver.
There are two types of cover caps (Figure 2-7):
>PCGF<
:AMP
>PCGF<
:AMP
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
Cover cap for Cover cap for
18-terminal voltage module 12-terminal voltage
and 8-terminal current module
Figure 2-7 Cover caps for terminal blocks
The order numbers of the cover caps are given in Section A.1 under Accessories.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
2.1.3 Connections for plug-in terminals
Plug-in terminals are only available for voltage connections. If the device has current
connections, the necessary terminal blocks with screw terminals are built in.
Terminal blocks The terminal blocks are available in two variants:
c b a
1
4
5
6
c b a
7 1
8 2
9 3
10 4
11 5
12 6
13 7
14 8
15 9
16 10
17 11
18 12
a b c a b c
Figure 2-8 Terminal blocks for plug-in terminals
Figure 2-9 shows the assignment of plug-in terminals to terminal numbers.
c b a
Plug-in terminal 1
1
2
Plug-in terminal 2
12
a b c
Figure 2-9 Assignment of plug-in terminals to connection numbers (example)
A complete set of contacts is available for each plug-in terminal. This set of contacts
consists of three contacts with the following assignment:
Pin a: Signal contact
Pin b: Common contact
Pin c: Shield contact
The signal pins (a) are the only contacts that are directly connected to the connectors
of the printed circuit board side. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or
12 signal contacts are provided (see Figure 2-10).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The common contacts (b) are interconnected and have contact with the connectors
of the module side. They are subdivided into two groups that are not interconnected.
Each group can, for example, be used for signal multiplication or as a common point
for a signal (regardless of the adjacent signal contacts). Depending on the variant of
the terminal block, 18 or 12 common contacts are provided.
The grouping within a terminal block is as follows:
Terminal block with 12 terminals: Group 1 Terminals 1 through 6
Group 2 Terminals 7 through 12
All shielding contacts (c) are interconnected (see Figure 2-10) and routed to the
backplane with which they are connected with a large contact surface. Depending on
the variant of the terminal block, 18 or 12 shield contacts are provided.
Figure 2-10 is a schematic representation of the three types of contact:
12 terminal Signal contact 18 terminal

Common contact
Shield contact
c b a 1 c b a 1
2 a b c 2 a b c
c b a 3 c b a 3
4 a b c
Common contacts, group 1 4 a b c
c b a 5
looped through c b a 5
6 a b c 6 a b c
c b a 7 c b a 7
8 a b c 8 a b c
c b a 9 c b a 9
10 a b c 10 a b c
c b a 11 c b a 11
12 a b c
14 a b c
c b a 15
16 a b c
Shield contacts
c b a 17
looped through 18 a b c
Figure 2-10 Diagram of the terminal blocks
Connection method On the housing side, socket housings are available for the connections of the pin con-
tacts.
There are two variants of the socket housing that only differ in the number of pin sock-
ets (Figure 2-11).
Variant 1: 2-way
Variant 2: 3-way

C53000-G1876-C102-2
a
b a c b
Figure 2-11 Socket housing, 2-way and 3-way
The order numbers of the socket housings are given in Section A.1 under Accesso-
ries.
The socket housings are polarized to prevent incorrect plugging. That ensures, for ex-
ample, that variant 1 (2-way) can only be plugged into pin sockets a and b. An at-
tempt to plug into pin sockets b and c is prevented by the design of the socket hous-
ing c.
The socket housings snap into the terminal block when plugged in. They can be re-
moved again without tools.
The socket housings contain socket contacts to which the corresponding cables can
be crimped. Use only stranded conductors!
You can crimp conductor cross-sections of 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2, corresponding to
AWG 20 to 14.
Use stranded copper conductors only!
The following socket contacts can be used:
Galvanized type:
Cross-section 0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2:
e.g. on reel 4000 pieces type: 08270391 from Tyco Electronics AMP
single item type: 08273961 from Tyco Electronics AMP
The cables are crimped to the contacts using the following tools:
e.g. crimping tool type: 07343721 from Tyco Electronics AMP
die type: 17343871 from Tyco Electronics AMP
Use of single pieces is recommended.
Gold-plated type (recommended):

C53000-G1876-C102-2
After you have crimped the wires, press the contacts into the chambers of the socket
housing until they snap in.
Note: Strain relief for the cables of each socket housing must be ensured with a cable
tie. Strain relief for the cable set as a whole must also be ensured, for example, with
cable ties.
To remove the contacts from the socket housing, the following extraction tool is
required:
Type: 7258401 from Tyco Electronics AMP.
This extraction tool contains a small tube that is subject to wear. It can be ordered
separately:
2.1.4 Connections for fiber-optic cables
Connections For FO connection with ST connectors, there are three variants (Figure 2-12). They
ST connector are provided with cover caps to prevent the ingress of dirt. They can be removed by
turning them 90 counterclockwise.
P master Ch2
AMO
UART
Ch1 P slave
Ch1 P slave
2 channel 1 channel 1 channel

Figure 2-12 FO connections with cover caps
Connection method FO connector type: ST connector

ST connector necessary
fiber type: multimode FO cable
G50/125 m,
G62.5/125 m,
G100/140 m
Wavelength: = approx. 820 nm
Perm. bending radii: for indoor cables rmin = 5 cm
for outdoor cables rmin = 20 cm
Class 1 according to EN 608251 is complied with when using fiber types:

G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
2.1.5 Connections for wired serial interfaces
Connections 9-way sub D female connectors are used for the connections (Figure 2-13). The pin
assignment of the sub D female connectors is described in Section 8.2.1.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
9 6 6
RS232-FO
6 9 9
1 5 5
P slave
AME
Operating interface Time synchronization
on the front of the device interface on the
Serial interface rear of the device
on the rear of the device
Figure 2-13 9-way sub D female connectors
Connection method For the connectors you can use all commercial type 9-way sub D connectors accord-
ing to MILC24308 and DIN 41652.
The connecting cables will depend on the type of interface:
RS232: 3- or 5-core, shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV51004.
RS485: 3-core data cable, twisted and shielded.
Profibus: 2-core or 4-core, twisted and shielded.
Cable type A according to DIN 19245 Part 2 and EN 50170 vol. 2, twisted and
shielded,
Characteristic impedance: 135 to 165 (f > 100 kHz),
Capacitance per unit length: < 30 nF/km,
Loop impedance: < 110 /km,
Conductor diameter: > 0.64 mm,
Conductor cross-section: > 0.34 mm2,
e.g., SINEC L2 industrial twisted pair installation wire
(see Catalog IK 10 SIMATIC NET, Industrial Communications Networks).
Time synchronization: At least 2-core, shielded.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
2.2 Type 6MD663/6MD664 with a separate operator unit
The 6MD663/6MD664 Bay Control Unit with a separate operating unit is intended for
mounting in a low-voltage box. It consists of a device in a 7XP20 housing, size 1/1 (of
19), for surface mounting and of an operating unit for flush mounting in a mounting
panel.
The housing and the operator unit are connected via a 2.2 m long 68-conductor cable.
The cable assembly is part of the operating unit and connects it to the housing via a
68-way connector (see Figure 2-14).
2.2.1 Housing and operating unit
Housing The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a device-specific rear panel and front
cover. The top and bottom are perforated. Guiding mats are mounted inside the tubu-
lar housing on the top and the bottom. The modules are mounted on these mats. Each
guiding mat has visible numbering from 1 to 42 to indicate the module slots. The mod-
ules are interconnected and connected with the front cover by means of ribbon cables
with connectors. The rear panel screwed onto the tubular housing contains the termi-
nal blocks required for the connections of the device.
There are two rating plates with important data about the device, such as auxiliary volt-
age, test voltages, and order number (MLFB), one located on the right-hand side of
the housing, looking at the terminal blocks, and one inside the front cover.
There are two brackets, one at the top, one at the bottom, each with five holes, for
mounting the housing.
Operating unit The operating unit consists of a front cover and a housing. The front cover includes a
membrane keyboard with the operating and display elements necessary to operate
the device. In the housing, the cable for connection with the device is connected to the
membrane keyboard through connectors.
Before mounting the operating unit in the mounting panel, you must first remove the
four caps in the corners of the front cover. Mounting is then possible using suitable
screws in the elongated holes that then become visible.
Note:
You must not remove the cable of the operating unit even when the device is switched
off because otherwise it will not be operable after switch-on and will have to be re-ini-
tialized.
Removing the cable during operation can destroy the CPU of the device.
Figure 2-1 shows the meanings of the operating and display elements.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
View of the device The following figure provides a schematic representation of the 6MD663/6MD664 type
and the operating with a separate operating unit, housing with plug-in terminals, and connecting cable.
unit
This terminal block

is not used on the
6MD663
c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a
1 1 1 1 1 1 Vaux+
2 2 2 2 2 Vaux- 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
F 7
SIEMENS 8 8 SIPROTEC
8 8 8 8
9 RUN 9 ERROR 9 9 9
K K K 6MD66 K K H 9
10 10 10 10 10 10
Device OFF 11 11 11 11 11 11
Start CB1 12a b c

Schloplatz 12a b c 12a b c 12a b c 12a b c 12
MENU a b c
13 13 13 13 13
Start CB2
14 14 14 14 14
Start CB3 15 15 15 15 15
Start G 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17
Fault
18 18 18 18 18
a b c a b c a b c a b c a b c
Breaker trip c b a c b a
1000 A 1 1
Door open 21 kV
2 2 D C
Spring not charged 3 3
4 4
Ch2 Ch1
5 5
6 6
7
G 7
8 8
Ground feeder with F4
9 9
B A
10 10
11 11
LEDs CTRL ESC ENTER
12 12
Ch1
a b c a b c
Indications F1 7 8 9
Local
Meas. values F2 4 5 6
Remote
Fault
indication F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
Normal
F4 0 +/-
Figure 2-14 6MD663/6MD664 with separate operating unit

C53000-G1876-C102-2
(voltage connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8 2
7 1
10 4
9 3
12 6
11 5
14 8
13 7
16 10
15 9
18 12
17 11
Figure 2-15 Terminal blocks with screw terminals for voltage connections rear view

2 Terminal 1
Terminal 2 1
Figure 2-16 Assignment of screw terminals to terminal numbers example

C53000-G1876-C102-2

(current connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
8 terminal
Figure 2-17 Terminal block with screw terminals rear view (example of an 8-terminal
current terminal block)
four pairs.
The short circuit of the current path is automatically interrupted while the module is be-
ing plugged in. This interruption does not occur until safe contacting with the connector
of the module side is guaranteed. This does not release you from your obligation to be
careful handling current transformer secondary circuits.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
nal point.
Link for Link for

ries.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
>PCGF<
:AMP
>PCGF<
:AMP
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS

C53000-G1876-C102-2
c b a
1
4
5
6
c b a
7 1
8 2
9 3
10 4
11 5
12 6
13 7
14 8
15 9
16 10
17 11
18 12
a b c a b c
c b a
Plug-in terminal 1
1
2
Plug-in terminal 2
12
a b c
Figure 2-21 Assignment of plug-in terminals to terminal numbers (example)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The common contacts (b) are interconnected and have no contact with the connec-
tors of the module side. They are subdivided into two groups that are not interconnect-
ed. Each group can, for example, be used for signal multiplication or as a common
point for a signal (regardless of the adjacent signal contacts). Depending on the vari-
ant of the terminal block, 18 or 12 common contacts are provided.

Common contact
Shield contact
c b a 1 c b a 1
2 a b c 2 a b c
c b a 3 c b a 3
4 a b c
c b a 5
6 a b c 6 a b c
c b a 7 c b a 7
8 a b c 8 a b c
c b a 9 c b a 9
10 a b c 10 a b c
c b a 11 c b a 11
12 a b c
14 a b c
c b a 15
16 a b c
Shield contacts
c b a 17
tacts.
ets (Figure2-11).
Variant 1: 2-way
Variant 2: 3-way

C53000-G1876-C102-2
a
b a c b
Figure 2-23 Socket housing, 2- and 3-way
ries.
ing c.
AWG 20 to 14.
Galvanized type:
e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 08270391 from Tyco Electronics AMP

C53000-G1876-C102-2
cable ties.
required:
separately:
P master Ch2
AMO
UART
Ch1 P slave
Ch1 P slave


G50/125 m,
G62.5/125 m,
G100/140 m
Class 1 according to EN 608251 is complied with when using fiber types:

G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
9 6 6
RS232-FO
6 9 9
1 5 5
P slave
AME
shielded,

C53000-G1876-C102-2
2.3 Type 6MD663/6MD664 without operating unit
The 6MD663/6MD664 Bay Control Unit without a separate operating unit is intended
for mounting in a low-voltage box. It consists of a device in a 7XP20 housing, size 1/1
(of 19), for surface mounting, and a supplied round 3-conductor cable assembly.
The connection between the housing and the operating interface is made through a
2.5 m long 3-conductor round cable assembly.
2.3.1 Housing
Housing The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a device-specific rear panel and front
cover. The top and bottom are perforated. Guiding mats are mounted inside the tubu-
lar housing on the top and the bottom. The modules are mounted on these mats. Each
guiding mat has visible numbering from 1 to 42 to indicate the module slots. The mod-
ules are interconnected and connected with the front cover by means of ribbon cables
with connectors. The rear panel screwed onto the tubular housing contains the termi-
nal blocks required for the connections of the device.
One rating plate with important data about the device, such as auxiliary voltage, test
voltages, and order number (MLFB), is located on the right-hand side of the housing,
looking at the terminal blocks.
There are two brackets, one at the top, one at the bottom, each with five holes, for
mounting the housing.
Round cable If the device is ordered without an operating unit, a cable (round cable assembly, 3-
assembly, conductor) is included that has a 9-way sub D female connector at one end for mount-
3-conductor ing in the mounting panel. The female connector at the other end of the cable is used
for connecting an operating PC.
Note:
You must not remove the 3-conductor round cable assembly even when the device is
switched off because otherwise it will not be operable after switch-on and will have to
be re-initialized.
Removing the cable during operation may destroy the CPU of the device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
View of the device The following figure provides a schematic representation of the 6MD663/6MD664 type
with a 3-conductor without a separate operating unit, housing with terminals, and 3-conductor round ca-
round cable ble assembly.
assembly
This terminal block

is not used on the
6MD663
c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a
1 1 1 1 1 1 Vaux+
2 2 2 2 2 Vaux- 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
F 7
8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
K K K K K H 9
10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11
12a b c 12a b c 12a b c 12a b c 12a b c 12

13 13 13 13 13 a b c
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18
a b c a b c a b c a b c a b c
c b a c b a
1 1
2 2 D C
3 3
4 4
Ch2 Ch1
5 5
6 6
7
G 7
8 8
9 9
B A
10 10
11 11
12 12
Ch1
a b c a b c
Figure 2-26 6MD663/6MD664 without an operating unit

C53000-G1876-C102-2
(voltage connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8 2
7 1
10 4
9 3
12 6
11 5
14 8
13 7
16 10
15 9
18 12
17 11
Figure 2-27 Terminal block with screw terminals for voltage connections rear view

2 Terminal 1
Terminal 2 1
Figure 2-28 Assignment of screw terminals to terminal numbers example

C53000-G1876-C102-2

(current connec-
tions)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
8 terminal
Figure 2-29 Terminal block with screw terminals rear view (example of an 8-terminal cur-
rent terminal block)
four pairs.
The short circuit of the current path is automatically interrupted while the modules is
being plugged in. This interruption does not occur until safe contacting with the con-
nector of the module side is guaranteed. This does not release you from your obliga-
tion to be careful handling current transformer secondary circuits.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
nal point.
Link for Link for

ries.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
>PCGF<
:AMP
>PCGF<
:AMP
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS

C53000-G1876-C102-2
c b a
1
4
5
6
c b a
7 1
8 2
9 3
10 4
11 5
12 6
13 7
14 8
15 9
16 10
17 11
18 12
a b c a b c
c b a
Plug-in terminal 1
1
2
Plug-in terminal 2
12
a b c
Figure 2-33 Assignment of plug-in terminals to terminal numbers (example)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The common contacts (b) are interconnected and have a contact with the connectors
of the module side. They are subdivided into two groups that are not interconnected.
Each group can, for example, be used for signal multiplication or as a common point
for a signal (regardless of the adjacent signal contacts). Depending on the variant of
the terminal block, 18 or 12 common contacts are provided.

Common contact
Shield contact
c b a 1 c b a 1
2 a b c 2 a b c
c b a 3 c b a 3
4 a b c
c b a 5
6 a b c 6 a b c
c b a 7 c b a 7
8 a b c 8 a b c
c b a 9 c b a 9
10 a b c 10 a b c
c b a 11 c b a 11
12 a b c
14 a b c
c b a 15
16 a b c
Shield contacts
c b a 17
tacts.
ets (Figure 2-11).
Variant 1: 2-way
Variant 2: 3-way

C53000-G1876-C102-2
a
b a c b
Figure 2-35 Socket housing, 2- and 3-way
ries.
ing c.
AWG 20 to 14.
Galvanized type:

C53000-G1876-C102-2
cable ties.
required:
separately:
P master Ch2
AMO
UART
Ch1 P slave
Ch1 P slave


G50/125 m,
G62.5/125 m,
G100/140 m
Classe 1 according to EN 608251 is complied with when using fiber types:

G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
9 6 6
RS232-FO
6 9 9
1 5 5
P slave
AME
shielded,

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps 3
This Chapter describes the first steps that should be taken upon receiving the
SIPROTEC 4 6MD663/6MD664.
Unpacking and re-packing is explained.
Visual and electrical checks that are appropriate for initial inspection are discussed.
The electrical tests include navigating through the operating menus of the device us-
ing the operator control panel on the front of the device, and the operator control win-
dows in DIGSI 4. For personnel inexperienced with the 6MD663/6MD664, these
checks also provide a quick and simple method for understanding the operation of the
control panel and DIGSI 4. The electrical tests can be done without measuring quan-
tities being applied.
Observations relevant to long-term storage of the device are noted.
3.1 Unpacking and re-packing the device 3-2

3.2 Receiving inspection and testing of the device 3-3
3.3 User interface 3-4
3.4 Storage 3-12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
3.1 Unpacking and re-packing the device
The 6MD663/6MD664 is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC

6025521.
Unpacking and packing must be done with usual care, without using force, and with
appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct me-
chanical condition.
Please observe also the brief reference booklet and all notes and hints that are en-
closed in the packaging.
The transport packaging can be reused in the same manner for further transport. Stor-
age packaging alone, for the individual devices, is not sufficient for transport. If alter-
native packaging is used, shock requirements according to IEC 60255211 Class 2
and IEC 60255212 Class 1 must be met.
The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the
power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilib-
rium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
3.2 Receiving inspection and testing of the device
3.2.1 Checking nominal data
Order designation First, check the complete order designation (MLFB) of the device to find out if your ver-
sion complies with the necessary nominal data and functions and if all required acces-
sories are available. The complete order designation of the device is noted on the rat-
ing plate fixed on the upper device pan-
el.
The order key is indicated in annex A.1. The factory settings of the binary inputs en-
sure that the direct current used as control variable equals the supply voltage.
3.2.2 Electrical check
Please observe the operating conditions specified by VDE0100 and VDE0105

section 1.
Before applying voltage to the device for the first time, the device should be stored in
the operating area for a minimum of two hours to ensure temperature equilibrium and
to avoid dampness and condensation.
Warning!
The following check steps are partially executed when dangerous voltage is applied.
For this reason, they may only be executed by qualified staff familiar with and observ-
ing the safety requirements and precaution measures.
For a first electrical device check, it is sufficient to provide for a safe grounding of the
device and to apply the supply voltage:
q Connect the device grounding connection with the protective ground. For the ver-
sions with cabinet or control panel mounting, the grounding screws are located on
the rear panel of the device, whereas the panel mounting version includes a
grounding terminal.
q Wire the supply voltage with the correct level and polarity to the device inputs via a
switch or an automatic safety circuit breaker. Please observe the overview plans in
annex A.2.
q Switch on switch or safety circuit breaker for the supply voltage.
q The green light-emitting diode RUN on the front cover must light up after 0.5 sec-
onds at the latest and the red ERROR display must go out after 10 seconds.
q After a maximum delay of 15 seconds, the start-up messages (displaying the com-
plete order designation, the implemented software version and the factory number)
disappear from the screen and the basic display is shown. Some light-emitting di-
odes can light up, depending on the pre-set configuration.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
3.3 User interface
3.3.1 Operation via the device user interface
Operator Control The device has a hierarchically structured operating tree, within which movements
Panel and actions are made using the , , , keys and the MENU, ENTER , CTRL and ESC
keys on the front panel.
The brief discussions below illustrate the navigation techniques using the integrated
operations in the operator control panel. Some typical operations are covered. For
easier understanding, the accompanying figures show the entire contents of the
menus, while only a limited number of lines can be seen in the display at any time.
Reading out the Proceed as follows to read out the complete device type designation, the implemented
type designation software version and the serial number:
q As soon as the device is ready for operation, you must first press the MENU key. The
MAIN MENU is displayed.
q Use to select the Settings menu point and then to switch to the parameter pro-
cessing. The SETTING selection is displayed on screen (Figure 3-1).
q Next, use to select the Setup/Extras menu point and then to switch to the
SETUP/EXTRAS selection.
MAIN MENU 04/05

---------------------
Annunciation > 1
>Measurement > 2
Control > 3
>Settings > 4 SETTINGS 04/04
Test/Diagnosis > 5 ---------------------
Configuration > 02
System data 1> 03
>Setup/Extras > 04
>Device > 10
Figure 3-1 SETTINGS submenu
q Use to select the MLFB/Version menu point and to switch to the MLFB/
VERSION menu (see Figure 3-2).
The device-specific data are listed on screen. Use the key to display additional
characteristic variables:

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
SETUP/EXTRAS 05/06
---------------------
Date/Time of day > 1
>Clock control> 2
Interfaces> 3
VD address > 4
>MLFB/Version > 5 MLFB/VERSION 01/03
Contrast > 6 ---------------------
MLFB: 6MD6631-2DA44-
0AA0
BF-No.:0002041215
Firmware: V04.00.16
P set: V04.00.16
Boot system: V01.02.06
.
.
Figure 3-2 Displaying device-specific data (examples)
Viewing Measured To view the measured values:

Values
q If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item Measurement, and move to the measure-
ment values using the key. The MEASUREMENT sub-menu appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item Operation. sec (operating measured values,
secondary), and switch to the OPERATION. SEC sub-menu using the key.
q Using the and keys, all operating measured values can be viewed.
Since no measured AC voltages or currents are present at this time, all operating mea-
sured values show near zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant.
To return to the main menu, press the MENU key once, or repeatedly press the ESC key
or the key.
Viewing Operation- Reading the operational messages is described to serve as an additional example.
al Messages
q If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item Annunciation, and switch to the annuncia-
tions using the key. The ANNUNCIATION sub-menu appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item Event Log, and move to the EVENT LOG
sub-menu using the key.
The last number in the upper right corner of the display indicates the number of oper-
ational messages stored in memory. The number before the slash indicates the mes-
sage presently being displayed. Upon entering the menu, the latest (newest) message
is shown. The date and time of the event are shown in the display line above the mes-
sage.
q Use the key to read other operational messages.
q Press the LED key; all LEDs should illuminate. Press the key. The newest mes-
sage in the event log should be Reset LED, and the number of messages in mem-
ory should increase by one (maximum of 200).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
To return to the main menu, press the MENU key once, or repeatedly press the ESC key
or the key.
Setting the contrast It is possible to correct the contrast of the integrated LCD. For example, a more inten-
on the display sive contrast may ensure that the display can be read more easily from a flat angle.
The contrast gets stronger if you select a higher number. With a too poor or a too
strong contrast, it may no more be possible to read the display and to operate the de-
vice via the integrated user interface. For this reason, modify the preselected value
only in little steps (by 1 or 2 degrees).
q As soon as the device is ready for operation, you must first press the MENU key. The
MAIN MENU is displayed.
q Use to select the Parameter menu point and to switch to the parameter pro-
cessing. The PARAMETER menu is displayed.
q Use to select Setup/Extras and to switch to SETUP/EXTRAS (see Figure 3-
3).
q Next, use to select the Contrast menu point.
q To correct the contrast of the integrated LCD, click on ENTER . The former setting is
displayed in a frame with a blinking cursor.
q Use the numerical keys to overwrite the former setting by the new one desired by
you.
q Click ENTER to confirm your selection.
Click ESC to leave the menu or click MENU to return to the main menu.
SETUP/EXTRAS 06/06
--------------------
Date/Time of day > 1
Clock control> 2
Interfaces> 3
VD address > 4
MLFB/Version > 5
>Contrast > 6 ENTER SETUP/EXTRAS 06/06
--------------------
MLFB/Version > 5
Contrast > 6
22
Figure 3-3 Operator menu for modifying the display contrast

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
3.3.2 Operation via DIGSI 4
Operator guidance The operator guidance of the DIGSI 4 program is based on the usual Windows tech-
niques used for PC applications. Its user interface is modern and intuitive. Chapter 4
of this manual and the DIGSI 4 device operation manual provide further details on
this subject.
By means of some typical operations, the following paragraphs provide a brief illustra-
tion of the device operation via DIGSI 4. To do this, it is, however, necessary to con-
nect the SIPROTEC device with the PC and to adjust the interface data. Proceed as
follows:
q Establish a physical connection between a serial PC interface and the front inter-
face of the device.
q Call the DIGSI 4 operating program in your PC.
Creating a new q Create a new project by clicking on File New in the menu bar of the DIGSI 4
project Manager.
Figure 3-4 Dialog box for creating a new project
q Enter a name of the new project into the Name input box (e.g. P_6MD663) and then
click OK to close the box.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
q Click on Folder in the next window. From the Device menu bar, you should than se-
lect the Device DIGSI (Plug & Play) option (Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5 Device menu selection with the Device DIGSI (Plug & Play) option
q The Plug & Play dialog box opens.

q Enter the designation of your PC interface (COM 1, 2, 3 or 4). In the Frame option
of the drop-down list box, you must now select the transmission format for estab-
lishing the connection.
q Next, click OK. DIGSI 4 automatically finds out the device type and reads out the
settings (transmission format and speed) for communication via the interfaces.
Figure 3-6 Plug & Play for communication between the PC and the device
A direct (on-line) connection is established and data is exchanged between the PC

and the device. Finally, the DIGSI 4 basic image opens (see Figure 3-7).
q Double-click in the left (navigation) window to display the structure (directory tree).
q Next, double-click one of the offered menu points to display its contents in the right
(data) window.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
Figure 3-7 DIGSI 4 basic display example
Reading out opera- The process of reading out operational measured values is described in brief as an
tional measured example:
values
q Double-click Measurement in the navigation (left) window.
q Next, click Operational values, secondary in the navigation (left) window.
The (right) data window displays the date and the time of day (Figure 3-8).
q Double-click this input in the data window (right).
Figure 3-8 DIGSI 4 reading out secondary operational values example
A table including the secondary operational values is displayed (see Figure 3-9).
As no measured variables exist by that time, all operational measured values display
a value of approximately zero. Possible deviations of the last position of the number
are irrelevant. The measured values are updated automatically and the cycle time is
indicated in the footer.
The same procedure is applied for reading out measured values or numerical values.
Figure 3-9 DIGSI 4 table of secondary operational measured values example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
Reading out opera- The procedure of reading out operational messages is illustrated in the following as
tional messages another brief example.
q Double-click on Annunciation in the navigation window.
q Next, select Event Log from the function selection.
The (right) data window displays the date and the current time of day.
q Double-click this input in the data window.
A displayed table lists the collected operational messages (see Figure 3-10). All re-
sults are displayed with their cause (e.g. SPN = spontaneous message), value (ON or
OFF), the date and the time of day. The results are assorted according to the time and
the most recent message is placed on top of the list.
Figure 3-10 Operational message window example
q Press the LED key on the device. All light-emitting diodes light up.
q The DIGSI operational messages include the most recent message LED displays
reset as soon as the user initiated a window update which is possible via the View
Update drop-down list box or via the F5 PC function key.
The operational messages can be stored in DIGSI 4 and therefore be deleted in the
device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
Selecting the date Proceed as follows to manually enter the date and the time of day:
and the time of day
q Select Device from the menu bar (see Figure 3-11).
q Next, click Set Date & Time.
Figure 3-11 Selecting the Set Date & Time option example
The Set clock & date in device dialog box opens. The displayed values correspond to
the current date and roughly to the current time of day. the day of the week is auto-
matically determined from the date and cannot be edited.
q Edit the Date and Time input boxes and be aware to use the correct spelling (see
Figure 3-12).
q Click on OK to transfer the set values to the device. The former values are changed
and the current dialog box closes.
Figure 3-12 Set clock & date in device dialog box

C53000-G1876-C102-2
First Steps
3.4 Storage
If the device is to be stored, note:

SIPROTEC 4 devices and associated assemblies should be stored in dry and clean
rooms, with a maximum temperature range of 25 C to +55 C (12 F to 131 F).
See Sub-section 10.1.7 under Technical Data. To avoid premature aging of the elec-
trolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature range of +10 C to +35 C (50 F
to 95 F), is recommended for storage.
The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup.
After extended storage, the power supply of the device should be energized, approx-
imately every two years, for one or two days to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors
in the power supply. This procedure should also be done prior to the device being put
in service. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), pre-warming is achieved at the
same time, and condensation is prevented.
After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the oper-
ating area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain tem-
perature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring.
n

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices 4
This chapter provides an overview of the SIPROTEC 4 family of devices, of the inte-
gration of these devices into bay control systems, of the principle setting procedure as
well as of the operating conditions.
Please note that this chapter generally describes the SIPROTEC 4 family of devices
and that the illustrated examples may deviate from your specific device type with re-
gard to several details. In addition to this, it is possible that your individual device ver-
sion does not support all functions.
For more details regarding the functional scope of your device, individual settings and
the system data representation structure, please refer to the following chapters and
the DIGSI 4 manual.
4.1 General 4-2

4.2 Operator control facilities 4-5
4.3 Information retrieval 4-9
4.4 Controlling 4-14
4.5 Manual overwrite / tagging 4-16
4.6 General setting information 4-17
4.7 Functional scope 4-20
4.8 Configuration 4-21
4.9 Display Editor 4-24
4.10 CFC programmable logic 4-26
4.11 Power system data 4-27
4.12 Setting groups 4-28
4.13 General device settings 4-30
4.14 Time Synchronization 4-31
4.15 Serial interfaces 4-32
4.16 Passwords 4-34

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.1 General
The SIPROTEC 4 brand name stands for an innovative product series of numerical
protective and control devices with open communication interfaces for remote control
and setting, an ergonomically designed user interface and flexible functionality.
4.1.1 Protection concept
The devices use numerical measuring techniques. Fully numerical signal processing
ensures high measurement accuracy and long-term consistency as well as reliable
handling of harmonics and transients. Digital filtering techniques and dynamic stabili-
zation of measured values provide for highest security in determining the devices cor-
rect responses. Device errors are recognized and quickly annunciated by integrated
self-monitoring routines. Failure of protection during a fault is therefore almost entirely
prevented.
You may choose devices with separate protective and process control functions, or
select a solution that implements both requirements.
The following solutions are available:
q Protection and control in separate devices,
q Protective devices that provide the capability to control the circuit breaker or primary
switching device through a communication interface,
q Devices with combined features that, in addition to protective functions, allow on-
site operation for several circuit breakers and primary switching devices and that
provide extensive substation control functions.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.1.2 Communication
SIPROTEC 4 devices are completely suited for the requirements of modern commu-
nications technology. They are equipped with interfaces that allow for integration into
higher-level control centers as well as with convenient setting and operating features
via a local PC or via a modem connection.
SIPROTEC 4 supports PROFIBUS FMS
Human Machine Interface to telecontrol centers

SICAM WinCC IEC60870-5-101
DIGSI 4
DCF, GPS
Time synchronization
SICAM SC
IEC60870-5-103
Profibus FMS
Bay devices
Figure 4-1 Integrating bay devices into the SICAM substation control system examples
In the sample configuration in Figure 4-1, data transmitted from the bay devices can
be processed in the sub-station control device SICAM SC, displayed at the SICAM
WinCC Human-Machine Interface, and transferred by the remote terminal unit inter-
faces (via the network channels) to network control centres (SCADA).
In the case when commands are sent to the devices, equally flexible processing is
possible; that is, substation switching operations can be initiated from the network
control centres, as well as from the operation and observation unit of the substation
control system.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.1.3 Settings
The devices in the SIPROTEC 4 family are delivered with default settings. After set-
tings are made for specific applications, the devices are suitable for direct use in power
systems.
The windows-based DIGSI 4 software program offers an application-oriented inter-
face with thorough guidance for quick and simple setting of the devices.
DIGSI 4 is installed on a normal personal computer. For local use, the PC is connect-
ed to the operating serial interface on the front panel of the device.
4.1.4 Operations
All on-site operations of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be done with DIGSI 4. Exam-
ples of operations are switching, retrieval of information, or changing of setting groups.
These operations can also be performed using the operator control panel on the front
of the SIPROTEC 4 device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.2 Operator control facilities
4.2.1 Operator control panels
The ergonomically designed operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 devices

serves to perform local operations and specifications of individual device settings. In
addition to this, it displays all information required for system management.
The operating panel contains either a full graphical display or a four-line display, de-
pending on the specific device of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
Operator control The operator control panel includes a display for the graphical representation of the
panel with graphics feeder. Alternatively, the following displays are provided:
display
q Default display with display functions, e.g. switching status, measured values, etc.
q Control display for performing additional switching operations
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ63
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
Schloplatz RUN ERROR 7SJ63
MENU
Gert AUS
Anreg. L1 Schloplatz
MENU
Anreg. L2
Anreg. L3
Anreg. E
Strung
1000 A
21 kV
Schalterfall
1000 A
Tr geffnet 21 kV
Feder ungesp.
Abzweig erden mit F4
LED CTRL Abzweig

ESCerden mit F4
ENTER
LED CTRL ESC ENTER

Annunciations F1 7 8 9
Local
Measurement F2 4 5 6
Remote Meldungen F1 7 8 9
Local
Trip Log F3 1
Mewerte2 3
Interlocking Remote F2 4 5 6
OFF
F4 Strfall- 0 +/-
Normal meldung F3 1 2 3
Test
Abzweig
erden F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 4-2 SIPROTEC 4 devices, operator control panel with graphic display examples

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Operator control
panel with four-line
display
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SA522
MAIN MENU 01/04

SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SA522
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MAIN 01/04
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ61/62
Annunciations 1
MENU
Measurement 2
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciations 1
MENU
Measurement 2
LED ESC ENTER Trip MENU

Pickup A
Meldungen Pickup B
F1 7 8 9
Pickup C
Mewerte F2 4 5 6 LED Pickup GND ESC ENTER
Device faulty
F3 1 2 3
Meldungen F1 7 8 9
F4 0 +/-
Mewerte
LED F2 4 5 6 ESC ENTER
F3 1 2 3
Event Log F1 7 8 9
F4 0 +/-
Oper. Pri F2 4 5 6
Trip Log
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 4-3 SIPROTEC 4 devices, operator control panel with 4-line display examples
Note:
Refer to Chapter 2 to determine the type of operating field for your specific
SIPROTEC4 device.
The operating and display elements provide the following functions:
Display Process and device information is displayed on the LCD display (graphically in a con-
trol display or as text). Commonly displayed information includes switching status,
measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of the de-
vice, protection information, general messages, and alarms.
The light for the display is normally off. The light automatically turns on whenever a
key is pressed on the operating field. If no input from the operator control panel occurs
for ten minutes, then the light turns off again. The light can be controlled via a binary
input that is configured for this purpose (e.g. a door contact).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Keys The keys have various functions.

q Navigation through the operating menus of the display and in the control display is
performed with the , , , keys.
q The main menu is opened with the MENU key.
q Changes are cancelled or confirmed with the ESC and ENTER keys, respectively.
q Numerical values are entered with the 0 to 9 keys, the . key for a decimal
point, and the +/ key for a negative sign. If a value of infinity () is desired, press
the decimal point key twice; appears in the display.
q The F1 to F4 keys are programmable. The keys are typically used to execute com-
monly performed actions. Labelling strips are provided.
q Latched LEDs and output relays are reset and the group of LEDs are tested with
the LED key.
LEDs q Freely settable LED for displaying any process or device information with labelling
strips for individual function labelling.
q The LEDs RUN and ERROR indicate the operating condition of the device.
Operator-process 9-pole DSUB socket for connecting a PC for operation with DIGSI 4.
interface
Additional operat- Some SIPROTEC 4 devices are equipped with the following additional operating el-
ing elements ements:
q Control keys below the display (ON /OFF );
q CTRL key CTRL for selecting the control display;
q Keylock switch for
switching between local and remote control and
switching between locked and non-locked operation

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.2.2 DIGSI 4 tools
DIGSI 4 uses the familiar Windows operating environment.
User Guide In DIGSI 4 only the settings that are available within a specific device are shown in
the specific windows. If a protective feature is changed from disabled to enabled in the
Device Configuration, then the settings relevant to that feature become available.
Entering settings for SIPROTEC 4 devices is easy due to many types of assistance
offered, such as context menus, pop-up lists for the selection of available options, and
specific limits for the entry of numerical values.
Configuring A configuration matrix is used to assign the binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs. In-
Inputs and Outputs formation to be stored in the various buffers and transmitted via the system interface
is also selected in this matrix. The setting options are presented in an easy-to-read
tabular format. Parts of the matrix can be minimized or expanded as desired to simplify
the displayed sections, and therefore the setting process. Filter functions can reduce
the size of the matrix to display only relevant information.
Passwords Password entry is required for tasks such as changing settings, executing control
commands, or exercising the test and diagnostics features. The passwords protect
against unauthorized access to these critical tasks.
Commissioning DIGSI 4 simplifies commissioning with test functions for the binary inputs, outputs
Aids and LEDs. Control of primary equipment can be done. The measured values of the
device can be viewed with the program. Oscillographic fault records can be triggered
with DIGSI 4.
Help System The help system clarifies the individual functions and settings, and provides additional
support.
Note:
Detailed information about DIGSI 4 can be found in the DIGSI 4 Manual, order
number E50417-H1176-C097.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.3 Information retrieval
The SIPROTEC 4 family of devices provides several possibilities of getting an over-

view of the current operating conditions of your system. The information is divided into
several groups depending on the information type:
q Annunciation
q Measurement
q Oscillographic fault records
Remote If your device is integrated into a substation control system, you may transmit your in-
formation via a connection to the system interface of the SIPROTEC 4 device to:
q higher-level control centers or
q substation control devices, e.g. SICAM SC.
Local The SIPROTEC 4 device allows you to locally retrieve information on the operator
control panel of the device.
DIGSI 4 To read out information on the DIGSI 4 user interface, you may either connect your
PC to the operating serial interface of the local device or communicate with your
SIPROTEC 4 device via modem and the service interface.
For this function, DIGSI 4 must be in the Online mode.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.3.1 Annunciations
The scope of device messages is specified by means of the setting of the functional
scope of the SIPROTEC 4 devices.
The messages are subdivided into the following categories and displayed via
DIGSI 4 or via the operator control panel of the devices:
q Event log:
Operational messages independent of network faults, e.g. messages on switching
operations or monitoring functions;
q Trip log:
e.g. messages in case of short circuits, etc.
q Ground-fault messages
(for devices with a ground-fault monitoring feature);
q General interrogation
Displaying pending condition messages;
q Spontaneous Annunciation:
Continuous display of important device messages, e.g. after faults or switching op-
erations, etc.
k451.gif
Figure 4-4 DIGSI 4, annunciations function example
Display in DIGSI 4 Proceed as follows to display the messages on the DIGSI 4 user interface:
Select Annunciation from the navigation window.
All annunciation groups are now displayed in the data window.
Double-click on an annunciation group in the data window, such as Event log.
The annunciations are displayed with the date and the time of day.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Display on the Proceed as follows to display pending messages on the operator control panel of your
device SIPROTEC 4 device:
Click Main Menu Annunciation
to select, for example, Event Log or Trip log.
MAIN MENU 01/05

---------------------
>Annunciation > 1
>Measurement > 2 ANNUNCIATION 01/05
--------------------
>Event Log> 01 EVENT LOG 19/19
>Trip Log> 02 ---------------------
19.06.98 11:52:05,461
LED ACKNOW. ON
Figure 4-5 SIPROTEC 4, Device display of operational messages (event log) example
TRIP LOG 01/08

---------------------
>Last Fault> 1 LETZTER 01/10
>2nd Last Fault > 2 --------------------
22.06 23:49:34,845
Network Fault 6 ON
Figure 4-6 SIPROTEC 4, Fault message (trip log) device display example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.3.2 Measurement
The recorded measured values are divided into categories and displayed via
DIGSI 4 or via the device operator control panel, e.g.:
q Primary values, calculated from the measured secondary values, based on the set
transformer data and nominal variables;
q Secondary values, measured values;
q Percent values, related to the set nominal variables;
q Other values calculated by the device;
q Statistical values, e.g. switched current of the circuit breaker in case of tripping on
faults
k452.gif
Figure 4-7 DIGSI 4 measured-value display example
Display in DIGSI 4 Proceed as follows to displayed the measured values via DIGSI 4:
Select Measurements from the navigation window.
All measured-value groups are displayed in the data window.
Double-click one of the measured-value groups in the data window.
The selected measured-value log is displayed.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
On the Proceed as follows to show the measured values on the display of your SIPROTEC 4
device display device:
Click Main Menu Measurement
and select, for example, Operation.pri.
MAIN MENU 02/05

---------------------
>Annunciation > 1
>Measurement > 2 MEASUREMENT 01/14
--------------------
>Operation,pri> 01
>Operation,sec> 02
MEASUREMENT 01/14
--------------------
>Operation,pri> 01 OPERATION,PRI 02/23
>Operation ,sec> 02 ---------------------
>IL1= 1062.8A
>IL2= 1081.5A
Figure 4-8 SIPROTEC 4, device display of operational measured values example
Note:
Measured values can additionally be displayed in the basic or the control display.
To do this, you must first select the relevant measured values in the DIGSI 4 setting
mode Configuration and then position them into the graphic by means of the Display
Editor.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.4 Controlling
The multiple application possibilities for SIPROTEC 4 devices allow an equally flex-
ible concept for command processing.
Remote If the device is used in a substation control system, the command inputs can be re-
motely tripped via the system interface or via telegrams from
q higher-level control systems or
q substation control devices, e.g. SICAM SC.
Local The SIPROTEC 4 device provides the possibility of local control via the operator
control panel of the device.
If the individual device is equipped with a graphic display, the switching operations
are performed via the control display.
Select the switching device via the arrow keys of the operator control panel and
then press the key to switch ON the switching device or the key to switch it
OFF.
Note:
If the device is equipped with keylock switches, these switches must be put in the
Local position before executing the command. Otherwise, local command input is
impossible.
If your device is equipped with a 4-line display, switching operations have to be exe-
cuted via
Main menu Control Breaker/Switch Control destination direction ON or
OFF (Figure 4-9) or
the function keys F1 to F4.
The functionality of these keys is programmable.
MAIN MENU 03/05

---------------------
Measurement > 2
CControl > 3 CONTROL 01/05
--------------------
BBreaker/Switch> 1
>Tagging > 2
CONTROL 01/05
--------------------
>Breaker/Switch> 1 BREAKER/SWITCH 02/04
>Tagging > 2 --------------------
>Display > 1
>Control > 2
Figure 4-9 Local control via the device display
The switching status of a switching device can be read from the display via Breaker/
Switch Display (Figure 4-10).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
BREAKER/SWITCH 01/04
---------------------
>Display > 1 DISPLAY 01/03
>Control > 2 --------------------
>Q0 ON/OFF ON
>Q1 ON/OFF ON
Figure 4-10Displaying switching status on screen
DIGSI 4 To execute switching operations via the DIGSI 4 tool, you must first connect your PC
to the local operating serial interface of the SIPROTEC 4 device or to the service
interface via modem and/or star coupler.
Command output is only possible if DIGSI 4 is in the Online mode.
Select Control from the navigation window and Breaker/Switch from the data win-
dow.
In the dialogue window that follows, all relevant primary switching equipment is dis-
played in a table with the present status.
Enter the intended switching direction in the Scheduled column. Answer the ques-
tion with Yes.
The password is requested, the interlocking conditions are checked, and the com-
mand is issued.
Note:
The switching option of DIGSI 4 is typically used during commissioning, and for test
and diagnostic purposes.
CFC Using the graphically supported design tool CFC for logic functions in DIGSI 4, infor-
mation can be logically combined. Command outputs can be derived from the output
of logic functions. The link of the output of the CFC functions to the respective device
outputs is determined in the configuration matrix.
Passwords Only authorized personnel can perform switching operations. Switching operations
are protected by passwords.
Interlocking Command outputs may be subject to interlocking checks, which can be configured in-
dividually and graphically using the CFC logic too. Standard interlocking, such as
ground switch closed status indication, may be already contained in the basic settings
of certain device types when delivered from the factory.
Command Process- Details about the command output time, checkback indication monitoring time, etc.,
ing Times are entered within the framework of the settings.
Event Recording All switching operations are recorded in the message list with date and time.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.5 Manual overwrite / tagging
Manual Overwrite If the breaker/switch position is not available from the switch-gear, the status of the
switchgear device can be manually set to the actual present position using the opera-
tor control panel: Main Menu Control Breaker/Switch Man. Overwrite. The
simulated switching status is used for interlocking checks, and for automatically initi-
ated switching operations.
Set Status For convenience during commissioning or at other times, decoupling of the informa-
tion exchange between the switchgear and the protective device may be desired for a
short period, without disconnecting the wires. This function is activated using the op-
erator control panel: Main Menu Control Breaker/Switch Set Status.
Tagging To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging, e.g. grounded,
can be done. The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating condi-
tions in interlocking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the
same way as for operating devices.
The status of the tagging is displayed on the operating panel, Main Menu Control
Tagging Display (Figure 4-11),
or changed using
Main Menu Control Tagging Set.
MAIN MENU 03/05

--------------------
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
Control -> 3C 3 CONTROL 02/03
---------------------
Breaker/Switch > 1
Tagging > 2 TAGGING 01/02
Interlock > 3 ---------------------
Display > 1
Set > 2
Figure 4-11 Displaying tagging
Note:
The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the operator control panel on the
SIPROTEC 4 devices.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.6 General setting information
The SIPROTEC 4 devices are delivered with standard default settings. Changes to
the settings are done with the DIGSI 4 program which can be installed on a normal
PC.
The setting procedure for a SIPROTEC 4 device consists of

q Configuration with:
q specification of the functional scope,
q configuring information,
q defining user-definable logic functions (CFC)
q construction of the control display.
q Function settings with:
q general settings,
q settings of the protective functions,
q settings of the process control functions.
Settings are first done Off-line. The settings are then loaded into the SIPROTEC 4
device on-site using the operating serial interface, or remotely by modem and the
service interface.
K450.gif
Figure 4-12Specifying settings by means of DIGSI 4 example
The transfer of data from DIGSI 4 to the SIPROTEC 4 device is indicated in the dis-
play. The progress of the transfer is displayed. See Figure 4-13.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
LOAD SETTINGS
---------------------

---------------------
Download active
Figure 4-13Screen of Device during Settings Transfer
Setting sequence When setting your SIPROTEC 4 device, adhere the following order:
q specifying interfaces, device data, time synchronization,
q specifying functional scope,
q performing configuration,
q designing and setting default display and control display (optional),
q configuring CFC functions (optional),
q entering power system data,
q specifying setting groups A to D (groups B to D optional),
q adapting passwords.
This way of proceeding saves unnecessary switching of the setting levels and dialogs
as the individual steps are partially based on the data of previous steps. The above-
mentioned order ensures that the necessary data is always available for the individual
steps.
For designing the control display, for example, you require the data of all switching
devices to be controlled. This data is specified within the framework of configuration.
If these switching devices are already connected, you only have to select the relevant
operating equipment from the existing scope of settings during the display design and
assign them to your graphic icons.
Note:
On-line modifications of the configured settings are protected by password no. 7
(password for setting group).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Functional settings To modify individual functional settings, such as settings of protective elements,
during operation, you can also use the operator control panel of your SIPROTEC 4
device in the settings mode.
Other settings, such as configuration, functional scope or interface definition, can be
checked but not modified via the operator control panel.
Display the settings on the operator control panel via main menu Settings e.g.
Masking I/O.
To modify settings such as the date and the time of day, pass via the main menu
Settings Setup/Extras.
MAIN MENU 04/05

---------------------
Annunciation > 1
Measurement > 2
Control > 3
Settings > 4 SETTINGS 10/11
Test/Diagnose > 5 ---------------------
Device Config. > 01
Masking (I/O) > 02
P.System Data1 > 03
Group A > 04
Group B > 05
Group C > 06
Group D > 07
Change Group > 08
Osc.Fault Rec. > 09
Setup/Extras > 10
Device > 11
---------------------
Active Group is: A
Figure 4-14Changing settings using the operator control panel example
Note:
On-line changes of the configured settings are protected by password no. 5 (pass-
word for individual settings).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.7 Functional scope
The individual devices within the SIPROTEC 4 family can be supplied with various
protective functions. The ordering number of the device determines the available func-
tions. The functions are specified more precisely through the process of enabling and
disabling in the Device Configuration area of the settings.
To specify the active functions using DIGSI 4:
Double click on Device Configuration in the data window.
Click on the individual fields and select the functions to be enabled.
k453.gif
Figure 4-15DIGSI 4, specifying functional scope example
The specified functional scope can be checked via the operator control panel of the
SIPROTEC 4 device.
In the main menu, select Settings Device Config.:
DEVICE CONFIG. 01/19

--------------------
0103 SETTING SWITCHING
Enabled
Figure 4-16Reading out the functional scope example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.8 Configuration
The settings step configuration serves to specify via a matrix how your individual in-
formation are to be configured to the inputs and outputs.
Perform the configuration via DIGSI 4.
The Configuration dialog window is primarily divided into the following columns:
q Function with a selection box for function setting;
q Information, e.g. message or command with
q Information number, identification and description of the information in the corre-
sponding device documentation,
q Display text, representation of the information on the device display,
q Long text, detailed description of the information,
q Type, identification of the information, e.g. BR_D2 double command with feedback;
q Source, i.e. origin of the information with
q binary input for entering binary information, e.g. optocoupler input,
q Function key, freely assignable keys on the operator control panel, e.g. assignable
with ON/OFF for switching operations, etc, as information source,
q CFC C (programmable logic), user-specific link result as information source;
q Destination, i.e. component to which the information is transmitted
q Binary output, relay for outputting binary signals,
q LED, information display, e.g. messages,
q System interface, forwarding information, e.g. to a higher-level control center,
q CFC (programmable logic), information as input to a user-specific logic,
q Buffer to enter the information
Event log or
Earth-fault message (if existing) or
Trip log;
q Display, information displayed in
control display or
default display;
q Control, operating equipment can be controlled or tagging can be set
You specify the configuration of your information by:

q Clicking the corresponding column or via the
q Context menu (configured) or _ (not configured).
DIGSI 4 checks the inputs for plausibility and blocks the input box if necessary. In
this case, the input box is shown in gray.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
k4111.gif
Figure 4-17 DIGSI 4, Masking I/O configuration matrix example
Filter Functions With the use of filters, either all information can be displayed or a selection can be
done according to indications, commands, or measured values.
Additionally, there is a filter setting that differentiates between information configured
and not configured.
The filters allows for a quick overview and simple checking of the configuration set-
tings.
Also, columns and rows can be temporarily hidden from view, so that you can view
only the sections of the total matrix that are relevant.
New Information A further function of the configuration matrix is the capability to define new information.
This is accomplished by inserting a new line, defining the appropriate information type,
and assigning it to a source and a destination. The new information can also be dis-
played in the LCD of the SIPROTEC 4 device after it has been downloaded to the
device.
Function Keys The function keys on the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be
assigned to commonly performed operating functions, e.g. initiation of a switching op-
eration. Select the appropriate function key F1 to F4 in the Source F column for the
related information (e.g. switching command).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
CFC SIPROTEC 4 device information can be connected in a user-specified manner using

the programmable logic components of the DIGSI 4 CFC. For example, the user can
implement interlocking checks, create grouped messages, or derive limit value viola-
tion messages.
Information can be both a source and a destination in combined CFC editing. The spe-
cific logics inputs, e.g. the individual messages that are to be combined to form a
grouped message, must be marked in the Destination C column. The logics output,
the grouped message in this example, is derived from the Source C column.
Display (CB) To display an information in the default or control display, enter the configuration into
the Destination, B (Display) G (default display) and/or A (control display) columns.
For information manageable via the control display, e.g. switching devices, you must
always check the Display A column.
For more details, please refer to the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417H1100
C097.
Viewing on the The specified configuration can be checked via the operator control panel of the
operator control SIPROTEC 4 device.
panel
From the menu, you must now select Settings Masking (I/O).
MASKING (I/O) 01/03

---------------------
>Binary Inputs > 1
>LED > 2
In the next menu, select Masking (I/O) e.g. Binary Inputs.
BINARY INPUTS 02/11

---------------------
>Binary Input 1 >
>Binary Input 2 >
Figure 4-18Reading the configuration example binary input 2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.9 Display Editor
SIPROTEC 4 devices have a default display and - for devices equipped with a
graphic display and control functions - a control display. The default display is dis-
played automatically after the device start-up. It displays operational information and
measured values of the feeder. The graphic display additionally provides a graphical
representation of the feeder. The control display must be selected. It also indicates
a graphical representation of the feeder and its switching devices and enables switch-
ing operations. To provide a clear overview, it does not include additional information
(in contrast to the default display).
4.9.1 Default display
The factory setting of the default display includes a device-specific default setting. It
serves for the graphical display of the
q current operating status and of
q selected measured values.
Switching operations are not permitted!
The default display serves to display all information selected in the Destination col-
umn Display G of the Configuration matrix.
4.9.2 Control display
SIPROTEC 4 devices with a graphic display are delivered with a standard control
display setting and design.
The scope of delivery also includes the icon, operating equipment and line catalogs
from which this display is composed.
For an individual design of the graphic representations, you may modify these default
settings. In addition to this, you may use the display editor for convenient definition of
your own icons and operating equipment and for composing them to a new control dis-
play. By doing so, you assign individual representation icons to each switching status
(e.g. ON/OFF/DISTURBED).
The display editor serves to zoom the display in or out for displaying details or an
overview. The zoom function also influences the catalog contents (symbols, etc.).
You initiate your switching operations from the control display. For this reason, it is
necessary to dynamize the graphical elements of your display, e.g. switch icons, i.e.
to connect them with the configurations in message and control direction. The dialog
now offers you only the information for representation which was assigned during
Configuration in the Destination column Display A.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
For more detailed information on the control display editor, please refer to the Display
Editor manual order number E50417H1100C095.
Abzweig.gif
Figure 4-19DIGSI 4 Display Editor, control display example
Note:
The control display and the default display have a similar structure. The same tools
are used for design purposes.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.10 CFC programmable logic

The CFC program in DIGSI 4 can be used to create additional logic in SIPROTEC
4 devices. For example, special interlocking conditions for controlled equipment can
be designed. Limit checks for measured values can be created, and corresponding
control can be designed.
SIPROTEC 4 devices may have some CFC functions set at the factory, according to
the type and version of the device.
User-defined CFC functions are done in graphical form. Generic logic modules (AND,
OR, NAND, etc.) and analog modules that are specially created for the requirements
of process control engineering (e.g., MAX, MIN, etc.) are available.
The CFC-modules are combined to form complete CFC-logic functions in order to
q perform system-specific checks (e.g. interlocking),
q generate messages if measured values approach a critical value, or
q build group messages for transfer to a substation control systems.
Figure 4-20DIGSI 4, CFC basic settings example
CFC logic The example in Figure 4-21 illustrates a CFClogic for an undercurrent detector, e.g.
for detecting that a motor is switched off.
Note:
On-line modifications of the CFC configuration are protected in DIGSI 4 by pass-
word no. 7 (setting group editing).
For more detailed information on working with CFC, please refer to the CFC Program-
mable Logic manual, order number E50417H1100C098.
IN: Limit values IL< GW

IN: Measured values IL1 = MW
OUT: Limit values Gw.IL< AM


Figure 4-21 CFC logic example of an undercurrent detector

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.11 Power system data
Power System The Power System Data 1 dialog window serves for specifying power system-specif-
Data 1 ic settings such as
q network data, e.g. frequency, voltage
q transformer data of the main current and voltage transformers
q data of the circuit breaker in the feeder
Figure 4-22DIGSI 4 setting Power System Data example
Power System Power System Data 2 are part of the individual settings groups which can be switched
Data 2 during operation (see section 4.12). Power System Data 2 include for example:
q Primary Operating Voltage
q Primary Operating Current
q Characteristic Data of the protected object etc.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.12 Setting groups
A SIPROTEC 4 device has up to four setting groups A through D. The setting options
for each group are the same; however, the applied settings can be, and are typically
intended to be, different in each group. The active setting group can easily be changed
while the device is in-service. A major advantage of multiple setting groups is the ca-
pability of optimizing the protection and control for the existing configuration of the net-
work being protected. In other words, the protection and control can be changed as
the network changes.
The setting groups are saved in the device. The setting groups can be changed during
operation using DIGSI 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering
binary inputs, or via the system interface.
Figure 4-23 DIGSI 4, specifying settings group A example
Note:
All setting values commonly used by all protective functions of a settings group are
stored at Power System Data 2.
Settings Double-click on a function listed in a small window in Figure 4-23 or simply click the
Settings button (provided that the desired function is selected) to display the dialog
window for defining the individual settings of this function (Figure 4-24).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Figure 4-24 DIGSI 4 specifying settings example
Changing setting During operation, the setting groups can be switched by means of DIGSI 4, on the
groups operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 devices, via binary inputs or via the se-
rial system interface. The active settings group is selected during this procedure.
CHANGE GROUP 02/02

---------------------
0301 ACTIVE GROUP
Group A
0302 CHANGE TO
Set A
Group A
GroupB
Group C
Group D
Binary input
via protocol
Figure 4-25SIPROTEC 4 device, switching setting group example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.13 General device settings
The DIGSI 4 Device dialog window serves to define how the spontaneous fault dis-
play is performed via the LEDs and the display on the front panel of the device.
Figure 4-26 DIGSI 4 device parameterization example
This setting can also be modified via the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4
device using the path Main menu Settings Device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.14 Time Synchronization
Time tracking in a SIPROTEC 4 device can be implemented using:

q DCF77 Radio Receiver (Time Signal from PTB Braunschweig),
q IRIG-B Radio Receiver (Time Signal from the global positioning satellite (GPS) sys-
tem),
q signals via the system interface from, for example, a substation control system,
q radio clock using a system-specific synchronizer box,
q minute impulses on a binary input.
Time signal generators are connected via a 9-pin D-subminiature port on the back
panel of the device.
Setting of the time synchronization is done exclusively with DIGSI 4:
Double click on Time Synchronization in the data window and enter the settings.
Figure 4-27DIGSI 4 time synchronization setting example
Read-out on the Check your settings via the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device via the
operator control following path: Main menu Settings Setup/Extras Clock setup
panel
.
SETUP/EXTRAS 02/06
---------------------
Date/Time > 1
Clock setup> 2 CLOCK SETUP 01/03
Serial Ports> 3 -------------------
Device-ID > 4 Offset ZZ > 0min
MLFB/Version > 5 5 Error time 2min
Contrast > 6 Source Internal
Figure 4-28Reading out the time synchronization settings example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.15 Serial interfaces
In addition to a time synchronization interface, the devices of the SIPROTEC 4se-

ries can be equipped with a maximum of four external interfaces.
q The system interface on the rear panel of the device serves to connect the device
with higher-level control centers. Depending on the individual device type and ver-
sion, the following protocols are available:
IEC 608705103,
PROFIBUS FMS,
PROFIBUS DP,
DNP3.0 Level 2,
MODBUS ASCII/RTU
q The time control interface on the rear panel of the device can be used to connect
a radio clock (see section 4.14).
q The service interface on the rear panel of the device is used to connect remote
diagnostic tools, e.g. DIGSI 4 via modem and/or a star coupler. In addition to this,
this interface also enables all DIGSI 4 operations.
q The operating serial interface is used for local connection of a PC on which you
have previously installed the DIGSI 4 program. Via this interface, you load, for ex-
ample, the device setting groups and perform all operational actions possible with
DIGSI 4, such as retrieving oscillographic fault records or operational messages.
The dialog windows of DIGSI 4 Serial Ports settings can, among other specifica-
tions, be used for specifying the
q transmission protocol and the
q transmission speed.
Note:
The system interface can be equipped with different modules for connection to other
devices via optical fibres, RS485 (EIA485) bus or RS232 interface.
Note:
Firmware Version 4.11 and higher:
When the FO connection of an FO double ring fails, the device no longer receiving
signals transmits a fault message.
The FO status messages (e. g. FO-1 fault, FO-2 fault) belong to the category Device
messages in the DIGSI allocation matrix. These status messages do not remain allo-
cated by default, i. e. the user of a double ring configuration must allocate these status
messages where necessary.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
The following text is an example of the procedure to be executed for setting an IEC
interface. Chapter 5 describes how to set additional protocols.
Proceed as follows:
Double-click Serial Ports in the data window and enter your specific settings in the
following dialog window.
Figure 4-29DIGSI 4, interface settings example
Read-out on the You can check the interface settings via the operator control panel of the
operator control SIPROTEC 4 device.
panel
In the main menu, select Settings Setup/Extras Serial Ports next menus.
SETUP/EXTRAS 03/06
---------------------
Date/Time > 1
Clock Setup> 2
Serial Ports> 3 SERIAL PORTS 01/03
Device-ID > 4 ---------------------
Front Port> 1
MLFB/Version > 5 5 Port > 2
Contrast > 6 Port > 3
Figure 4-30Retrieving interface settings example
Note:
The Time Synchronization section (see section 4.14) describes the interface for con-
necting a time control component.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.16 Passwords
Passwords are assigned to a SIPROTEC 4 device to protect it against unintended

changes and operation by unauthorized persons.
The following access rights are defined as a default setting:
q Switching/tagging/manual overwrite,
q Non-interlocked switching,
q Test and diagnosis,
q Individual settings,
q Hardware test menus,
q Setting groups.
ka458.gif
Figure 4-31DIGSI 4, password overview
When using DIGSI 4 or the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device, a
password is requested for the specific functions.
Note:
Password protection against unauthorized access is only in place during on-line op-
eration. The passwords for setting changes are first activated when the settings are
loaded into the device. The passwords are irrelevant in the DIGSI 4 off-line mode.
To deactivate a password, you must know the password.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Passwords can only be changed using DIGSI 4.

Proceed as follows to change an existing password:
In the Passwords dialog window, click the relevant password function. Enter the old
and then the new password in the next window. Finally, confirm your entry with OK.
Figure 4-32DIGSI 4 - changing password
Passwords are numbers of up to 8 digits.

At delivery, all passwords are set to 000000.
Note:
Should you have forgotten your password for changing setting groups, our hotline can
assign you a temporarily valid password for defining a new user password for this
function.
To do this, our hotline staff requires the registration number of your DIGSI 4 soft-
ware package!

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIPROTEC 4 Devices

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration 5
Principle specifications are made within the framework of configuration. These speci-
fications normally cannot be changed within the field of application of the device.
Here, you specify
q which functions you intend to use,
q which data, measured variables and commands you want to capture/output via
which inputs/outputs, if you intend to use measuring transducers,
q if you intend to use inter-relay communication,
q if you intend to use the integrated circuit-breaker synchronization,
q if you must connect user-defined functions with CFC,
q if you want to establish a new default or control display,
q which ports you intend to use,
q the synchronization source to be used for setting the internal clock.
The present chapter describes the procedure of configuring the 6MD663/6MD664.
5.1 Specifying the functional scope 5-2

5.2 Configuring information, measured variables and commands 5-4
5.3 Setting measuring transducers 5-36
5.4 Setting inter-relay communication 5-44
5.5 Synchronizing circuit breakers 5-65
5.6 Creating user-definable functions with CFC 5-69
5.7 Establishing a default display 5-79
5.8 Designing a control display 5-82
5.9 Serial Interfaces 5-84
5.10 Date and time control 5-88
5.11 Configuring metered values 5-92
5.12 Configuring limit values (LV) 5-98

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.1 Specifying the functional scope
General The 6MD663/6MD664 devices are equipped with functions whose scope can be
adapted to the conditions of the individual power system. You can specify the following
functions as enabled or disabled:
q Measuring transducer (various types) and
q Synchronization (1 to 8)
Example of configuring the functional scope:
In the power system, the second packet of a monophase measuring transducer is re-
quired. For this reason, you must add this function for the device.
Specifying the The configuration settings can be entered via a PC connected to the device via a serial
functional scope cable and the DIGSI 4 operator program (version 4.2 or higher) by way of the oper-
ating serial interface on the device front cover or via the service port on the rear panel.
For details regarding operation via DIGSI 4, please refer to the DIGSI 4 manual, or-
der number E50417H1100C097.
To change the configuration settings in the device, the user must first enter password
no. 7 (for settings group) - see chapter 4, last section). Without entering a password,
you can read out the settings, but you cannot modify them and transfer them to the
device.
The Device configuration dialog box (see Figure 5-1) serves to adapt the functional
scope and possible alternatives to the individual power system conditions. To modify
a function, click the corresponding line of the Scope column. Next, select the desired
option from the drop-down list box. This box closes automatically as soon as you click
an option.
Figure 5-1 Dialog box for specifying the functional scope in DIGSI 4 example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Note:
The modified functional settings can be transferred to the device by clicking Digsi
Device (only possible during on-line operation). By means of the transfer, the data is
permanently saved in the device and protected against voltage failure. However, it is
also possible to transfer the functional settings at the end of your configuration proce-
dure.
Click OK to confirm the functional scope. The dialog box closes.

Reading out the configured functional scope is also possible via the device user inter-
face. However, a modification is excluded. To access the settings of the functional
scope, use the following path: MAIN MENU Settings Scope.
The functions are described in chapter 6 which also includes setting instructions as
well as an overview of the settings, messages and information.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.2 Configuring information, measured variables and commands
General The default device setting includes an example configuration of a double busbar. The
individual information can be deleted or adapted to specific requirements.
The information is entered via the
DIGSI information catalog.
During configuration, certain information within the relay is assigned to certain physi-
cal interfaces (e.g., binary inputs and output contacts) or logical interfaces (e.g., user-
defined logic, CFC).
It must be determined which information should be linked with which device interface.
The properties of the information and of the interfaces may also be determined.
Messages and statistical values from earlier events can be lost during re-configura-
tion; therefore, operational and fault data and statistic counters which are memorized
in the relay should be read and saved if desired, prior to changing the configuration.
5.2.1 Preparation
Before configuration is started, the overall interfacing requirements must be assessed.

The required inputs and outputs must be compared with the number of physical inputs
and outputs present on the relay. The types of indications and commands, and their
requirements, should be taken into account.
Indications Indications may be information of the device regarding events and conditions that can
be transmitted via output contacts (e.g. start-up of the processor system or a trip signal
initiated by a protective function). These are defined as output indications. Indications
also include information from the plant to the relay regarding plant events and condi-
tions (e.g. position or condition of a circuit breaker). These are defined as input indi-
cations.
Input indications with one binary input are single point indications (SP). Two binary in-
puts whose normal conditions are opposite, and which are monitored by the relay, are
required for a double point indication (DP).
(binary output sig-

nal) (Plant)
Trip
(6MD663/ L+ Output indication/tripcommand via relay contact
Figure 5-2 Output indication (OUT)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
M e.g. Isoloation
e.g. mcb switch
(6MD663/
(6MD663/6MD664) 6MD664)
L+ Binary input L+
(e.g. BI1) Binary input
L
(Plant) (e.g. BI 2)
(Plant)
Binary input
L (e.g. BI 3)
Single point indication (SP) Double point indication (DP)
Figure 5-3 Input indications
Additionally to the predefined input and output indications new customer specific indi-
cations and even control commands for switching devices may be created.
Commands Commands (control actions) are output indications which are specially configured for
the transmission of control signals to switching devices (circuit breakers, etc.).
q For each device to be controlled, determine if switching is to be done with 1 contact,
11/2 contacts (single contact and common), or 2 contacts; with a single or double
command; and with or without feedback signals. See Table 5-1 and Figures 5-4 to
5-9. A command with feedback is the usual case. The information to be processed
and the command type are determined with these decisions.
q Assign the necessary binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC device to the
specific function. Important to note are:
Messages and commands associated with a switching device must always occu-
py sequential binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC device;
The TRIP (OFF)command is always configured prior to the associated CLOSE
(ON)command;
Limitations may arise because of the commoning of some binary inputs and out-
puts in the SIPROTEC device.
When the types of commands have been established, DIGSI 4 reserves a corre-
sponding number of relay outputs contacts. For this, the corresponding output con-
tacts are numbered consecutively. This must be observed when wiring the relays to
the corresponding equipment to be controlled.
Table 5-1 shows the most important command types. They are made available as op-
tions in the Configuration Matrix for the SIPROTEC device (see also Binary Outputs
for Switching Devices in Sub-section 5.2.5). All double commands, with and without
feedback indications, are also available as transformer step commands. The following
Figures 5-4 through 5-9 show time diagrams, control settings, and the sequence of re-
lay positioning in the configuration matrix for frequently used command types.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Table 5-1 Most Important Command Types
Command type No. of contacts Explanation Type

Single Command with Single With 1 contact without feedback C_S
Output with feedback CF_S
Double Command with Single With 2 contacts without feedback C_D2
Outputs with feedback CF_D2
Double Command with Single With 3 contacts without feedback C_D3
Output plus Common Output with feedback CF_D3
Double Command with Single Minimum 3 without feedback C_D2
Output and Common Bus Output contacts with feedback CF_D2
Double Command with Double With 4 contacts without feedback C_D4
Outputs with feedback CF_D4
Double Command with Double With 3 contacts without feedback C_D12
(Close) and Single (Trip) Outputs with feedback CF_D12
For double commands, the first output relay is selected using DIGSI 4. The other out-
put relays will automatically be selected by DIGSI 4. In the sequence of output relays,
each TRIP command is placed before the associated CLOSE command. For
commands with processing of feedback indications, DIGSI 4 reserves a line in the
configuration matrix for the switching device feedback indications. The following rule
is valid also in this context: The OFF feedback is always positioned in front of the
ON feedback.
For Figures 5-4 through 5-9, the following abbreviations apply:
C+ Relay Contact for Closing
C Relay Contact Tripping
CC Relay Contact is Common
CCC Relay Contact is Common to a Bus
V+, V Control Voltage
Switching command V+
C+
C+
ON Switching
t device
1
V
Contact configur.: X
ON
Figure 5-4 Single-point command, single output, type B_E or BR_E

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Switching command Switching command

V+
ON OFF
C+ C-
C+
ON Switching OFF
C- Device
V
1 2 t
Relay Configuration: XX
OFF
ON
Figure 5-5 Double-point command, single output, type B_D2 or BR_D2
Switching command Switching command V+

ON OFF C+ C-
C+
ON Switching OFF
C- Device
CC
CC
1 2 3 t
V
Relay Configuration: XXW
Common
OFF
ON
Figure 5-6 Double command, single output + common output, type B_D3 or BR_D3
Switching command Switching command V+

ON OFF C+ C-
C+
ON Switchin AUS Sw.device
C- Device 1 2...n
CCC
CCC
1 2 n t
V
Relay Configuration: X X W
common output
OFF
ON
Figure 5-7 Double-point command, single output with common bus output, type B_D2 or BR_D2
Figure 5-7 shows the common output relay with several switching devices, in contrast
to all other output relays. Simultaneous control of multiple switching devices is
blocked, for safety reasons.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The common output relay automatically acquires the characteristics of the controlling
relay upon issuing of a command to a switching device and, therefore, is not individu-
ally configured. The final command output is via a single contact.
Switching command Switching command

ON OFF L+
C+1 C+1 C-1
C+2 ON Swit. OFF

Device
C-1
C+2 C-2
C-2
L
t
1 2 3 4
Relay Configuration: XXXX

OFF1
OFF2
ON1
ON2
Figure 5-8 Double Command with Double Outputs (via 4 relays with respectively one), type B_D4 or BR_D4
Figure 5-8 illustrates a double command with double inputs requiring 4 relays with re-
spectively one contact. The ON/OFF switching comm. are output via 2 relays, resp.
Switching command Switching command L+

ON OFF C+1 C-
C+1
ON Swit. OFF
C+2 Device
C- C+2
L
t
1 2 3
Relay Configuration: XXX

ON1
ON2
OFF
Figure 5-9 Single output OFF, double output ON (with 3 relays), type B_D12 or BR_D12
Figure 5-9 describes an output via 3 relays with respectively one contact. The ON
switching command is output via 2 relays, and the OFF switching command via 1 re-
lay.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.2.2 Structure and handling of the configuration matrix
General This section deals with the structure and operation of the configuration matrix. The
configuration matrix can be viewed without making any configuration changes. Infor-
mation characteristics and configuration steps are described in Section 5.2.4, and
configuration is demonstrated in Section 5.2.5.
Configuration of information is performed, using a PC and the DIGSI 4 software pro-
gram, via the operator or service interface. The configuration is represented in
DIGSI 4 as a matrix (Figure 5-10). Each row is assigned to relay information. It is
identified by a short text (display text), an explanation (long text) and an information
type. The columns give the interfaces which are the sources and/or destinations of the
information. In addition to physical device inputs and outputs, there may be internal
interfaces for user definable logic (CFC), message buffers, or the device display.
Filter Information Catalog Standard View Short view
Figure 5-10Draft from the configuration matrix in the DIGSI 4 user interface example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Information in the rows is assigned to appropriate interfaces in the columns via an en-
try in the intersecting cell. This establishes which information controls which destina-
tion, or from which source information is received. In the configuration matrix, not only
the configuration is shown, but also the type of configuration. For example, information
regarding an event which is configured for display on a LED may be latched or un-
latched.
The possible combinations of information and interfaces is dependent on the informa-
tion type. Impossible combinations are mostly filtered out by DIGSI 4 plausibility
checks.
The matrix columns are divided into three types: Information, Source, and Destination.
To the left of the matrix, information is divided into information groups.
Reducing The matrix may become very extensive because of the amount of information con-
the matrix tained within. Therefore, it is useful to limit the display (via filtering) to certain informa-
tion, thus reducing the number of rows.
The toolbar below the menu line contains two pull-down menus by which information
may be filtered. Using the first menu, the rows can be limited to indications, com-
mands, indications and commands, or measured and metered values. The second
menu allows display of configured information, information configured to physical in-
puts and outputs, or non-configured information.
A further reduction in the number of rows is possible, by compressing an information
group to one row. This is done by double-clicking on the group label area (located to
the far left). If this is done, the number of rows is reduced, allowing the user to focus
on the information group of interest. A second double-click restores all rows in the in-
formation group.
There are two possibilities to alter the width of the matrix: two icons of the toolbar can
be used to switch between standard view and short view or to hide and display single
columns.
In the last case, double-click the button with the column headline (e.g. long text); the
contents of the corresponding column disappear. Double-click again on the column
headline to make the corresponding column visible again.
The icons of the toolbar can be used to modify all columns under the Source and Des-
tination title blocks. The columns associated with the Information block remain un-
changed.
In standard view, the columns, e.g. of the binary outputs (BO) and light-emitting di-
odes (LED) are accessible, as shown in the figure above.
In short view (not shown in the picture), three common columns are displayed: one for
binary inputs, one for binary outputs, and one for LEDs. Within the individual cells of
a common column, information regarding the configuration type is available in the form
of abbreviations. For example, the abbreviation H1 in a cell of the common binary input
(BI) column shows the corresponding information is configured with active voltage
(High) to binary input 1. If one information unit (indication, etc.) is configured to several
destinations, the abbreviations of all destinations are shown, separated by commas.
If there is not enough room in the cell for the simultaneous display of all abbreviations,
a double-click on the cell and movement of the text cursor within the cell will show the
entire contents of the cell.
To switch between standard view and short view, the menu item View can also be
used.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Information Groups All information is organized into information groups. In addition to general relay infor-
mation, information regarding individual device functions is also included.
By clicking on an information group title area with the right mouse button, a context
menu can be viewed, which contains information regarding the properties of that infor-
mation group. This is particularly useful if the information group is associated with a
function that contains parameter settings.
If e.g. the information group belongs to a function of the device, a dialog window is dis-
played in which you can modify the settings of this function. Details on the settings of
the various functions are described in chapter 6.
Information The Information column block may display a number, the short text (display text), the
explanation (long text) and the information type. The abbreviations used for the infor-
mation type have the following signification:
Indications:
SP Single Point Indication
SP_Ev Single Point Indication Event
ISP Internal Single Point indication (tagging)
ISP_Ev Internal Single Point indication Event
DP Double Point indication
DPI Double Point indication (intermediate)
IntDP Internal Double Point indication (tagging)
IntDPI Internal Double Point indication (intermediate)
OUT Output Indication
OUT_EV Output Indication Event
TxTap Transformer Tap Changer
Commands:
C_S Single Command without feedback
CF_S Single Command with feedback
C_SN Single Command negated without feedback
CF_SN Single Command negated with feedback
C_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs without feedback
CF_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs with feedback
C_D12 Double Command with Double Trip Outputs and Single Close Outputs
(3 relays) without feedback
CF_D12 Double Command with feedback, with Double Trip outputs/Single Close
outputs (3 relays)
C_D3 Double Command with Single Outputs and Common Output (3 relays)
without feedback
CR_D3 Double Command with feedback, with Single Outputs and Common
Output (3 relays),
C_D4 Double Command, with Double Trip Outputs /Double Close Outputs
(4 relays) without feedback
CR_D4 Double Command with feedback, with Double Trip Outputs / Double
Close Outputs (4 relays)
C_D2N Double Command, with Single Outputs negated (2 relays)
without feedback
CF_D2N Double Command negated with feedback, with Single Outputs (2 relays)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Measured values:
MV Measured Value
MVU Measured Value, User defined
MVT Measured Value, with time
LV Limit Value
LVZ Limit Value, User defined
Metered values:
MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values
PMV Pulse Metered Value
The information has different characteristics depending on the individual type. Some
of it are predefined and some of it can be influenced.
Source Designates the source of an information the device receives for further processing.
The following sources are available:
BI Binary Input,
F Function key, which may serve to introduce a control action
IRC inter-relay communication,
C CFC, the message comes from the user-defined logic,
Destination The destination indicates to which interface the information is forwarded. Possible
destinations are:
BO Binary Output,
LED LED display on the device front panel,
Buffer E Event buffer in the device,
W Warning messages,
IRC inter-relay communication,
S SCADA interface,
C CFC, message further processed by a CFC program of the user-defined log-
ic,
Di C Control display, if information is to be displayed in the control display of the
device,
Di D Default display, if information is to be displayed in the default display of the
device,
CM Control of switching devices, if a switching object should be displayed in the
control display/menu of the device or be controllable via DIGSI.
5.2.3 Inserting information

Inserting some The scope of information available in the matrix is determined by the device type and
information the configured functional scope. If required, you can extend this scope of information
by inserting user-defined information groups or individual information. These user-de-
fined groups and information can be deleted again at any time in contrast to the pre-
defined groups and information.
To insert a new information group. click the line in the group next to which the new
group is to be positioned. Next, right-click to display a context menu (Figure 5-11).
Figure 5-11 Inquiry before inserting a new group

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Click Insert Group to open an additional dialog window for entering the designation
of the new group as short and long text (Figure 5-12). Next, click OK. The new group
is positioned.
Figure 5-12 Entering the designation of a user-defined group
Use the information catalog to insert information into the new group (Figure 5-13). The
information catalog can be obtained from the menu bar via the View option or via the
assigned button in the icon bar. You can enter individual information not only in indi-
vidual groups, but also in each available group.
Figure 5-13 Information catalog example
The information catalog is principally structured like the tree view of the DIGSI 4 De-
vice Operation. Click a plus icon or a folder icon to reach the next level within the cat-
alog structure. With regard to their designations, the highest levels correspond to the
information groups Annunciations, Commands, Measurement and Metered Values.
To select an information and to insert it into a group, select its designation in the cat-
alog. Use the left mouse button to draw it from the Information catalog window onto a
group area to the left edge of the matrix. A new information is inserted within the cor-
responding group as soon as you release the mouse button again. To modify the pre-
defined designation, double-click the Display text and Long text box to edit the new
text.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Note:
When inserting an information of the type Command with feedback, two new lines are
created within a group: One line for the actual command and another line for the re-
lated command feedback.
5.2.4 Specifying information properties
General Different types of information contain different types of properties. To view the proper-
ties associated with a specific information unit (indication, command, etc.), position the
mouse on the specific row under Information, and then use the right mouse button to
access a context menu where Properties can be selected.
In this way, you can specify the filter time of a specific single-point indication.
Internal Single-
Point indication
(IntSP),
Internal Double-
Point indication
(IntDP)
Figure 5-14 Information properties, example of the information type Internal Single-Point in-
dication (IntSP), with the options for the default setting for first startup and re-
start.
Single Point
Indication (SP)
Figure 5-15 Information properties, example of the information type Single-Point indication
(SP)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Double Point Indi- In addition to the properties entered for single point indications, a Suppress interme-
cation (DP) diate position check box is available, which may be checked to suppress the interme-
diate indication during operations. If this field is marked, then the filter time, which can
also be set (see margin heading Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression below), is
only effective for the intermediate (= undefined position) indication. Hence, briefly un-
defined conditions or contact chattering will not lead to an alarm; however, defined
changes in the condition (final positions) are immediately reported.
Figure 5-16 Information properties, example of the information type double-point indication
(DP)
Filtering / Contact For input indications (single point indications SP, double point indications DP, or
Chatter Suppres- Transformer stage messages TM, if present), filter times may be entered (pickup and
sion dropout delays) to suppress momentary changes in potential at the binary input (e.g.
contact chatter). Filtering occurs during an input change of state, with the same setting
values whether coming or going. Information is only distributed when the new state
continues to exist after a preset time interval (in milliseconds). The setting range is
from 0 to 86,400,000 ms, or 24 hours. Whether or not the filter interval is restarted for
each change of state during the filtering (filter re-triggering) is selectable.
Activate the checkbox Consider hardware filter time to consider (calculate) the hard-
ware filter time for the assignment of the time stamp. Thus, the time stamp of the mes-
sage corresponds to the input signal change.
It is also possible to set chatter suppression for each indication (Figure 5-15 top 5-17).
The contact chatter settings, themselves, are set the same for all input indications (see
Section 5.2.6).
Transformer Tap The transformer tap changer position is communicated, via binary inputs, in a speci-
Changer (TxTap) fied encoding format (maximum of 62 positions). Only binary inputs that are in direct
order with regard to numbering can be used.
For the encoding formats available (binary code, BCD code, 1 of n code), four set-
tings (number of positions, number of bits, display offset, and position change) may be
programmed. Their bit pattern corresponds to an individual transformer tap changer
position which is represented in the device display and in the indication buffers (Figure
5-17).
With the input with moving contact, the tap position is recognized as valid and ac-
cepted when the moving contact signalizes that the taps have been reached.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-17 Inform. Properties/Example Information Type Transformer Tap Changer (Tx-
Tap)
If none of the available encoding formats are selected, each individual tap changer po-
sition may be set in a table. The table is accessed after the pull-down menu Table for
encoding is opened, by selecting the button to the side.
The encoded transformer tap changer position bit pattern is transformed into digital
values between 1 and 62. An unrecognized pattern is interpreted as position 63.
The number of bits coincides with the number of the binary inputs to be configured,
and limits the number of positions to be represented.
Using the display offset, the beginning of the evaluated bits may have an offset of a
programmed number. The stepping of the transformer taps may be modified, using the
tap interval feature (see example).
Example:Four transformer position settings are to be represented by three binary in-
puts, using the designators 3 through 6. The encoding is binary.
Orientation Desired
BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 representation
63.00
X 3.00
X 4.00
X X 5.00
X 6.00
X X 63.00

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Using three binary inputs (= 3 bits), a maximum of 23 = 8 position settings may be rep-
resented in binary code. In order to begin the representation of transformer tap chang-
er positions with the value 3, the display offset is chosen accordingly. The following
must be set on the information property window:
Encoding Binary
Number of positions 4
Number of bits 3
Display offset 2
Position change 1
The three binary inputs used for this must have sequential numbers, such as BI 1, BI
2, and BI 3.
Command The Command information type exists as a command with and without feedback.
The object properties of the Command information type must be set in the tabs Lock
and Times, the Interlocking tab being identical for all types.
Note:
The maximally possible command runtime in the device results form the addition of
the individual command phases:
Maximum duration of the synchronization procedure + maximum time for Output +
maximum time for delay (600 s + 600 s + 60 s = 21 minutes).
Within a device, a command can be aborted during its entire runtime. If commands
were triggered by SICAM, the user must take into account that the maximum com-
mand runtime is restricted to 10 minutes (within SICAM).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi510a.gif
Figure 5-18 Example of Lock tab
q Check system locking

If this box is checked, an inquiry to the central device is performed before the com-
mand output to find out if a system locking exists. If this is the case, a release is
normally not performed. If the option of the logic OR logic of system locking and
zone control was selected, a release can take place in spite of a system locking.
q Check zone control
If this box is checked, an inquiry is performed before the command output to find
out if a zone control exists. This is the case if a release condition predefined for the
ON or OFF command is not met. Such a release condition is selected via the cor-
responding drop-down list box Release ON command or Release OFF com-
mand. If a zone control exists, a release will normally not be performed. If,
however, the option of the logic OR logic of system locking and zone control was
selected, a release can take place in spite of a zone control.
q Release ON and OFF commands
As soon as the Check zone control box is checked, the drop-down list boxes
Release ON command and Release OFF command become active. The display
texts of all messages defined in the device matrix are displayed in these two drop-
down list boxes. As command release condition, select respectively one message
for the ON and the OFF command. If a command is to be executed in a switching
direction without release condition, select none from the drop-down list box.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Logic of system locking and zone control (Release when system locking
AND Zone control completed/Release when system locking OR zone control
completed). Should your SIPROTEC 4 device be equipped with a settings group
version 4.2 or higher, you can choose between two options for the logic of system
locking and zone control. As an additional prerequisite for the selection of one of
these options, both the Check zone control check box and the Check system
locking check box must be checked. If you select the AND logic option, a release
is only performed if neither a system locking nor a zone control exist. If you select
the OR logic option, a release is performed even if either a system locking or a zone
control exist.
q Further lockings/Blocking for protection activation
If this bock is checked, it is checked before the command output if a protection
blocking exists. This is the case if a protective relay picked up and switched off due
to an error. The command is not transferred if this is the case.
q Further lockings/Double operation
If this bock is checked, it is checked before the command output if the command to
be transferred was already output at that time. The command is not transferred if
this is the case.
q Check switching authority at Local commands (device display)
If this box is checked, it is checked before the output of a local command at the
SIPROTEC 4 if the switching authority was set to Local. The command is only
transmitted if this is the case.
q Check switching authority at Remote commands (system interface, DIGSI)
If this box is checked, it is checked before the output of a remote command at the
SIPROTEC 4 device if the switching authority was set to Remote. The command
is only transmitted if this is the case.
The interlocking conditions explained above can be deactivated prior to a switching
action. To do this, you must check the Unlocked switching box in the Breaker/
Switch dialog box. After a password inquiry, the switching action is executed without
considering interlocking conditions. However, this is not true for interlocking conditions
which you specify in the area Unclearable lock. These are also considered if the
Unlocked switching box was checked.
q Device status (Nominal = Actual)
If this box is checked, it is checked before the command output if the actual status
of the operational equipment already corresponds to the setupoint status. The
command is not transmitted if this is the case.
q Password
Select the name of one of ten switching device passwords from this drop-down list
box. The selected password is inquired before each output of the current com-
mand. If you want to assign a new password to a command, you are requested to
enter an existing password. The individual switching device passwords can be
modified like all other passwords.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Release ON command/Release OFF command

Within these drop-down list boxes, the display texts of all messages defined in the
device matrix are displayed. As release condition of the command, select respec-
tively one separate message for the ON and OFF command. If a command shall
be executed in a switching direction without release condition, select none from the
corresponding drop-down list box.
digsi510b.gif
Figure 5-19 Example of Times tag, for commands without feedback
q Times for Output

The output time is the time after which a command with pulse output is released via
software (measured from the relay triggering). The output time is not relevant for
commands with a persistent output (or 0).
q Times for Delay end of command
The delay time of a command is the period (measured from the release of the cur-
rent command), by which the internal command procedure is prolonged. The termi-
nation of the command procedure is fed back as Delay end of command (BFE).
The delay time is only relevant for pulse outputs. The command end message
serves to coordinate the processing of command sequences (e.g. as switching cri-
terion). If a command output is not possible (message BF), the delay time is not rel-
evant.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Operating mode
Pulse outputs lead to a command activation for the output time set. The start of the
activation is signalled with Command output positive (BF+). The release of the
relay contact is not signalled. After the delay period, the command procedure is ter-
minated with the message Command end (BFE).
Permanent outputs are not subject to a time monitoring. The relay contact is
switched ON or OFF via software. The start of the output is signalled with Com-
mand output positive (BF+) and immediately terminated with Command end
message (BFE).
digsi510c.gif
Figure 5-20 Example of Times tag, for commands with feedback
q Times for output

The output time is the time after which a command is released with a pulse output
via the software (measured from the relay triggering). For commands with perma-
nent output, the output time is not relevant (or 0).
q Times for Seal-in time
The Seal-in time is the period by which the command output is prolonged after the
arrival of the expected feedback. It is used if the feedback arrives before the switch-
ing device has reached its final position.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Times for Feedback monitoring

The feedback monitoring time is the period during which the expected feedback
must be reached from the process, in order ensure that the control procedure can
be considered as successful damit (measured from the relay triggering). If the feed-
back does not arrive in time, the feedback monitoring time elapsure is signalled by
a negative feedback. If the feedback arrives nevertheless, it is treated like a spon-
taneous process message.
q Operating mode
Pulse outputs initiate a relay triggering for the set output time. The start of the trig-
gering is signalled by Command output positive. The relay contact release is not
signalled. The command is terminated after the delay time with the Command end
message (BFE).
Permanent outputs run without time monitoring. The relay contact is switched ON
or OFF via the software. The output start is signaled with Command output posi-
tive and immediately terminated with the Command end message (BFE).
User-defined mea- For the user-defined measured values (MVU) information type, you can specify the di-
sured values (MVU) mension, the conversion factor and the number of decimal places. For user-defined
and limit values limit values (LVU), you can additionally preset a limit value (Figure 5-21).
(LVU)
Figure 5-21 Information properties, example of the Limit value, user-defined (LVU) informa-
tion type with the presettings for the temperature monitoring via measurement
transducer
Metered values The direction is relevant for the correct sign. For Metered Values of Measured Values
(MVMV), you can additionally specify the restorage mode (Figure 5-24). For pulse me-
tered values (PMV), you can additionally specify the dimension, the conversion factor
and the number of decimal places (Figure 5-22). Select the individual pulse option if
each individual pulse shall increase the counter by one. If you select the double pulse
option, each individual edge (positive or negative) increases the metered value by
one.
If you, for example, enter kWh as Dimension, select single pulse and the conversion
factor 0.1, 1 pulse results to an energy of 0.1 kWh.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-22 Information properties, example of the information type Pulse Metered Value
(PMV)
For metered values of measured values and for pulse metered values, you can set the
Energy flow direction. A reverse stop is integrated in the metered-value function.
The metered value only increases if the measured value corresponds to the set ener-
gy flow direction. The energy flow direction is defined as follows:
Table 5-2 Definition of the energy flow direction
Type Source Energy flow direction Metered value

Metered values of positive Output positive
measured values negative Input positive
Pulse metered values positive Output positive
negative Input negative
digsi527a.gif
Figure 5-23 Example of the Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-24 Information properties, example of the information type Metered Value of Mea-
sured Value (MVMV)
Deleting groups Only user-defined groups and information can be deleted. To delete a complete group.
and information click on the box with the group designation. Next, right click to open the context menu
and select Delete group. The safety inquiry is displayed (Figure 5-25).
Figure 5-25 Safety inquiry before deleting a user-defined group
Click Yes if you actually want to delete the group.
Note:
By deleting a group, all information definitions summarized in the group are lost.
To delete individual information, click the line with the information to be deleted under
Information. Next, right-click to open the context menu and select Delete information.
The delete procedure is the same as described for deleting a group.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.2.5 Performing configuration
The actual assignment between the information (rows) and the sources and destina-
tions (columns) of the information is made in the cell of intersection. You click into the
cell and press the right mouse button. A pull down menu appears where you may de-
termine the properties of the assignment.
In certain cases, the pull down menu will offer X (allocated) or _ (not allocated) as the
configuration choices. In other cases, three options will be offered (e.g. L = latched, U
= unlatched, and _ = not allocated). Entries resulting in an implausible configuration
are blocked and inaccessible to the user.
Configuring binary Single point indications, double point indications, transformer tap changer indications,
inputs as sources and pulse metered values can all be configured as binary inputs. In addition, whether
or not binary inputs are activated by the presence of control voltage can be estab-
lished. That is,
H (High with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals activates
the indication
L (Low with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals deacti-
vates the indication
Note:
A single logical indication must not be configured to two physical binary inputs, since
an OR-link of both signals is not ensured. The operating program allows only one link,
and deletes the first link when a second is established. Use CFC to perform an OR
instead.
In addition, a single point indication cannot be configured to a binary input and to CFC
as a source at the same time. In this case, an error message would be displayed. Click
on OK, and select another configuration.
Figure 5-26 Error Message Resulting from Double Configuration
If a double point indication (DP) is configured to one binary input (e.g., feedback indi-
cations from switching devices), the next binary input is also set. If this configuration
is undone, the second binary input is automatically deconfigured. The order of the bi-
nary input channels is predefined. The OFF message is always before the ON mes-
sage.
If a transformer tap changer indication is configured to a binary input, the next binary
inputs in order are also configured. Their total number is the same as the number of
bits configured for the transformer tap changer. If one of these inputs is deconfigured,
all related binary inputs are automatically deconfigured.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Configuring a The four function keys on the front of the relay may also be configured as sources in
Function Key as a order to establish a link using CFC. In this situation, each function key may be linked
Source with only one internal indication. A function key may be occupied because it has al-
ready been set as an operating function for the relay. As delivered from the factory, the
devices function keys F1 and F2 are preconfigured: Upon actuating F1, the operation-
al messages and upon actuating the F2 key, the primary operational measured values
are displayed.
Note:
When configuring a message on a function key, its factory default setting gets lost. A
restoration of the delivery status is only possible by a complete recreation of a device
in DIGSI 4.
In order to configure a new indication, select one of the options (OPEN/CLOSE, ON/
OFF, etc.) from the indication group in the information catalog and drag it to the left
side of the matrix. Upon release, a new row appears in the matrix. If the mouse is po-
sitioned at the intersection of this row with column F, and the right mouse button is
pressed, a context menu opens (Figure 5-27) in which the function key may be set as
a source by clicking the proper choice.
Figure 5-27 Selecting a Function Key
Configuring inter- To configure an information on the inter-relay communication as source, this informa-
relay communication must not be configured to another source. On the other hand, an information con-
tion as source figured to the inter-relay communication as source cannot be configured to other
sources. Moreover, an information cannot be configured simultaneously on the inter-
rely communication as source and on the inter-relay communciation as destination. A
total of 32 information can be configured to the inter-relay communication as destina-
tion.
Configuring CFC as If certain information is created as a result of the implementation of a user defined logic
a Source function, this information must appear in the matrix as a source of CFC. Otherwise,
this information will not be available to the user for processing by the CFC program
For the configuration, it must be taken into account that only one source can be indi-
cated for each information.
Configuring Binary Up to ten (10) information units (commands and indications) may be configured to one
Outputs as a binary output (output relay). One indication may be configured to up to ten (10) binary
Destination outputs (LEDs and output relays).
During configuration of binary outputs, you may select, for each output relay (besides
of the logic function itself), whether it should be latched (L) or unlatched (U). If you se-
lect latched, the output relay remains energized, even after the indication is no longer
present. It must be manually reset by pressing the LED Reset button on the front panel
of the device, or via a binary input with the indication function >LED Reset, or via the
serial system interface. If unlatched is selected, the output relay disengages as soon
as the indication disappears.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Binary Outputs for The user must be cautious when configuring binary outputs for switching devices. For
Switching Devices switching devices, the type of command (e.g., single or double commands, with or
without feedback) is defined and configured to the output relay. If the preset command
types are not desired, then appropriate command types can be selected from the In-
formation catalog (see also Entering Your Own Information in the previous sub-sec-
tion) and inserted into the Configuration Matrix.
Example:
Double Command with 2
contacts
see Table 5-1
Figure 5-28 Information catalog window (Example: different command types)
If a command with multiple outputs is configured, all binary outputs required in the ma-
trix for the configuration are automatically defined. If one of these outputs is deconfig-
ured, all other binary outputs associated with the command will be automatically de-
configured. Please pay attention to the comments and switching examples in Section
5.2.1, particularly the fixed defined sequence of relay assignments (TRIP before
CLOSE).
When configuring commands, the context menu is dependent on the type of com-
mand. In some cases, the selection latched/unlatched is not available. Instead, the al-
ternatives are X (configured), _ (not configured), and F (busy flag). The latter means,
independent of the switching direction, an indication is always issued during activation
of the switching device.
For double commands with a common output, a fourth alternative C (Common con-
tact) appears. Using this, the binary output may be defined as the common relay (com-
mon contact). When this is the case, several double commands with common contacts
may be assigned to the same common relay (common contact), thus saving binary
outputs. This assumes the signals at the common outputs have the same potential.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Via the Object properties dialog window, Lock tab, you can specify which of the of-
fered checks are to be performed before executing a switching command for this ob-
ject:
Zone control: For command initiation in box with
CS = Local control
CS = Auto device (automatic command), or
CS = DIGSI (control via DIGSI 4)
the 6MD663/6MD664 sends a release request to the central device for checking the
system locking. There, the system locking is checked in CFC and acknowledged to
the 6MD663/6MD664 with a release response positive or negative. After the ar-
rival of a positive release response, the system locking check is deactivated (AV: n)
and all checks are repeated.
The overall inquiry cycle via the central device is time monitored within the frame-
work of timeout monitoring.
A system locking can also be set via the inter-relay communication for maximally
16 devices (see Section 5.4).
Zone control: Logics stored in the device via CFC are inquired and considered for
locked switching.
Blocking for protection activation: This locking option provided by devices with inte-
grated protective functions has no signification and no effect for 6MD663/6MD664.
Double operation: Parallel switching operations are blocked with respect to each
other; while one switching operation is being conducted, a second one may not be
performed.
Switching Authority Local commands: A local control switching command is only
allowed if local control is enabled on the relay (via a setting).
Switching Authority - Remote commands: A remote control switching command is
only allowed if remote control is enabled on the relay (via a setting).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Switching direction check (nominal = actual): The switching command is rejected

an a corresponding message is displayed if the switch is already in the setpoint po-
sition. If this check is activated, the switching direction check is not only performed
for the locked, but also the unlocked switching.
Password: From this drop-down list box, select the name of one of the ten switching
device passwords. The selected password is inquired before each output of the cur-
rent command. If you assign a new password to a command, your are requested to
enter the existing password. The individual switching device passwords can be
changed like all other passwords.
Figure 5-29 Dialog box object properties for a command with feedback
Additional properties for the command output to the switching device an be specified
in the Times tab. The operating modes pulse output or permanent output of the
switching command can be selected in this way. In case of a pulse output, the times
for the output and the seal-in of the command output as for the feedback monitoring
can be set (see Figure 5-30). The seal-in time is only relevant for those operating
equipment which principally transmit a feedback before the switching action is execut-
ed completely.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-30 Dialog box object properties for a command with feedback
Configuring a LED Single point indications (SP), output indications (OUT), and internal single point indi-
Display as a Desti- cations (IntSP) may be assigned to LEDs. When this is done, you may select whether
nation the indications are to be latched (L) or unlatched (U).
Up to ten (10) indications may be assigned to a LED display. One indication may be
assigned to a maximum of ten (10) outputs (LEDs and output relays).
Configuring mes- Maximally 2 message buffers are available: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (E) and
sage buffers as Warning message buffer (W). Table 5-3 provides an overview which message type
destination can be configured on which buffer.
Table 5-3 Overview of Indication Buffers

Information type \Message buffer B W
Single Point Indications (SP) X X
Double Point Indications (DP) X
Output Indications (OUT) X X
Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) X X
Internal Double Point Indications (DP) X
External Single-Point Indications (ExtSP) X X
External Double-Point Indication (ExtDP) X
Bit pattern (BP) X
Transformer Tap Change Indications X

(TxTap)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Select one of the following options for all above-mentioned message types:
ON
The message is stored in the selected buffer with the time of their arrival. This con-
figuration type is not available for the warning message buffer.
OFF
The message is stored in the selected buffer with the time of their arrival and their
disappearance. This configuration type is not available for the warning message
buffer.
X (latched)
The message is stored in the selected buffer with the time of their arrival. This con-
figuration type is only available for the warning message buffer.
_ (unlatched)
The message is not configured on a buffer.
Configuring the Depending on the SCADA interfaces connected to the relay, the types of information
SCADA Interface displayed in Table 5-4 may be configured. By placing an X in the matrix cell, the infor-
as a Destination mation is transferred to connected systems via the SCADA interface.
Table 5-4 Overview of SCADA Interfaces

System port IEC Profi- Profi- DNP3.0 Modbus
Information type bus bus DP
FMS
Single Point Indication (SP) X
Double Point Indication (DP) X
Output Indication (OUT) X
Internal Single Point Indicator (IntSP) X
Internal Double Point Indicator (IntDP) X
External Single Point Indication ExtSP) X
External Double Point Indication (ExtDP) X
Transformer Tap Change Indicator X
(TxTap)
Command with/without Feedback X
(C_**)
External Command (ExC) X
Measurement Value X
Measurement Value with Time (MVT) X
Measurement Value, user-defined (MVU) X
Limit Value, user-defined (LVU) X
Pulsed Metered Value (PMV) X
Metered Value from Measurement Value X
(MVMV)
External Metered Value (ExtMV) X
Bit Pattern (BP) X

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Configuring inter- An information cannot be simultaneously configured on the inter-relay communication

relay communica- as source and on inter-relay communication as destination. A total number of 32 infor-
tion as destination mationen can be configured on inter-relay communication as destination.
Configuring CFC Single point, double point, and output indications, as well as limit and measured val-
as a Destination ues, may be configured to CFC as the destination. This is a prerequisite which must
be met for ensuring that they are available for the processing with CFC.
Configuring control Ecxept limit values, all other information can be configured both in the default display
and default display and in the control display. By placing a X in the matrix cell, the information can be
as destination used in the basic and default display.
Configuring control Single Point and Double Point indications as well all other command types can also
as destination be configured on the control as destination. In this way, they are available for the op-
eratinal control in the device dispaly and in the Control DIGSI menu.
Configuring mea- In addition to the measured values made available by the device, user-defined mea-
sured-value win- sured and limit values can be configured in the measured value window. These are
dow as destination available in the assigned measured-value window in the device display and in the
Measurements DIGSI menu.
Configuring me- In addition to the measured values made available by the device, user-defined pulse
tered values win- metered values and metered values of measured values can be configured in the me-
dow as destination tered-value window, so that these can also be read out in the assigned metered value
window in device display.
Retrieving Device Retrieving the configurations is also possible from the device front. You may access
Configurations configuration information under Main Menu: Settings Masking (I/O).
from the Device
The menu title MASKING (I/O) appears in the title bar. Configuration information re-
Front
garding each (physical) input and output is indicated in the display.
Any new user defined information is also shown in the display once loaded into the
relay from DIGSI 4.
When selecting the MASKING (I/O) menu, either binary inputs, LEDs, or binary out-
puts may be selected. Selection of binary inputs is illustrated in Figure 5-31.
MASKING (I/O) 01/03

---------------------
>Binary Inputs > 1 BINARY INPUTS 02/11
>LED > 2 ---------------------
Binary Outputs > 3 >Binary Input 1>
>Binary Input 2>
Figure 5-31 Reading the configuration in the front display of the device example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Information regarding a binary input may be displayed by using the navigation keys to
select the binary input. See Figure 5-32.
In the example of Figure 5-32, information is dis-

BINARY INPUT 2 played regarding binary input 2. The display for bi-
---------------------
>>Reset LED SP H nary input 2 indicates that it is configured as reset
Status at Terminal 0 of the latched LEDs using a single point indication
> with voltage active (High). The present conditions
of binary input 2 is also given as 0 (not active). If a
binary input is active, a 1 is displayed.
Figure 5-32 Selection of binary input 2 example
Assignment of LEDs may be indicated at the relay, itself, using a replaceable labelling
strip with plain text on the front panel located, directly next to the LEDs.
5.2.6 Restoring metered values
The transferring of metered values from the buffer of the device to SCADA or substa-
tion controller may be performed both cyclically and/or by external polling.
In the configuration matrix, click on Options and then on Restore Metered Values. A di-
alog box, which contains a register for editing the individual values for cyclical trans-
ferring will open.
Cyclic restoring Here, you specify where the cyclic restorage initiation comes from. In addition to this,
you specify the interval time and define if the metered-value buffer shall be deleted or
not after the restorage in the device.
Figure 5-33 Dialog box Restore objects, Cyclic Restoring
In the current version of DIGSI 4, triggering occurs based on the programmed Abso-
lute time.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.2.7 Setting of Contact Chatter Blocking
Chatter blocking The contact chatter filter checks whether the number of condition changes at a binary
input exceeds a preset value during a predetermined time interval. If this occurs, the
binary input will be blocked for a certain time, so the event list does not contain a large
number of unnecessary entries. The setting values necessary for this feature may be
entered in the selection window, as shown in Figure 5-34. The selection window may
be found from the open configuration matrix by clicking Options in the menu bar and
then selecting Chatter Blocking.
Figure 5-34 DIGSI 4: Setting the Chatter Blocking Feature
Defining the Moni- The operating mode of the chatter blocking feature is determined by 5 settings:
toring Criteria
Number of permissible state changes
This setting establishes how often the state of a binary input within the initial test
time may change. If this number is exceeded, the binary input is or remains closed.
If the setting is 0 the chatter blocking is disabled.
Initial Test Time
Within this time interval (in seconds), the number of state changes of a binary input
is checked. The time interval begins with the first activation of a signal to the binary
input.
Number Of Chatter Tests
This number represents how many check cycles should be conducted before the
binary input is finally blocked. Please consider that even a high set value can be
reached over the normal life span of the device and could lead to blocking of the
binary input. Therefore this value can also be set to infinity. For this enter the digit
sequence of .
Chatter Idle Time
If the number of state changes at a binary input is exceeded during the initial test
time or the subsequent test time, the chatter idle time interval is initiated. The affect-
ed binary input is blocked for this time interval. The Chatter idle time setting is en-
tered in minutes. This settings can only be programmed if the Number of chatter
tests is not set to zero.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Subsequent Test Time

Within this time interval, the number of state changes at a binary input is checked
again. This interval begins after the chatter idle time interval has expired. If the num-
ber of condition changes is within allowable limits, the binary input is released. Oth-
erwise, the idle interval is restarted, until the maximum Number Chatter Tests is
reached again. The Subsequent Test Time setting is entered in seconds. This set-
tings can only be programmed if the Number Chatter Tests is not set to zero.
The settings for the monitoring criteria of the chatter blocking feature are set only once
for all binary inputs; however, the status of the chatter suppression can be set individ-
ually for each binary input. See Filtering / Contact Chatter Suppression in Sub-sec-
tion 5.2.3.
Note:
Chatter blocking cannot be activated for any of the standard protective indications.
The following should be noted:

If there is contact chatter at a binary input and the input is blocked, the correspond-
ing indication will be displayed with CCF (example: >Door open CCF ON). Also,
the indication Contact chatter filter reports this condition. Both messages are
shown in the operating buffer.
Chattering of a single point indication is set as ON (asserted) if the binary input has
been in an active state.
Chattering of a single point indication is set as OFF (deasserted) if the binary input
has been in an inactive state.
If this behavior causes undesired results in individual situations, a blocking may be
configured with the above-named indication in CFC.
Chattering of a double point indication will be considered an intermediate condi-
tion.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.3 Setting measuring transducers
The measured-value processing is performed by the following, predefined function

modules:
Measuring transducer U (MU U)
Measuring transducer I (MU I)
Measuring transducer monophase (MU1P)
Measuring transducer three-phase (MU3P)
Measuring transducer Aron (MUAron)
The measuring transducer modules are configured to the current and voltage chan-
nels of the bay control device in the DIGSI 4 configuration matrix. They form various
operands from these input variables. The individual measuring transducer modules
must be activated in the functional scope of the device and they are displayed in the
DIGSI 4 configuration matrix with their input channels and output variables. You can
then configure the output variables to destinations.
A functional description of the measuring transducer modules and a list of the corre-
sponding settings and information can be found in Chapter 6, Section 6.8 to Section
6.12. The connection examples are illustrated in Annex A, Section A.3.
The table below illustrates connection examples for a transformer nominal voltage
Un secondary of 100V.
Table 5-5 Connection examples for a transformer nominal voltage Un secondary of 100V
Connection variant Input voltages Functions Parameter Comment

secondary transf. Un sek.
Star connection 3 x UFeederLE = 57.7V meas. transducer 100V for oper. measurements
1 x URefLE = 57.7V threephase feeder
meas. transducer 100V for oper. measurements
monophase reference
SYNC function 1 to 57.7V 1) for synchronization
SYNC function 5 function
Star connection 3 x UFeederLE = 57.7V meas. transducer 100V for oper. measurements
UAbzw 1 x URefLE = 100V threephase feeder
Delta connection
meas. transducer 173.2V 2) for oper. measurements
URef
monophase reference
SYNC function 1 to 100V for synchronization
Aron connection 2 x UFeederLL = 100V meas. transducer 173.2V 2) for operational meas.
1 x URefLL = 100V Aron feeder
meas. transducer 173.2V 2) for oper. measurements
monophase reference

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Table 5-5 Connection examples for a transformer nominal voltage Un secondary of 100V
Connection variant Input voltages Functions Parameter Comment
secondary transf. Un sek.
Star connection solid- 3 x UFeederLE = 100V meas. transducer 173,2V 2) for oper. measurements
ly grounded networks 1 x URefLE = 100V threephase feeder
meas. transducer 173,2V 2) for oper. measurements
monophase reference
Explanation of table:
1)
Within the SYNC function, the setting Transformer Un secondary corresponds to the
secondary input voltage.
2) Within the measuring transducer packets, the setting Transformer U
n secondary corresponds
to the triple of the secondary input voltage.
Note:
In contrast to other SIPROTEC devices, a configuration has to be exe-
cuted in the bay control device in each individual case. The device only
includes some example applications.
The configuration of the measurement is different to other SIPROTEC
devices with regard to essential points.
The following text describes the configuration and uses the measuring transducer 3-
phase function module as an example.
5.3.1 Selecting measuring transducer from the functional scope
Select the measuring transducer modules which are to be included in the functional
scope of the device. Next, you must adapt the settings of the measuring transducers
to your requirements.
Selecting In the DIGSI 4 tree structure, click the plus sign left to Offline and then click Set-
functional scope tings.
In the list box, right-click Functional scope.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi561.gif
Figure 5-35 Open Functional scope object
Select Open object from the context menu. The Functional scope dialog box
opens.
digsi562.gif
Figure 5-36 Functional scope dialog box
In the line Measurement 3phase 1 packet, click on the Scope column.

Select the entry Enabled.
Click OK to close the dialog box. The measuring transducer module is activated.
Specifying measur- In the DIGSI 4 tree structure, click on the plus sign left to Settings and then on the
ing transducer Measuring transducer object. The list box provides a list of all enabled measuring
transducer modules.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi563.gif
Figure 5-37 Opening dialog box for specifying the settings
Right-click on Measurement 3phase 1packet.

Select Open object from the context menu. The dialog box for specifying the set-
tings opens.
digsi564.gif
Figure 5-38 Dialog box for specifying the settings
Specify the values Secondary Voltage Nominal Value (0,00V to 200,00V) and
Secondary Current Nominal Value (0,00A to 5,00A) according to your require-
ments. To do this, left-click the value to be changed and edit it.
Click OK to close the dialog box.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.3.2 Configuring measuring transducers
You have inserted the measuring transducer module into the functional scope of the
device and set it. Now, you must configure its inputs and outputs in the DIGSI 4 con-
figuration matrix.
Configuring mea- Double-click Configuration in the list box. The configuration matrix of the device
sured-value chan- opens.
nels
Select Measured & metered values only from the drop-down list box. The group
MU3P_1 is displayed in the configuration matrix.
digsi565.gif
Figure 5-39 Configuring measured-value channels
Configure the measured-value channels MwKan to the voltage and current inputs
as source.
Configuring mea- Configure the calculated measured values e.g. to the system interface as destina-
sured values tion.
You can also configure the calculated measured values to the inter-relay communica-
tion, CFC or the display.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Setting measured You can specify the properties of the measured values by means of a dialog.
values
First, right-click in the Information, No. column of the configuration matrix on the
information whose properties you intend to specify.
Select Properties... from the context menu. The object properties dialog box
opens.
Select the Measured value description tab and perform the desired settings.
The Measured value description tab is not relevant for the information MP1_PHI
(phase angle), MP1_WLF (active power factor) and MP1_BLF (reactive power factor)
and thus not enabled.
digsi566.gif
Figure 5-40 Dialog box Object properties, Measured value description tab
Select the Transmission threshold tab and perform the desired settings.
Use central threshold (10%)
Check this box to use the default threshold of 10%. All other input and selection
options of this tab are deactivated in this way.
Parameterized threshold
From this spin box, select a value between 0 and 2000. The set value multiplied
by 0.1% is the threshold value. This value is always used without any addition
conditions provided that neither the check box Central threshold was checked
nor a defined switching object was selected.
digsi567.gif
Figure 5-41 Dialog box Object properties, tab Transmission threshold

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Click OK to accept the settings.

Next, specify the phase angle.
First, right-click in the Information, No. column of the configuration matrix on the
information 3P1_PHI and select Properties from the context menu.
Perform the desired settings and accept them with OK.
digsi568.gif
Figure 5-42 Dialog box Object properties, tab Transmission threshold
Configure the 3P1_PHI information to C (CFC) as destination and then create a log-
ic in the corresponding CFC plan.
digsi569.gif
Figure 5-43 Example, logic of 3P1_PHI in CFC plan

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Specify the object properties of the module

(e.g. LOWER_SETPOINT). To do this, right-click on the input Limit of the module
and select Object properties from the context menu. Be aware of the following
facts:
The working range is from -180 to +180 and
a value100 (%) corresponds to 360.
digsi570.gif
Figure 5-44 Example, properties of the module LOWER_SETPOINT
The set value 12.5 corresponds to an angle of 45.

Click OK to confirm your settings.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.4 Setting inter-relay communication
General Inter Relay Communication, abbreviated to IRC, is used for the direct exchange of pro-
cess information between Siprotec 4 devices. Instead of conventional individual wir-
ing, a serial bus is used as a communication connection. Process information such as
messages, measured values and metered values are transferred via this bus. The
specification of the inter-relay communication is performed via the DIGSI 4 operator
program.
The communication works in cyclic intervals based on an image log. The cycle time is
constant in fault-free operation and depends on the baud rate, the number of process
information and the number of connected devices.
All Siprotec 4 devices communicating with each other are referred to as users of an
IRC combination. An IRC combination can have a maximum of sixteen users.
1

PS DC
20A48/20
2
INTF
BATT1F
3
CPU
X
488-3 CP 443-5
0XX0000-0XX00
X
CP
;
CP xxx41x-1XJ00-0AB0
6ES7
INTF
EXTF
SD
HD
USR1
);
MCP
X
xxx
CP
;

;xxx
0'(

INTF INTF
EXTF EXTF
LOAD
XC2
0XX0000-0XX00
X
CP
%
;

X

xxx
0'
$3
MCP
CP

;
xxx
0'
%$
INTF
EXTF
LOAD

FAULT1FAULT1FAULT1
TXD1 TXD1 TXD1

XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
0
%
;
CP'
$xxx
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
X X
CP
%
3
;
0'

$xxx
CR
0XX0000-0XX00
X
3
%
0'
;
$

$
3 $3
BATT2F USR2 RXD1 RXD1 RXD1

BAF FAULT2 FAULT2
DC5V TXD2 FAULT2TXD2
DC24V RXD2 TXD2 RXD2
RUN RUN RUN RXD2 RUNT1 T1
STOP STOP STOP STOP
RUN R1 R1
FMR RUN STOP RESET RESET
5813
STOP
581 T2 T2
BATT
1 BATT
2
6723
05(6
6<1& 6<1&
R2
T3
R2
T3
SICAM SC
R3
T4
R3
T4 Substation controller
R4 R4
; ; ;
2BATT
OFF T5 T5
1BATT
R5 R5
X1 T6 T6
/ EXT.-BATT.
PROFIBUS
-
/ R6 R6
; ; ;
3(
5...15
V DC
OLM
System interface PROFIBUS FMS
optcal double ring
Inter-relay
communcation
RS485 electric
Port B Port C Port B Port C Port B Port C
6MD66 6MD66 6MD66
Figure 5-45 Connection of the bay control devices to the inter-relay communication (electric)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
1

PS DC
20A48/20
2
INTF
BATT1F
3
CPU
X
6ES7
488-3 CP 443-5
0XX0000-0XX00
CP xxx
INTF
EXTF
SD
HD
USR1
X ;
CP

41x-1XJ00-0AB0
);
MCP
xxx
CP
;

;xxx
0'(

XC2
0XX0000-0XX00
X X
CP
%
INTF INTF
EXTF EXTF
LOAD
;

X

xxx
0'
$3
MCP
;

CP$xxx
%
0'
INTF
EXTF
LOAD

XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
X
CP'
0
%
FAULT1FAULT1FAULT1
TXD1 TXD1 TXD1

$xxx
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
X
;
CP
%
3
;
$xxx
0'
CR
0XX0000-0XX00
X
3

0'
;
%$

$
3 $3
BATT2F USR2 RXD1 RXD1 RXD1

BAF FAULT2 FAULT2
TXD2 FAULT2TXD2
DC5V RXD2 TXD2 RXD2
DC24V RUN RUN RUN RXD2 RUNT1 T1
STOP STOP STOP STOP
RUN R1
RESET R1
FMR RUN STOP RESET
581
STOP
5813
T2 T2
BATT
1 BATT
2
6723
05(6
6<1& 6<1&
R2
T3
R2
T3
SICAM SC
R3
T4
R3
T4 Substation controller
R4 R4
; ; ;
2BATT
OFF T5 T5
1BATT
R5 R5
X1 T6 T6
/ EXT.-BATT.
PROFIBUS
-
/ R6 R6
; ;
3( ;
5...15
V DC
OLM
System interface PROFIBUS FMS
optical double ring
Inter-relay
communication
optical
single ring
OLM OLM OLM

Port B Port C Port B Port C Port B Port C
6MD66 6MD66 6MD66
Figure 5-46 Connection of the by control devices to the inter-relay communication (optical)
Application Inter Relay Communication is always practical if one and the same item of process in-
formation must be made available to several Siprotec 4 devices. Instead of transmit-
ting one item of process information to several Siprotec 4 devices by means of individ-
ual wiring, this is done for only one Siprotec 4 device. The remaining Siprotec 4 devic-
es obtain the required process information via the serial IRC bus.
The OLM Optical Link Modules are listed in the accessories list in Annex A.
Example 1 (electric coupling like represented in Figure 5-45):

The connection between the 6MD66 devices is performed electrically via a RS485 in-
terface. The electric connections are connected by means of resistors to the first and
last device. These terminating resistors are set in the 6MD66 device via plug-in jump-
ers (jumper setting see Section 8.1.3.3).
In DIGSI 4, one of the following operating modes can be selected by means of the in-
terface settings.
Table 5-6 Operating mode of the IRC interface (electric)
Transmission procedure Baud rate

HDLC 125 KBaud, 250 KBaud, 1 MBaud or 1,25 MBaud
UART 115 KBaud or 250 KBaud

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Example 2 (optical coupling, similar to Figure 5-46):

An OLM is used as interface converter (optical/electric). The connection from the
6MD66 device to the OLM is performed electrically via a RS485 interface. The electric
connections must be terminated with resistors. In the 6MD66 device, these terminat-
ing resistors are set by means of plug-in jumpers (jumper position see Section 8.1.3.3)
and with DIL switches in the OLM (S1, switch 1 and 2).
The connection of the interface converters is performed optically (series connection)
and their operation is asynchronous. A DIL switch (S2, switch 5 off, 6 on, 7 on, 8 off)
is used to set a theoretical baud rate of 9600 Baud to 115200 Baud.
In DIGSI 4, one of the following operating modes can be selected by means of the in-
terface settings.
Table 5-7 Operating mode of the IRC interface (optical)
Transmission procedure Baud rate

HDLC 125 KBaud
UART 500 KBaud
The interlocking conditions within a bay with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker method operated via
three bay control devices is application example of inter-relay communication.
Bay control unit 1
LS 1
6MD66 Feeder 1
Bay control unit 2
LS 2
6MD66 Feeder 2
Bay control unit 3
LS 3
Port C
6MD66
Figure 5-47 11/2 circuit breaker method, isolator and grounding electrode not represented

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Basic To ensure that a Siprotec 4 device can be a user of an IRC combination, several
requirements requirements have to be met:
q The Siprotec 4 device must be basically suitable for Inter Relay Communication.
q An appropriate communications module must be installed in the Siprotec 4 device.
q The DIGSI 4 operator program must be installed on the PC.
q The project must include at least two SIPROTEC 4 devices meeting the require-
ments of inter-relay communication and an inter-relay combination (can be created
via settings).
Functional The IRC is based on the master-slave principle. Exactly one Siprotec 4 device of the
principle IRC combination works as the master. All other users are slaves. The master succes-
sively sends a query to all slaves. On the basis of this query, each slave sends its pro-
cess information intended for the IRC combination. The master collects all received
process information as well as its own process information to create a telegram. It then
sends this telegram to all slaves. From this telegram, each slave retrieves the process
information relevant for it.
Note:
Due to the cyclic procedure of the inter-relay communication, the short-
time change of a message is not transmitted, i.e. if its change duration is
shorter than the bus cycle time.
5.4.1 Inserting objects into the project structure
In order to be able to configure an IRC combination, you need at least two object of
type Siprotec 4 device and one object of type IRC combination.
Inserting the Objects of type

SIPROTEC 4 device Siprotec 4 device are inserted from the device catalog into the project structure by
drag-and-drop, as usual. Right-click an object of type Folder. Click Insert New
Object 4 Siprotec 4 device in the context menu. The Device Catalog window
opens. Alternatively, click Device Catalog within the context menu.
When selecting a device type, make sure that this is always suitable for Inter Relay
Communication. After the object has been placed within the project, the Properties -
Siprotec 4 device dialog box is opened as usual.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
DIGSIKOM134
Figure 5-48 Properties - SIPROTEC 4 device dialog box
Importing SIPRO- In addition to inserting a new device, it is also possible to import an already existing
TEC 4 device device of another project into the project structure. In this context, the user must be
aware of the fact that a device can only be connected to an inter-relay combination
(IRC) if it is imported as a SIPROTEC 4 device. As the VD address is not unique. a
SIPROTEC 4 variant cannot participate in such a combination.
Right-click an object of the Folder type. In the context menu, click Import device....
The Import device dialog box opens. Select the alternative As SIPROTEC 4 device
and confirm with OK.
DIGSIKOM134a
Figure 5-49 Dialog box Import device

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Define the device Here, define the device model in DIGSI 4 by selecting an order number (MLFB num-
model ber). It is important that you select the entry Inter Relay Communication from the
Function interface drop-down list box. Click OK when you have defined the entire
device model. Proceed in the same way with the remaining objects of type Siprotec
4 device that are to be users of the IRC combination.
An object of type IRC combination can be inserted in the project structure using
DIGSI 4 Manager. The users of an IRC combination as well as the necessary trans-
mission parameters are laid down here.
Inserting an The users of an IRC combination as well as the necessary transmission parameters
IRC combination are laid down in an object of type IRC combination. Furthermore, this object also con-
tains information about the current status of an IRC combination.
You can insert an object of type IRC combination within an object of type Folder only.
Right-click an object of type Folder. Click Insert New Object IRC combination
in the context menu. You can insert any number of objects of type IRC combination
within a project.
With respect to its correct function, the placement of the object within the project is not
important. Within a project, each Siprotec 4 device suitable for an IRC combination is
available for each object of type IRC combination as a user.
The only thing to remember is that at any point in time, each Siprotec 4 device can
only be a user of one single IRC combination. The selection of the placement, how-
ever, should only be made according to criteria of clarity.
Several IRC combinations can be managed within one project. In this case, each IRC
combination is represented by its own object of type IRC combination.
IRC failure mes- For devices selected via the MLFB number, the additional failure message IRC_Fault
sage is created in the Device group. This failure message can be configured individually.
At the beginning of the failure, the IRC failure monitoring sets this failure message to
ON. When the connection is established, after the transmission of the current status
of the process information, it is set to OFF. If a device (master or slave) fails, the IRC
failure messages for all other devices arrive simultaneously in the other devices.
In case of telegrams containing errors, the master repeats the slave inquiry. The num-
ber of repeats can be parameterized. A high number of repeats (in case of telegram
errors or of a bad connection) prolongs the bus cycle time. For FO connections, only
one repeat should be specified.
In case of a connection failure, the master tries to establish the connection again after
a parameterized number of bus cycles (time delay). As each (failed) connection estab-
lishment prolongs the bus cycle time, the number of time delay should be as high as
possible. On the other hand, a high number of time delay prolongs the time until a
failed device works again at the bus. 10 bus cycles are a good start value.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.4.2 Selecting combination users
An IRC combination can comprise up to sixteen users. Which users these are is stored
as a property of object type IRC combination. To select the users of an IRC combi-
nation, you must therefore open the Properties dialog of the relevant object.
Opening the dialog To do this, right-click the object of type

box IRC combination. In the context menu, click Object Properties. The Properties -
IRC combination dialog box is opened. Click the Users tab.
DIGSIKOM111
Figure 5-50 Properties - IRC combination dialog box, Users tab
Available devices In the Available Devices box you are shown the names of all Siprotec 4 devices that
are possible users for the processed IRC combination. These are devices of the cur-
rent project that meet the requirements of an Inter Relay Communication and are not
yet users of another IRC combination. In addition to the name of a Siprotec 4 device,
its position within the project is also displayed.
Selecting combina- To add a Siprotec 4 device to the IRC combination, select its name in the Available
tion users Devices box. Then click Add. To remove a Siprotec 4 device from the IRC combina-
tion, select its name in the Combination Users box. Then click Remove. By means
of multiple selection, several devices can be added to the IRC combination or
removed from the IRC combination at the same time. Alternatively, add or remove a
Siprotec 4 device by double-clicking its name in the relevant box.
An IRC combination can consist of up to a maximum of sixteen users. When this num-
ber has been reached, you will receive an error message as soon as you try to add
another Siprotec 4 device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Defining the master Each IRC combination requires a Siprotec 4 device as a master. The first Siprotec 4
device selected by you as a user is automatically defined as master. The master
device is identified in the Combination User box by a blue circle to the left of the name
of the device. If a different Siprotec 4 device is to be used as the master, select its
name in the Combination User box. Then click Master. If the device identified as
master is removed from the combination, the first Siprotec 4 device in the list of users
is automatically defined as master.
In general, any device in the IRC combination can assume the function of the master.
When selecting a Siprotec 4 device as master, however, you should take account of
some recommendations:
q The master functions require additional processor performance. You should there-
fore select a device whose usage is as low as possible during the actual process.
Accepting To accept your settings, click OK. The Properties - IRC combination dialog box is
settings closed.
5.4.3 Routing information in participating devices
The purpose of the IRC combination is to exchange process information between

Siprotec 4 devices. You must therefore take the following decisions for each Siprotec
4 device participating in an IRC combination:
q Which process information from the Siprotec 4 device should be made available to
the other devices of the IRC combination?
q Which process information from the Siprotec 4 device should process information
received from the IRC combination be able to be assigned
to?
Opening the Make this selection for each Siprotec 4 device separately using the device matrix. To
device matrix do this, open the Siprotec 4 device with the DIGSI 4 Gertebearbeitung. Double-click
the object Routing to display the device matrix.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
DIGSIKOM135
Figure 5-51 Device matrix

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Columns for IRC There is one column each in the device matrix with the designation O for the IRC com-
bination as a source and for the IRC combination as a target. These columns are gen-
erally only visible when the IRC functions in the device model have been defined.
These columns are hidden as soon as you select Only Commands as the information
filter.
This can be explained by the fact that no commands can be exchanged within an IRC
combination.
Configurable The following types of information are configurable within an IRC combination:
information types
q Single Point indication (only SP, not SP_Ev)
q Double Point indication (DP)
q Output indication (only OUT, not OUT_Ev)
q Internal single point indication (only IntSP, not IntSP_Ev)
q Internal double point indication (IntDP)
q Bit pattern indication
q Transformer tap changer (TxTap)
q Limit value (LV)
q User-defined limit value (LVU)
q Measured value (MV)
q User-defined measured value (MVU)
q External meter
Routing Subsequently, information from other users of the IRC combination can also be
information to IRC assigned to the information routed to IRC as a source. If information is received from
source the IRC combination, this is represented within the Siprotec 4 device by an item of
information specific to this device. The assignment of received information and device-
specific information is effected with the help of the combination matrix (see chapter
5.4.4).
Routing Information routed to IRC as a target can be forwarded to other users of the IRC com-
information to IRC bination. The way in which this is forwarded is also defined using the combination
target matrix.
Rules for When routing information, some rules must be observed. Compliance with these rules
routing is monitored by a consistency check.
q Information formed by a device or a function (e.g. device ready) cannot be config-
ured as source
q An item of information can only be routed to IRC as a source if it has not been
routed to any other source. Conversely, an item of information routed to IRC as a
source cannot be routed to any other sources.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q An item of information cannot be routed to IRC as a source and IRC as a target at

the same time.
q All in all, 32 items of information can be routed to IRC as a source and to IRC as a
target each.
q The source and the destination must have the same type (e.g. correct: Type SP to
SP or ExtSP; wrong: Type SP to DP).
5.4.4 Routing information between participating devices
In the device matrix you have laid down information for each individual
Siprotec 4 device within an IRC combination. Now use the combination matrix to route
this information between the individual users. Here you must decide
q what information is to be transferred from which source device to which target
device, and
q what information in the target device is generated by received inform..
Note:
The structure of the combination matrix is comparable to that of the
device matrix. The mechanisms, for example for hiding and showing
rows and columns, are identical with those of the device matrix. You will
find a detailed description of the operation of the combination matrix in
the DIGSI 4 Manager.
Open combination To be able to open the combination matrix, several conditions must be fulfilled:
matrix
q The combination matrix must not be already opened for a different IRC combina-
tion.
q The IRC combination for which the combination matrix is to be opened must com-
prise at least two Siprotec 4 devices.
q None of the Siprotec 4 devices that are users in the combination may be open for
processing.
Right-click an object of type IRC combination. In the context menu, click Open
Object. Alternatively, double-click the object. The combination matrix opens.
DIGSIKOM112
Figure 5-52 Combination matrix

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Structure After you open the combination matrix, you will immediately see a division in a hori-
zontal as well as in a vertical direction. The visual grouping of several columns or rows
into blocks is effected by buttons at the top and left-hand edges of the combination
matrix.
In a horizontal direction, the matrix is divided into two main areas: source and target.
Information is gathered to form groups in a vertical direction.
q Source
Information serves as a source. This is described by the display text, the long text
and the type. The combination matrix displays all information you have routed sep-
arately for each Siprotec 4 device to the target IRC combination in the device
matrix.
q Target
The target specifies which Siprotec 4 device an item of information is forwarded to.
A target column is displayed in the combination matrix for each user device of an
IRC combination.
q Group
A group represents the amount of information that the user of an IRC combination
places at the disposal of the other users. A group is therefore displayed in the com-
bination matrix for each Siprotec 4 device within an IRC combination. Each group
bears the name of the appropriate Siprotec 4 device.
Routing An item of information routed in the device matrix to IRC as target is available in the
Information combination matrix as source information. Conversely, all information routed in the
device matrix to IRC as a source is available in the combination matrix as target infor-
mation.
In order to route an item of source information in the combination matrix to a certain
Siprotec 4 device, left-click the common cell of information and device. The cell
changes into a drop-down list box. Here you are offered the display texts of all target
information available for this device. Select an item of information from these texts.
Proceed in the same way with all other assignments.
Rules for Some rules must also be observed when routing within the combination matrix. As
routing with the device matrix, however, compliance is monitored by an automatic consistency
check.
q One item of target information can only be assigned exactly one item of source
information. However, one item of source information can be routed to several
items of target information.
q The kind and type of source and target information must be identical. For example,
you cannot route a single indication to an output indication. However, there are two
exceptions: Incoming-outgoing indications and On-Off indications can be mutually
routed. This also applies for double indications and double indications with fault
position.
Saving All routings you carry out must be explicitly saved. Click File Save in the menu bar.
routings

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Closing the combi- To close the combination matrix, click File Exit in the menu bar.
nation matrix
5.4.5 Setting communication parameters for individual devices
A special communications module must be installed in each Siprotec 4 device suitable

for Inter Relay Communication. Provided that you have ordered a SIPROTEC 4 device
with inter-relay communication, this module is installed completely and assigned cor-
rectly. For this reason, this section is only relevant for upgrades.
The adjustment of the device-specific communication parameters is restricted to spec-
ifying the slot in which this communications module is located in the SIPROTEC 4
device.
Opening the dialog Right-click the object of type Siprotec 4 device whose parameters you wish to pro-
box cess for Inter Relay Communication. In the context menu, click Object Properties.
The Properties - SIPROTEC 4 Device dialog box appears. Select the Inter Relay
Communication tab.
Note:
This tab is only present if the following requirements are simultaneously
fulfilled:
q The current Siprotec 4 device is basically suitable for Inter Relay
Communication.
q In the Communications Modules tab, Inter Relay Communication
was selected as the function interface.
q The Siprotec 4 device is already a user of an IRC combination.
Setting the From the Slot drop-down list box, select the designation of the slot in which the com-
slot munications module was installed in the Siprotec 4 device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
DIGSIKOM113
Figure 5-53 Properties - SIPROTEC 4 Device dialog box, Inter Relay Communication tab
Note:
An automatic check for agreement between the preset and the actual slot
does not take place. Please check your settings carefully yourself.
Accepting To accept your settings, click OK. The Properties - SIPROTEC 4 Device dialog box
settings is closed. Repeat the procedure described above for all devices participating in the
IRC combination.
5.4.6 Setting the communication parameters for the combination
While the setting of device-specific communication parameters is restricted to speci-

fying the slot for the communications module, a large number of parameters must be
taken into account for the combination as a whole. The parameters that can be set are
divided into two groups:
q Serial Port Settings
These are serial port settings that must be identical for all Siprotec 4 devices par-
ticipating in the IRC combination. Otherwise, communication between the devices
would not be possible. For this reason they are defined centrally for the combina-
tion.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Bus parameters
Settings referring to bus arbitration affect only the parameter set of the Siprotec 4
device participating in the IRC combination as a master. However, since every par-
ticipating Siprotec 4 device can generally be defined as a master, these settings
are also carried out within the framework of the configuration of the IRC combina-
tion.

IRC combination dialog box opens. Select the Transmission Parameters tab.
DIGSIKOM114
Figure 5-54 Properties - IRC combination,

Transmission Parameters tab
Note:
We recommend to accept the preset transmission settings.
Defining Serial Port The following serial port settings must be made:
Settings
q Transmission mode
Use this drop-down list box to select the name of a transmission mode. You will cur-
rently be offered UART and HDLC to choose from. For the same baud rate, HDLC
guarantees higher transmission density than UART. This is possible due to data
compression. The selection of a transmission mode must be compatible with the
communications modules installed in the Siprotec 4 devices participating in the IRC
combination.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Baud rate
Select a baud rate from the drop-down list box. The baud rate you are offered
depends on the transmission mode selected.
The higher the transmission rate is, the shorter becomes the cycle time and the
more participants can be connected to the bus with the same cycle time. In case of
a low cycle time and of many slaves connected to the bus, the processor utilization
of the master increases. Therefore, the Minimum cycle time setting must be
increased in exceptional cases.
If the HDLC protocol is used, the baud rate must be set according to the bus
design:
Line bus via RS485: 1 MBit (limited by RS485 and line length)
Star connection via optical star couplers: 512 KBit (limited by miniature star cou-
plers)
Double ring with OLM: 1 MBit (limited by RS485)
q Automatic Address Recognition

When this check box is activated, the Siprotec 4 device only takes account of a
received telegram if it is addressed to this device. This measure relieves the strain
on the CPU of the Siprotec 4 device. This option is only available if UART has been
selected as transmission mode.
Setting Bus The following parameters must be set for bus arbitration:
arbitration
q Maximum number of Telegram repetitions
If a telegram has been badly transmitted, this telegram can be retransmitted. Use
this to define how many retransmission attempts are to take place. The maximum
possible number of new attempts is three.
q Number Pauses before a new query is directed to a failed device
If a Siprotec 4 device participating in the combination fails, it can be ignored for a
certain number of cycles when queried by the master. In this case, select a value
in the range from 0 to 254 from this drop-down list box.
q Minimum cycle time
The cycle time defines the overall duration of a cycle within which all slave devices
are queried by the master device. Select a value of between 10 and 10000 ms from
the spin box. Since the cycle time is dependent on the usage of the master, the
cycle time actually achieved may be higher than the parameterized value. To
ensure that the master always uses the shortest possible cycle time, select the
check box Minimum cycle time continuous.
5.4.7 Updating parameter sets
When an IRC combination is configured for the first time, or if the settings of individual
combination parameters are changed, individual or all combination users must be
updated, depending on the changes made to the parameter sets.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration

IRC combination dialog box opens. Select the Update tab.
DIGSIKOM115
Figure 5-55 Properties - IRC combination dialog box, Update tab
The Update tab gives you an overview of the current status of the parameter sets of
the individual combination users.
Checking the cur- All devices that have a current parameter set in DIGSI 4 are identified in the P col-
rent status umn with a check mark. If this parameter set has already been transmitted to the real
Siprotec 4 device, you can note this manually by means of a check mark in the G col-
umn. To do this, click the relevant check box. This selection can only be set if the
parameter set in DIGSI 4 is up to date.
It is automatically deleted if changes that influence the parameter set of the Siprotec
4 device concerned are made.
DIGSI 4 automatically detects which parameter sets are no longer up to date. As
soon as the Update command is given, these parameter sets are updated one after
the other. However, it is important for you to know after which change you have to rein-
itialize which Siprotec 4 device. Here is a brief overview:
q Changing the slot for the communications module: Parameter set of the user con-
cerned.
q Changing a serial port parameter in the Transmission parameters tab: Parameter
sets of all users.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
q Changing a bus parameter in the Transmission parameters tab: Parameter set

of the master.
q Changing routing in the combination matrix: Parameter sets of the two users con-
cerned.
q Changing routing in the device matrix of a Siprotec 4 device to IRC as target:
Parameter set of the user concerned.
q Deleting or adding a user: Parameter sets of all users.
Update parameter In order to update all parameter sets that are not up to date, click Update All Param-
sets eter Sets. Within the Report window you are shown messages concerning the
progress of the update. The parameter sets are updated in DIGSI 4.
DIGSIKOM116
Figure 5-56 Report window, IRC update tab
If you have made any changes to the combination matrix, you can immediately update
these changes in the parameter sets concerned. To do this, click File Save and
Generate Parameter Sets in the menu bar.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.4.8 Printing combination information
You can print out the following information relating to an IRC combination:
q The settings of the transmission parameters of the IRC combination.
q The names of the Siprotec 4 devices participating in the IRC combination including
the identifying letters of the selected slots.
q Update information on each individual user of the IRC combination.
Opening the dialog Right-click an object of type IRC combination. In the context menu, click Print
box Object Contents. The Print Combination Information dialog box is opened.
DIGSIKOM130
Figure 5-57 Print Combination Information dialog box
Set Define the scope of the information to be printed by selecting the individual check
scope of printing boxes. Then click OK. The Print Manager window is opened.
DIGSIKOM131
Figure 5-58 Print manager window
This window gives you a page preview for the information to be printed. You have the
option of influencing the representation in the Print Manager window.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Scrolling between Click Next to show the next page. This button is inactive when the last available page
pages is being displayed. Click Previous to display the previous page. This button is inactive
when the first available page is being displayed.
Changing the rep- Click One Page/Two Pages in order to switch from one-page display mode to two-
resentation mode page display mode or vice versa, depending on the current display.
Changing the Click Zoom In to enlarge the display of the page in defined steps. This button is inac-
scaling of the tive as soon as the largest possible display has been reached. Alternatively, click with
display the left-hand mouse button as long as the mouse cursor is within the display area. In
this case too, the display of the page is enlarged in defined steps. Click Zoom Out to
reduce the display of the page in defined steps. This button is inactive as soon as the
smallest possible display has been reached.
Note:
An enlarged or reduced display has no influence on the printout.
Printing informa- In order to print out the displayed information, click Print.
tion
5.4.9 Time synchronization
In addition to the transmission of process information, the IRC can synchronize the
clock of the connected devices. The master, who synchronizes its time e.g. via a radio
clock, forwards the time per minute to the connected slaves. For this purpose, the time
synchronization via IRC must be set in the slaves.
Open dialog box Open the SIPROTEC 4 device with the DIGSI 4 device configuration.
In the data window, double-click on Time synchronization. The Time Synchroniza-
tion & Time Format dialog box opens.
Select time syn- From the Source of time synchronization drop-down list box, select the entry inter-
chronization relay communication an confirm your entry with OK.
source

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
DIGSIKOM140
Figure 5-59 Dialog box Time Synchronization & Time Format

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.5 Synchronizing circuit breakers
General
When connecting the circuit breaker, the 6MD663 and 6MD664 bay control devices
can check if the synchronization conditions of the two subnetworks are met (synchro-
nization check).
The device distinguishes between synchronous and asynchronous network systems
and reacts differently on the connection. In case of synchronous network systems
there are slight differences with regard to the phase relation and the voltage moduli.
The circuit breaker operating time does not need to be considered. In case of asyn-
chronous network systems the voltage moduli are higher and the range of the con-
nection window is passed faster. For this reason, the circuit breaker operating time
must be considered in this context. The switching command is automatically pre-
dated, so that the circuit breaker contacts close exactly by the right time.
The following settings are essential for synchronization:
q Voltage moduli Umin <U< Umax
q Difference of the voltage moduli U< Umax
q Difference of the frequency f < fmax
q Difference of the angles < max
The automation functions enabled in the bay control device allow to use different ref-
erence voltages of the active busbar automatically for synchronization, depending on
the position of the isolator.
Up to eight different settings groups can be stored for the synchronization function and
made available for operation. In this way, it is possible to consider the different prop-
erties of several circuit breakers.
Chapter 6, Section 6.13 provides a description of the synchronization function for cir-
cuit breakers. In addition to this, it includes the corresponding settings and informa-
tion. Annex A, Section A.3 includes a connection example for synchronization.
Inserting synchro- The synchronization is a function which must be specified as enabled within the frame-
nization function work of the functional scope to be determined via the DIGSI 4 operator program.
To do this, proceed as follows:
In the DIGSI 4 tree structure, click on the plus sign left to Offline and then on Set-
tings.
In the DIGIS 4 drop-down list box, double-click Functional scope.
In the Scope column, click the desired line
(e.g. SYNC function group 1).
Select Enabled from the list.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-60 Specifying functional scope
Confirm the functional scope with OK.
Specifying syn- Parameterize the synchronization function via the DIGSI 4 operator program.
chronization
To do this, proceed as follows:
In the tree structure, click on Synchronization. The enabled synchronization func-
tion groups are displayed in the list box at function selection.
Double-click the function group (e.g. SYNC function group 1) you intend to param-
eterize. The parameterization dialog box opens. It includes the tabs Power System
Data, General, Asyn. Conditions and Syn. Conditions.
Select the Power System Data tab and perform the desired settings. The individual
settings are listed and described in chapter 6 section 6.13.
Figure 5-61 Power System Data tab

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Perform additional settings in the tabs General, Asyn. Conditions and Syn. Con-
ditions.
Figure 5-62 General tab
Figure 5-63 Asyn. Conditions tab

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-64 Syn. conditions tab
Confirm your synchronization settings with OK.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.6 Creating user-definable functions with CFC
General SIPROTEC 4 devices are able to realize user-defined logic functions. These logic
functions can be edited. For editing user-defined monitoring functions and logic
switchings (e.g. interlocking conditions of switching devices) or for measured-value
processing, the user requires the CFC tool (= Continuous Function Chart, permanent
function diagram). Without software knowledge, e.g. interlockings or command deri-
vations can be programmed without software knowledge. The library contains a total
number of 21 function modules which can be used to compose the desired functions.
For more detailed information, please refer to the CFC manual, order number
E50417H1100C098 as well as to the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417
H1100C097.
A logic switching is created via a PC and the DIGSI 4 operator program, by way of
the operating serial or the service port. The configuration of the input and output mes-
sages to be used in these programmable functions as described in section 5.2 is a pre-
requisite for this. To create your own logic functions, you must already have routed the
required messages and measured values to CFC as source or destination.
To start CFC, double-click CFC at Settings. You can now see the names of all enabled
CFC plans. Double-click the name of the CFC plan you intend to edit. The CFC pro-
gram is started and the plan is displayed. If no plan exists so far, you can insert a new
plan via the line menu with Insert CFC Plan.
Priority classes / The functions to be realized can be subdivided into the following 4 priority classes:
run sequences
Measured values: Are in the background and are processed cyclically (in sec-
ond range) (MW_BEARB = measured-value processing);
System logic: These are not top prior and are event-driven, i.e. they are
processed for any change to one of the inputs
(PLC1_BEARB = slow PLC processing);
Top-priority functions: Top priority (over command processing) and event-driven,
i.e. they are immediately processed in case of any change
to the inputs (PLC_BEARB = fast PLC processing);
Interlocking: Interlocks against switching errors are in the background
and are activated with a control command or a control
feedback (SFS_BEARB).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The function to be realized must first be assigned to one of these 4 priority classes. To
do this, activate the menu Edit Run sequence to select the desired run sequence.
Figure 5-65 Specifying the run sequence
Select Edit Predecessor for Installation in the run sequence menu and specify in this
way the following function modules selected by you from the library belong to the de-
sired run sequence.
Figure 5-66 Assignment of the function modules to the selected run sequence
The correct assignment is of importance. If, for example, an interlocking logic would
be created in the first run sequence level, only the cyclic processing would permanent-
ly create messages and thus unnecessarily fill the message buffer. On the other hand,
the interlocking condition would not be updated in time by the time of a switching ac-
tion, as the cyclic inquiry doesnt provide for a time coordination with the switching ac-
tion.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The table below provides an overview of the assignment of the function modules to
the individual run sequences.
Table 5-8 Function modules and their possible assignment to the run sequences
Run sequence
Function module Explanation MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
ABSVALUE Modulus formation X
ADD Addition X X X X
AND AND grid X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Bool after command, X X

conversion
BOOL_TO_DI Bool after double point indica- X X X

tion, conversion
BUILD_DI Creation double point indica- X X X

tion
CMD_CHAIN Switching sequence X X
CMD_INF Command information X
CONNECT Connection X X X
D_FF DFlipflop X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double point indication after X X X

Bool, conversion
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode double point indication X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR grid X X X X
LIVE_ZERO LiveZero monitoring, non-lin- X

ear characteristic
LONG_TIMER Timer (max. 1193 h) X X X X
LOOP Signal feedback X
LOWER_SETPOINT Limit-value below setpoint X
MUL Multiplication X X X X
NAND NAND grid X X X
NEG Negator X X X
NOR NOR grid X X X
OR OR grid X X X
RS_FF RSFlipflop X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Common X X X X
SR_FF SRFlipflop X X X
SUB Subtraction X X X X

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Table 5-8 Function modules and their possible assignment to the run sequences
Run sequence
Function module Explanation MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
TIMER universal timer X X
UPPER_SETPOINT limit value above setpoint X
X_OR XOR grid X X X
ZERO_POINT zero-point suppression X
Work sheets Editing is performed on so-called work sheets.
ABL1
ES1 1
FM1
3 1
FM1 FM1
ES2 2 3 1 2 AS4
ES3 2
Figure 5-67 Principle representation of the function modules in the CFC work sheet
The left bar on the work sheet represents the inputs and the right bar represents the
outputs of a function. The inputs are connected with input signals in image ES1 to
ES3 . They may, for example, be messages from the system (via binary inputs), from
device function keys or from protective functions. The output signal in image
AS4 can, for example, trigger an output relay and create inputs into message buff-
ers, depending on the previous routing.
Setting and con- The required function modules are made available in a library. It can be seen from the
necting function module to which of the 4 above-mentioned run sequences (MV, PLC1, PLC or SFS)
modules it is assigned. The modules have at least one input and one output. In addition to the
inputs and outputs which can be recognized in the work sheet, a module can have ad-
ditional inputs. You can visualize them by selecting the module header, clicking the
right mouse button, selecting the menu option Number of connections and increasing
the preset number.
Figure 5-68 Example of OR grid: module menu

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The Object properties menu item serves to change the module name, to insert a com-
ment and to edit run sequence properties and connection settings.
The interconnection of the modules and the logic link with the input and output signals
of the system is performed by selecting the desired module input/output, clicking the
right mouse button and by selecting the menu option Copnnection to Operand.
Figure 5-69 Example of the selection menu of a module input
A window containing a list of input signals is displayed. By selecting one of these sig-
nals and by confirming with OK, the selected signal is entered in the left bar. From
there, a connection line is drawn to the module input. The circuiting of the output is
performed analog. A connection between two modules is established by consecutively
clicking the two connections.
If the connection line representation doesnt provide a good overview or if it becomes
impossible due to a lack of space, the CFC editor creates a pair of connectors instead
(destination character). The interconnection can be seen from the identical number-
ing.
Connector
Figure 5-70 Connector
Fleeting indications Be aware that, for processing in CFC, fleeting indications are only suitable as an initi-
ation for processing a work sheet. A fleet doesnt have a state (information value).
Check Further work sheets may exist in addition to worksheet ABL1 illustrated as an exam-
ple. the contents of each work sheets are converted by DIGSI 4 into a program and
processed by the device. To create your own plan and to check it for formal correct-
ness (with regard to syntax), activate the mnau command Plan Check consistency.
Here, it would, for example, be signaled if you hadassigned modules to various run
sequences contrary to the convention or if you had exceeded the limits mentioned fur-
ther downwards.
You must perform the functional correctness check yourself.
Save the created plan via: Plan Close. In the same way, you can reopen and further
edit the saved plan via the path: Plan Open.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Be aware that certain limits and restrictions exist for storage capacity and run-time
reasons. Only a finit editing time is available in the processor system for each of the 4
PLC run sequences. Each module, each module input (if circuited or not), each logic
link created via the marginal bars requires a certain processing time. The sum of the
individual processing times of a run sequence must not exceed the maximum process-
ing time defined for this level. Otherwise, restrictions of other functionalities (e.g. de-
lays) may result.
The processing time is measured in so-called TICKS. In 6MD663/6MD664, the follow-

ing maximum TICKS are permissible for the various run sequences:
Table 5-9 Maximum number of TICKS in the run sequences for 6MD663/6MD664
Run sequence Limit in TICKS

MW_BEARB (Measured-value processing) 3000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 5000
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) 700
SFS_BEARB (switching error protection) 3000
The table below shows the number of TICKS required for the individual elements of a
CFC plan. In this context, a generic module is a module for which the number of inputs
can be modified; typical logic functions are AND, NAND, OR, NOR.
Table 5-10 Processing times in TICKS for individual elements
Individual element Number of

TICKS
Module, minimum requirement 5
from 3rd additional input onward with generic modules per input 1
Logic link to input marginal bar 6
Logic link to output marginal bar 7
Additional per plan 1
You can check the capacity utilization of the processor capacity available for CFC at
Extras Logs in the Translate tab. Scroll to reach a range in which you can read in-
formation on the used storage consumption in per cent of the part provided for CFC.
As an example of the PLC_BEARB run sequence, Figure 5-71 shows an 38 % over-
utilization (separately marked in image), whereas the other run sequences are within
the permissible range.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-71 Retrieving the utilization degree of CFC switchings
If the limits are exceeded during processing in CFC, DIGSI 4 transmits a warning
message. Confirm this message to get information on the utilization, as described
above.
Figure 5-72 Warning message on exceeding the 100 % limit
The following paragraphs provide some examples of CFC configurations:
Example 1 (MW): A configuration for low-current monitoring alarm (see Figure 5-73) which can be pro-
Low Current duced using CFC, should be a first example. This element may be used to detect op-
Monitor eration without load, or to recognize open circuited conditions. By connecting mea-
sured current values with a limit function via an OR function, an indication may be gen-
erated which can be used to cause switching operations.
The configuration sheet is assigned to task level MW_BEARB.
Four function modules (3 lower-value limit modules and an OR gate), are taken
from the function module library and copied into the configuration sheet.
In the left panel, the measurement values to be monitored (IL1, IL2, IL3 in % of the
nominal current) are each selected and connected with the measured value inputs
of each limit module function.
A lower limit setpoint value (IL<) is linked with the limit inputs of each of three limit
sensor functions.
The limit value function outputs are passed on to the OR gate.
The output of the OR gate is connected to the right border column at annunciation
I< alarm.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The limit value message is triggered when the preset limit value is below the setpoint
(low current) in at least one of the three phases. The hysteresis of the limit values is
fixed and need not be entered (5 % of set point plus 0.5 % of nominal value).
Measurement FM:
Vol
IL1
Annunciation BO
Lower
Setpoint
Set points
Limit
IL<
Measurement FM:
Vol
IL2 FM:
Annunciation BO
Lower
Setpoint
>1 I<
alarm OUT
Set points Limit

IL<
FM:
Measurement
Vol
Annunciation BO
IL3 Lower
Setpoint
Limit
Set points
IL<
Figure 5-73 Under-current monitoring as an example of user defined measurement value

processing
Example 2 (SFS): An interlocking shall be realized for the switch-on of an isolator Q1. The switch position
Isolator interlock- feedback of the corresponding circuit breaker Q0 and the isolator Q2 are considered
ing in this context.
An ON switching command to the isolator Q1 shall be released if the information Q1
OnRel of the Interlocking group has the information value ON
(interlocking Q1 OnRel = ON).
Insert a new Interlocking group into the configuration matrix.
Copy a new information (type: messages, tagging, internal single-point indication)
from the information catalog into the group Interlocking.
Enter Q1 OnRel as designation of the new information.
Insert a new information designated Q1 OffRel into the Interlocking group.
In the Switching objects group of the information Q1, activate the checkbox
Check bay blocking in the object properties.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Assign the new information Interlock Q1 OnRel to the Release ON command in-
put box.
Assign the new information Interlock Q1 OffRel to the Release OFFcommand in-
put box.
digsi533.gif
Figure 5-74 Dialog box Object properties
Next, you must create the information interlock Q1 OnRel and

interlock Q1 OffRel via CFC.
The release information interlock Q1 OnRel in the CFC is formed in the following
way:
Interlock Q1 OnRel = ON, if
Switching object Q0 DP = OFF & Switching object Q2 DP = OFF
In the Switching objects group of the configuration matrix, route the information
Q0 and Q2 to the destination CFC (C column).
In the Interlock group, route the information Q1 OnRel to the source CFC.
The function modules DP_DECODE and AND can be seen from the library and
must be copied into the work sheet.
Connect the Val inputs of the modules DP_DECODE with the information
Switching object Q0 and Switching object Q2.
Connect the DP_DECODE modules with the AND module.
Connect Y output of the AND module with the information Interlock Q1 OnRel.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi534.gif
Figure 5-75CFC plan Interlocks
Example 3 (PLC1): By using slow PLC processing, an additional, event-driven logic condition may be con-
Additional Logic structed which delivers indications regarding switch-gear operating status. These in-
dications may be passed externally via LEDs or relay contacts, or used as input sig-
nals for further logical links. In the example (see Figure 5-76), the output information
indication from the circuit breaker interlocking logic (CB TRIP) and a joint indication
from all protective element trip signals (Protection TRIP) are linked to a new Circuit
Breaker Operation message. Furthermore, the single point indication (SP) Test Oper,
which may be coupled via a binary input, is linked with an internal reusable Test oper.
message.
CB TRIP
1 Circuit Breaker
Protection TRIP Operation
>Test Oper. Test Oper.
Figure 5-76 Additional logic as an example for a PLC_1 event-driven logic condition

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.7 Establishing a default display
In the neutral position, the display of the device shows the so-called default display as
permanent display. It can be configured by the user. As a rule, a graphic scheme of
the feeder will be chosen as a basis for this, to be always informed on the switching
status of the power system. It is not possible to actuate switching equipment from this
default display. On the other hand, the default display can be completed by additional
information. For example, the most important operational measured values (current
and voltage in the feeder) can be displayed permanently.
A default display is preset in the delivery status of the device (see Figure 5-77), which
can be used or replaced for adapting it to the actual power system conditions. Howev-
er, it is also possible to display other information in the default display instead of a
power system image. For example, the display can also be used to permanently show
big number of operational measured values. The default display may consist of sev-
eral pages.
How to proceed The default display is created or modified via the Display Editor in the DIGSI 4 oper-
ator program. The principle procedure is described in section 4.9 and more detailed
information is provided by the Display Editor manual (order no. E50417H1176
C095).
As a prerequisite for modifying or recreating the default display, those information is
routed in the configuration matrix (see section 5.2) which is to be shown in the default
display, i.e. the combination of the information of the lines concerned in the Destina-
tion column Display G was provided by checking the corresponding box.
A library contains icons of circuit breakers, isolators, grounding electrodes, etc., with
which the desired default display can be composed. These standard specifications
can be changed at any time via the DIGSI 4 display editor. Moreover, the user can
create his own icons and store it in the library.
In a guided dialog, the user can assign different icons for each status to the operating
equipment components, e.g. for the circuit breaker ON/OFF/DISTURBED.
The image can be zoomed in and out to show details or an overview of the feeder.
The designation of the power system or of the system section can be entered into the
header of the image. The status line at the lower image edge cannot be configured.
Proceed as follows:
In DIGSI 4, call the Default display at the Settings level. The Display Editor is start-
ed and the default display is opened (see Figure 5-77).
Enter the header. To do this, select the following path: Tools Select. Next, click
with the left mouse button in the area of the header. The desired text can be entered
now. Check the box next to the input field.
Draw the topology (e.g. busbar, feeder or grounding path). To do this, select the
horizontal and vertical lines as well as the crossing points from the line library, mark
them and confirm your selection with OK.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Position the operational equipment components and icons (e.g. switching objects,
transformers, measured values) by way of selecting them in the library and click the
insertion point in the drawing area. Connect the operational equipment components
with the corresponding information. The information suitable for the operational
equipment component and previously routed by you in the matrix is offered in the
Connect with dialog window (see Figure 5-78). Click the desired entry from this win-
dow and confirm your selection with OK. In this way, you connect the graphic with
the configuration settings.
Figure 5-77 Standard default display after opening the Display Editor
Connect the operational equipment components with the corresponding informa-

tion. The information suitable for the operational equipment and previously routed
by you in the matrix is offered in a Connect dialog window (see Figure 5-78). Select
the desired entry from this window and confirm your selection with OK. In this way,
you connect the graphic with the configuration settings.
If required, place text. To do this, click Tools Insert text and then click the inser-
tion point for the text in the drawing area.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-78 DIGSI 4 selection window of the switching equipment (example)
Check the ready default display. To do this, you can, for example, hide the grid
(View Grid), highlight operational equipment components (View Highlight dis-
plays) and create a view of the complete device with the representation of the de-
fault display (View Normal size, see Figure 5-79).
Save the default display and close the display Editor (Display Close). Confirm the
safety inquiry with Yes.
Figure 5-79 Default display in normal size
To be able to use the default display several times, e.g. as a template for the control
display, click in the display Template Save as... Select the desired saving path
and enter the new file names. The file type is defined. Click on Save.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.8 Designing a control display
General The control display serves for the graphical representation of the switch positions and
for controlling switching objects. As a rule, only those objects relevant for switching are
represented. Measured values, etc., are not represented. The control display must be
selected.
In the delivery status of the device, a control display is preset. It can be modified or
replaced for being adapted to the actual power system conditions. The control display
may consist of several pages.
Figure 5-80 Preset control display
How to proceed The control display is created or modified via the Display Editor in theDIGSI 4 oper-
ator program. The principle procedure is the same as for creating the default display
(see Section 5.7).
The configuration of the switching equipment and of the triggering messages are a
prerequisite for the modification or creation of a control display (see Section 5.2). This
is the only way ensuring that the image adapts dynamically to the corresponding
switching conditions.
The same tools already presented for the default display are also used for modifying
the factory presetting and design.
Proceed as follows:
If you have saved the default display as template and if you want to use it as a basis
for the control display, load the template via Display Template Open... into an
empty control display.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
As it shall be possible to operate the switching devices in the bay via the control dis-
play, you must make the corresponding operational equipment component opera-
tor-controllable. To do this, double-click the operational equipment concerned in the
open control display (see Figure 5-81). Select the Object operator-controllable
option in the displayed dialog window Properties operational equipment.
In addition to this, specify which operational equipment component shall be con-
trolled first after calling the control display in the SIPROTEC device. To do this,
select the Default object option. Confirm your settings with OK.
Figure 5-81 Making operational equipment components operator-controllable to have them

offered first for switching

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.9 Serial Interfaces
The device is equipped with one or several serial interfaces: an operating serial port
integrated in the front cover, also called PC interface, and depending on the order-
ing variant a service port on the rear panel, system ports for connecting a central
control and saving equipment, e.g. SICAM SAS, as well as optionally one port for in-
ter-relay communication. Certain conventions are required for the communication via
these ports. These conventions concern the device identification, the transmission for-
mat and the transmission speed.
These interfaces are configured via the DIGSI 4 operator program. Click Settings in
the navigation window. Next, double-click Interfaces in the data window and enter
your specific data in the following dialog box (Figure 5-82). Depending on the PC
equipment, the dialog box contains a different number of tabs with setting options for
the corresponding interface settings which you can reach consecutively by clicking.
The address management of the Inter-relay communication is performed in
DIGSI 4 and doesnt need to be specified. The inter-relay communication (e.g. of the
transmission settings) can be performed at IRC combination (see section 5.4).
Figure 5-82 DIGSI 4, settings of the interface on the PC

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Serial port on the The first tab (Serial port on PC) serves to enter the communication port of your PC,
PC which you have connected with the 6MD663/6MD664 device (COM 1 or COM 2, etc.).
It is not necessary to manually enter the settings for the data format and the baud rate,
if you accept these values from the Operator interface tab or, if available, from the
Service interface tab. In this way, DIGSI 4 retrieves essential values directly from
the interface and the corresponding setting boxes are not available (see Figure 5-82).
As an alternative, you can also enter individual values at the Independent of device
option.
The PC monitors the data exchange with regard to the device reaction times. Within
predefined limits, you can specify maximum device response times. The displayed
values RQ 1 and RQ 2 correspond to the preset response times in milliseconds. These
values shall not be modified in normal cases. A modification is only useful if a timeout
occurs frequently during parameterization. To modify these values, enter an integer
value in the range from 200 to 9999 for RQ1 and from 0 to 9999 for RQ2.
Operating and Ser- The Operator interface and Service interface tabs display the settings for the data
vice interface format and the transmission speed.
Figure 5-83 DIGSI 4, settings of the service interface example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
The setting of the maximum telegram gaps is only important if the device shall com-
municate via one of the interfaces by means of a modem. The maximum permissible
time period of transmission gaps in a telegram transmission is set as gap. When using
modems, transmission gaps are created by data compression error correction and
baud rate differences. In case of a good transmission quality between the modems,
the setting 1.0 s is recommended. This value should be enhanced in case of bad con-
nections.
High values make the communication slower in case of transmission errors. For a di-
rect connection of a personal computer, Max. Telegram gap can be set to 0.0 s.
Note:
Dont use the operator interface for communication via modem!
Other interfaces The remaining tabs are used for entering your specific settings and addresses for de-
vice identification or check the preset values. The device address by means of which
the control system can clearly identify each device must be set unambiguously for
each power system. Otherwise, messages cannot be assigned in the overall system.
More detailed information regarding the setting of interfaces can be seen from the
DIGSI 4 communication manual, order no. 50417H1176C100.
If you intend to extend or modify interfaces belatedly, please refer to the conversion
instructions of the interfaces. For a necessary hardware adaptation, please refer to
Section 8.1.3 of this manual.
Profibus For a Profibus connection if existing between the SIPROTEC device and the
connection SICAM SAS or DIGSI 4, a fault-free communication with a minimum transmission
rate of 500 kBaud is recommended.
Note:
Firmware Version 4.11 and higher:
When the FO connection of an FO double ring fails, the device no longer receiving
signals transmits a fault message.
The FO status messages (e. g. FO-1 fault, FO-2 fault) belong to the category Device
messages in the DIGSI allocation matrix. These status messages do not remain allo-
cated by default, i. e. the user of a double ring configuration must allocate these status
messages where necessary.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Retrieving and The device user interface allows to read out and partially modify the most important
changing interface interface settings. To access the operating block intended for interfaces, use the fol-
settings on device lowing path: MAIN MENU via Settings Setup/Extras Interfaces.
The operator, system and service interface are offered under the menu headline (IN-
TERFACES) and can be selected by means of the navigation key. Pressing the
takes you to the submenu of the corresponding interface. The representation and the
possibility to parameterize directly on the device are identical for the operator and the
service interface. The operator interface is illustrated as an example.
OPERATOR PORT 01/04

---------------------
>Address > 1
>Baud rate 38400 Baud
Parity 8E1 (DIGSI)
Gap tol. 0.0s
Figure 5-84 Retrieving and parameterizing the operator interface in the device operator con-
trol panel
The interface type depends on the device type and variant and can also miss com-
pletely. The data of the operator and service interface can also be modified on the de-
vice, whereas the data of the system interface(s) can only be read out on the device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.10 Date and time control
The integrated date/time control allows for a precise time assignment of events, e.g.
in the Event Log or the Trip Log or in the minimum/maximum value lists. The time can
be influenced via
the internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock),
external synchronization sources (DCF77, IRIG B, SyncBox, PROFIBUS, IGK),
external minute pulses via binary input.
Note:
Upon delivery of the device, the internal RTC clock is preset as synchronization
source. Should the time synchronization be performed via an external source, this
source must be selected.
Time The time control settings can be found in DIGSI 4 at Settings Time synchroniza-
synchronization tion.
Figure 5-85 Settings window in DIGSI 4
Double-click Time synchronization to open the Time synchronization & Time format di-
alog window.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Figure 5-86 Dialog window time synchronization and time format in DIGSI 4
Note:
The synchronization types displayed depend on the device type and the set MLFB
number. The overall scope of permissible synchronization types is represented in Ta-
ble 5-11.
Here, you decide how the internal clock control shall be influenced. You can choose
among the following operating modes:
Table 5-11 Time control operating modes
No. Operating mode Explanation
1 Intern Internal synchronization via RTC (presetting)
2 PROFIBUS FMS External synchronization via PROFIBUS interface
3 IRIG B time signal External synchronization via IRIG B
4 DCF77 time signal External synchronization via DCF77 time signal
5 Sync.Box time signal External synchronization via SIMEASSynch.Box time sig-

nal
6 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
7 Inter-relay communication External synchronization by the master device of the inter-

relay communication
The RTC runs also when the auxiliary voltage is shut off, by means of an internal buffer
battery. It is updated with each external synchronization or upon changing the time of
day. It provides the device clock time upon switching on the device or after an auxiliary
voltage failure. The synchronization source set is effective in this case.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
In Internal mode, the system time is controlled using only the RTC as the synchroni-
zation source. It may be set manually. The procedure for manual date/time setting is
given in Section 7.2.1.
If an external source is selected, only the selected synchronization source is used. If
the source fails, the internal clock continues unsynchronized.
If time synchronization is to take place via a control system, the option IEC-60870-5
103 or PROFIBUS FMS must be selected (Figure 5-86).
When using radio clock signals, the user must take into account that it can take up to
3 minutes after device startup or restored reception for the received time signal to be
decoded. The internal clock is not resynchronized until then.
With IRIG B, the year must be set manually, because this standard does not include
a year value. Note: If a year number less than 91 is selected by mistake, the year
91 will be set upon first synchronization.
For synchronization using pulses via a binary input, the present device time will ad-
vance to 00 seconds of the next minute for values greater than 30 seconds when the
positive slope of the pulse arrives. For second values less than 30, the device time will
be set to 00 seconds of the current minute. Because this signal is not monitored, each
pulse has a direct effect on the internal clock.
Synchronization The Synchronization Offset (Offset to time signal) setting allows correlation of the
Offset time signal received from the radio clock to local time (time zone). The maximum set-
table offset is 23 h 59 min = 1439 min.
Annunciation Due The tolerance time (Error Time / Fault indication after) for time synchronization fault
to Missing Syn- indicates how long cyclical synchronization may be absent until an alarm is given.
chronization
External or internal synchronization normally occurs every minute. (An exception is
synchronization using a pulse via binary inputs because the signals may arrive several
minutes apart.) The setting for the tolerance time must, therefore, always be at least
two minutes. Under poor radio clock reception conditions, the user may delay the trig-
ger of the fault status condition even longer.
Changing the Syn- When changing synchronization mode, the hardware will re-synchronize to the new
chronization Mode source within one second. This causes breakdown of cyclical synchronization, and the
internal clock will be disrupted as at startup until the new synchronization source
takes over.
After modification to the synchronization offset in the time signal/operating mode, or
when changing year in IRIG B, the cyclical synchronization is not lost, but there is a
jump. To call attention to this, the time value causing a jump is reported with Time
interruption ON without the synchronization offset, and subsequently with Time
interruption OFF with the synchronization offset.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Operating Messag- After the Time interruption ON message, the user must take into account that the
es from the Timing clock will jump. This message is issued under the following circumstances:
System
If a synchronization interruption lasts longer than the tolerance interval mentioned
above, or - as mentioned above - if the operating mode is changed;
If a time jump is anticipated. The message is shown with the time before the jump.
The message Time interruption OFF is triggered:
When the synchronization is re-established (e.g., after a break in reception by the
radio clock);
Directly after a time jump. This message is shown with the time after the jump, thus
allowing determination of the jump interval.
The message DayLightSavTime ONsignalizes that a changeover to the DayLight-
SavTime here Mid-European DayLightSavTime) has been executed with the last syn-
chronization and that the received time value includes the Summertime bit. This Day-
LightSavTime bit is also displayed in the clock time status (see Section 7.2.1). The
time value of this message and of the following messages includes the time delay with
regard to the normal time (Mid-European time) caused by the changeover.
The message DayLightSavTime OFF indicates that the last synchronization caused
a reset from DayLightSavTime to Normal time and that the DayLightSavTime is
over. This message and the following messages include the time delay with regard to
the DayLightSavTime caused by the time reset.
Note:
The changeover from and to the DayLightSavTime is only executed due to an external
synchronization which delivers a DayLightSavTime bit according to its standard and
executes a time changeover.
Time Format The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the
US format (MM/DD/YYYY).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.11 Configuring metered values
As an example, an energy metering can be performed by means of metered values.

The 6MD663/6MD664 device integrates the calculated powers over the time and
makes available the results in the Energy meter measured-value list. The compo-
nents according to Table 5-12 can be retrieved. The signs (positive = output, negative
= input) are defined as for the powers.
Be aware that the precision of the measuring transducers depends on the precision of
the measuring transducers and on the device tolerances. The metering is therefore
only suitable for the operation-internal metering, but not for a metering for invoicing.
The meters can be (re)set to zero or to any other start value (see Section 7.1.2.2).
Table 5-12 Operational metered values
Measured Values Useful dimensions

Wp+ Active power, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp Active power, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive power, output kVARh, MVARh, GVARh
Wq Reactive power, input kVARh, MVARh, GVARh
In the configuration matrix, the following information types can be routed to a metered-
value window:
q Metered value of measured value
q Pulse metered value
5.11.1 Using pulse metered value
Inserting a pulse In an example, the active power of a three-phase system shall be integrated over the
metered value time and displayed as metered value. The pulse output of an external device deliver-
ing pulses in relation to the active power must be set on a binary input of the bay con-
trol device. The power which corresponds to a pulse must be known.
Open the device configuration matrix and select the information type
Measured and Metered Values only.
Create the Energy group in the configuration matrix.
Open the information catalog and select at Metered Values Pulse Metered Val-
ues the line Pulse Metered Value (PMV).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi575.gif
Figure 5-87 ISelecting the pulse metered value information type
Use the left mouse button to draw the selected information type into the Energy
group of the configuration matrix.
Routing pulse me- In the configuration matrix, route the inserted pulse metered value to a binary input
tered value as source.
In the configuration matrix, route the inserted pulse metered value to the destination
Metered Value Window.
Setting pulse me- The properties of the pulse metered values can be set via a dialog.
tered value
In the configuration matrix, right-click the information PulseMV in the Information,
Display text column.
Select from the Properties... context menu. The object properties dialog box
opens.
Select the Measured-value description tab and enter the dimension kWh and the
desired number of decimal places.
In the Conversion factor input box, enter the value which, multiplied with the en-
ergy per pulse, corresponds to the entered dimension (e.g. 0.1, if a pulse corre-
sponds to 0.1 kWh and the dimension kWh was selected above).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi576.gif
Figure 5-88 Object properties dialog box, Measured value description tab
Select the Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab and enter the restorage
mode and the energy flow direction.
Select the Cyclic option if the metered value shall be transmitted to the control center
in cyclic intervals. Otherwise, select None. Activate the Set button to access the Set-
tings dialog of the corresponding time interval. One minute is the presetting.
Note:
The settings performed in this dialog box at the Cyclic restore tab are
generally valid for all metered values.
Select one of the two options at Energy flow direction to determine if the metered value
shall sum up the quantity of energy input or output.
digsi577.gif
Figure 5-89 Dialog box Object properties,

Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab
Select the Pulse type and error input tab and perform the corresponding settings.
Select the option Wiping pulse / S0, if the rising edge of an individual pulse shall en-
hance the metered value by one. However, you select the option Double current
pulse if the rising and falling edge of a double current pulse shall be enhanced by one.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
As soon as you route the pulse metered value to a binary input, the next-higher binary
input can be routed as fault input. A metering can be marked as faulty by means of a
signal at this fault input. If you want to use this procedure, check the Use fault input
box. If it is not marked, the binary input following the metered pulse input is available
to another application.
digsi578.gif
Figure 5-90 Dialog box Object properties, Pulse type and error input tab
Accept the settings with OK.
5.11.2 Using measured value metered value
Inserting metered In the following example, the active power of a three-phase system shall be integrated
value of measured over the time and displayed as metered value. A measuring transducer packet
value MU3P_1 is used for this purpose. It must be marked as Enabled in the functional
scope of the bay control device. It is parameterized with the Transformer nominal
voltage U, secondary 100,00 V and the Transformer nominal current I, secondary
1 A. The nominal data of the network are 110 kV and 20 kA.
Open the device configuration matrix and select the information type
Measured and metered values only.
Open the information catalog. At PowerMeter Power Meter, select the line Pow-
erMeter (MVMV).
digsi580.gif
Figure 5-91 Selecting metered value of measured value information type

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Draw the selected information type with the left mouse button into the MU3P_1
group of the configuration matrix.
Configuring me- In the configuration matrix, route the inserted information to the source Measured
tered value of mea- value and select 3P1_P from the list.
sured value
In the configuration matrix, route the inserted information to the destination
Metered value window.
Setting metered Parameterize the properties of the metered values of measured values via a dialog.
value of measured
In the configuration matrix, right-click in the Information, Display text column the
value
information MeasMV.
opens.
Select the Measured value description tab and enter MWh as dimension and 2
as number of decimal places.
Use the conversion factor to convert the input signal for the selected dimension and
the data of the measuring transducer. For measured values, the conversion always
relates to the 100% value of the input signal. If, for example, a measuring transducer
packet for a 100% value of the currents and voltages delivers a power of 3811 MW,
this is the energy value in MWh of one hour. This value divided by 60.000 must be en-
tered as conversion factor.
The bay control device generates internally 60.000 values per hour, which is consid-
ered by the conversion factor.
In the Conversion factor input box, enter the calculated value 0.0635 (3811 MW
divided by 60.000).
digsi586.gif
Figure 5-92 Dialog box Object properties,

Select the Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab and enter the restorage
mode and the energy flow direction.
Select the Cyclic option if the metered value shall be transmitted to the control center
in cyclic intervals. Otherwise, select the option None. Actuate the Set button to access
the dialog for setting the corresponding time interval. One minute is the presetting.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Note:
The settings performed in this dialog box at the Cyclic restore tab are
globally valid for all metered values.
Select one of the two options at energy flow direction to specify if the metered value
shall sum up the energy input or the energy output.
digsi581.gif
Figure 5-93 Object properties dialog box,

Accept your settings with OK.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
5.12 Configuring limit values (LV)
Limit values can be used to indicate that a measured value exceeds or falls below a
measured value.
Inserting limit val- In the example below, it shall be signalled that a room temperature value was exceed-
ues ed. The temperature sensor shall reflect the temperature range from 0 C to 100 C
with a current of 0 mA to 20 mA. A message shall be displayed as soon as a room
temperature value of 50 C is exceeded. The temperature sensor is set to measuring
transducer MU1.
Open the device configuration matrix and select the information type Measured
and limit values only.
Open the information catalog and select at Measurement Set point (LVU) the
line Set point (LVU).
digsi582.gif
Figure 5-94 Selecting limit value information type
Draw the selected information type with the left mouse button in the group Mea-
surement of the configuration matrix and rename its display text to Temp LV.
Inserting operation- Add an Operating value into the measured-value group and rename its display text
al measured value to Temperature.
Routing measured The measured value Temp LV is automatically routed to the destination Measured-
values value window.
Route it additionally to CFC (C) as destination.
Route the operational measured value Temperature with the setting UserMV to the
destination Measured-value window.
Route the operational measured value Temperature to CFC (C) as source and
destination.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Setting limit value The properties of the limit values can be set by means of a dialog.
In the configuration matrix, right-click in the Information, Display text column the
input Temp LV.
Select from the Properties.. context menu. The object properties dialog box opens.
Select the Measured value description tab and enter the C dimension, the con-
version factor 50 and 2 as number of decimal places.
digsi583.gif
Select the Default selection tab and perform the settings mentioned below.
digsi585.gif
Figure 5-96 Dialog box Object properties, Default selection tab
Accept the settings with OK.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Setting operational In the configuration matrix, right-click in the Information, Display text column the
measured value option Temperature.
opens.
Select the Measured value description tab, enter the dimension C, the conver-
sion factor 100 and 2 as number of decimal places.
Use the conversion factor to convert the input signal for the selected dimension and
the data of the measuring transducer. For measured values, the conversion always
relates to the 100% value of the input signal.
digsi587.gif
Inserting a Select the Messages only information type.

message
From the information catalog, insert via Measurement Tagging the message
ON / OFF(IE) into the Measurement group.
For the message, enter the display text TempOver.
Route the message as source to CFC (C) and as destination to the system interface
(S) and the default display (G).
Creating CFC plan Insert a new CFC plan and designate it as Temperature Monitoring.
Add into the CFC plan respectively one module LIVE_ZERO and
UPPER_SETPOINT from the module catalog. The LIVE_ZERO module serves to
forward the measured value of the measuring transducer, in order to display and
compare it.
Connecting Connect the Val input of the LIVE_ZERO module with the Mu1 operand.
modules
Connect the Limit input of the module UPPER_SETPOINT with the operand Temp
LV.
Connect the Val input of the Val input of the module UPPER_SETPOINT with the
output Result of the module LIVE_ZERO.
5-100 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
digsi588.gif
Figure 5-98 Wiring inputs of the modules
Connect the Result output of the module LIVE_ZERO with the operand Tempera-
ture.
Connect the Annunc output of the module UPPER_SETPOINT with the operand
TempOver.
digsi589.gif
Figure 5-99 Wiring outputs of a module
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 5-101

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Configuration
Parameterizing Parameterize the module LIVE_ZERO as described below.

module
digsi590.gif
Figure 5-100 Setting modules

Translate the plan and load the data into the bay control device.
The limit value can be displayed on the device at Measurements in the Limit Values
list and modified (after the password entry).
n
5-102 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions 6
This chapter explains individual functions of the 6MD663 and 6MD664 SIPROTEC
devices. Setting notes are provided with regard to the settings of each function. The
functional settings and messages are provided in a list.
6.1 General 6-2
6.2 Device, General Settings (Device, General) 6-3
6.3 Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) 6-8
6.4 Control Authorization (Cntrl Authority) 6-9
6.5 Control Device (Control Device) 6-11
6.6 Measurement (Measurement) 6-12
6.7 Threshold-Switch (Thresh.-Switch) 6-13
6.8 Measurement U 1.packet (MU U_1) 6-14
6.9 Measurement I 1.packet (MU I_1) 6-15
6.10 Measurement 1phase 1.packet (MU1P_1) 6-16
6.11 Measurement 3phase 1.packet (MU3P_1) 6-18
6.12 Measurement Aron 1.packet (MUAron_1) 6-21
6.13 SYNC Function group 1 (SYNC function 1) 6-23
6.14 Command editing 6-41
6-1
Functions
6.1 General
The devices provide a number of functions whose settings are specified and whose
information, measuring variables and commands are configured via the DIGSI 4
operating program. Some functions (e.g. control authorization and mode) are avail-
able by default, whereas other functions must be added within the framework of con-
figuration (measuring transducers, synchronization).
Specifying The functional scope of the 6MD663/6MD664 devices is adapted when configuring
functional scope the power system features. You can add functions for measuring transducers and
for synchronization. The specification of the functional scope is described in Section
5.1.
Specifying settings The settings of the functions described in this chapter are set via the DIGSI 4 oper-
ating program. To do this, right-click the corresponding function (group) in the con-
figuration matrix and select Properties in the context menu. You can change the
settings in the following dialog window.
Configuring infor- Within the framework of configuration, you assign information created or received by
mation the device to certain physical interfaces (e.g. user-definable logic, CFC). This chap-
ter includes a list of the information of the individual functions, whereas chapter 5.2
describes the configuration of information.
Completing The device is mainly determined by user-defined information objects. These user-
information defined information objects are copied from the information catalog into the DIGSI 4
configuration matrix and then configured and/or processed via CFC.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.2 Device, General Settings (Device, General)
6.2.1 Mode of operation
The 6MD663/6MD664 devices are equipped with an illuminated LC display for dis-
playing process and device information. The display illumination is usually switched
off.
Proceed as follows to control information:

q via an operator action,
- ON, on actuating any key on the operator control panel or
- OFF after 10 minutes if no further operator input follows.
q via the binary input >Light on (if configured correspondingly),
- ON, if >Light on ON or,
- OFF, after the time set at T LIGHT ON.
To execute control operations via DIGSI 4, connect your PC with the device. You
may either connect it on site either via the operating serial interface (PC port) of the
SIPROTEC 4 device or via modem and/or star coupler to the service interface. The
service interface is optional. If existing, it is located on the device rear panel. It is
designed as a RS232/RS485 serial interface or as an optical interface.
6.2.2 Setting Notes
T Backlight on The Hold time of the display lighting (on triggering via a signaling contact) can be
set in this range. A value is preselected. This value is always valid for the automatic
illumination switch-off after an operator action.
DIGSI backplane The setting is automatically derived from the MLFB number set (12th functional inter-
face). The interface should be bypassed only in exceptional cases.
The following paragraphs describes the information of the device group (information
overview table).
Device ready for Message: The device is ready for operation.

operation The life contact is switched ON and the error LED is switched OFF with this mes-
sage.
Value: ON

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Reset device Message: The device has executed a reset.

Special communication message: It is announced on the Profibus that the SIPRO-
TEC-VD has started the PD service (only the logged on partner).
Value: ON
Initial start Message: The device has executed an initial start. All buffers were deleted.
(Complementary information for startup message)
Value: ON
Resume Message: The device has executed a resume. All buffers are preserved.
(Complementary information for startup message)
Value: ON
Reset LED Tagging command for acknowledging the LEDs of SICAM or DIGSI.
Value: ON
>Light on Display ON/OFF via binary input.

The basic feature of the device, i.e. displaying with retention time via setting, is over-
written in this way.
Value: ON/OFF
Chatter Central chatter suppression.

suppression This message indicates if the chatter suppression responded during a binary mes-
sage subject to the chatter processing.
Value: ON, the chatter suppression responded for at least one object.
Value: OFF, the chatter check was successful for the last object.
Error power Message: The power supply unit is faulty.

supply unit Value: ON
Fail battery Message: The battery is faulty.

Value: ON
DataStop Transmission blocking for messages, metered and measured values.

During the transmission blocking, all information is marked with the transmission
blocking bit in monitoring direction. The actual blocking function is executed in the
central station.
Value: ON/OFF
Test mode This operating mode is switched on for checking the device during commissioning or
during maintenance. During the test mode, all information is tagged with the UBF test
bit in monitoring direction. This procedure serves to avoid that events caused by the
test mode initiate unwanted reactions (horn, derived commands and messages, etc.)
in higher-level system components (DIGSI or SICAM). This operating mode can be
switched ON and OFF via DIGSI 4 by means of a tagging command.
Value: ON/OFF

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
HWTestMod Hardware test mode

DIGSI 4 switches ON this operating mode if the user activates in the commissioning
mode e.g. the functions Set binary input, Set output relay, Set messages. DIGSI 4
switches OFF the hardware test mode when leaving the commissioning area.
After the switch-off command, the "Hardware test mode OFF" message is output and
an initial device startup is initiated after a period of 5 seconds.
Value: ON/OFF
>Time synchro- Input for external minute pulse.

nous Value (fleeting): ON
Clock Sync Acknowledgement of a clock synchronization

Value (fleeting): ON
Clock fault Message: Clock synchronization disturbed

Value: ON, the synchronization event misses after the set tolerance time.
Value: OFF, a synchronization event has arrived again.
DayLightSav Time Message: daylight saving time changeover.

Value: ON, a time synchronization task with daylight saving time was captured by
the date-clock processing function.
Value: OFF, a time synchronization time was captured without daylight saving time.
Loading settings Message informing that a settings procedure runs.

Value: ON, the function was assigned for parameterization.
Value: OFF, the function was released again.
Settings check Message that the device operates with new parameters which are not yet saved (on-
line parameterization).
Value: ON, the test has started.
Value: OFF, the test is completed, i.e. the device either operates again or the new
settings were saved or no settings test is running.
Level-2 Param. The message is transmitted as ON as soon as the parameter set loaded via DIGSI
4 was changed via an on-line parameterization and the device operates with these
new settings.
The message is OFF as long as the parameter set loaded via DIGSI 4 was not
changed or it is transmitted again as ON if a parameter set was loaded completely
new and if the device operates with these settings.
The information value of the message (ON/OFF) is preserved during an initial and a
resume.
Value: ON, settings changes online on the device or via settings command.
Value: OFF, settings set reloaded completely.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Settings local Message that the local operation setting was cancelled.
This message is reserved for DIGSI 4.
Error Board1 Message: The BG1 module either does not exist or is defective.
Value: ON
6.2.3 Settings overview
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

401 T Backlight on 1..60 min 10 min Time Backlight on
402 DIGSI backplane Disabled Disabled Service port for DIGSI

Port C
Port D
6.2.4 Information overview
F.No. Alarm Comments

51 Device OK Device is Operational and Protecting
55 Reset Device Reset Device
56 Initial Start Initial Start of Device
67 Resume Resume
60 Reset LED Reset LED
>Light on >Back Light on
125 Chatter ON Chatter ON
147 Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply
177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
DataStop Stop data transmission
Test mode Test mode
HWTestMod Hardware Test Mode
3 >Time Synch >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
SynchClock Clock Synchronization
68 Clock SyncError Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime Daylight Saving Time
70 Settings Calc. Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check Settings Check
72 Level-2 change Level-2 change

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

73 Local change Local setting change
183 Error Board 1 Error Board 1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.3 Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1)
For operation, the device requires the rated frequency of the network. The default
value must only be changed if the network of the application field has another rated
frequency.
6.3.2 Setting Notes
Rated Frequency The Rated frequency of the network in which the device operates is set at address
214. A default value is preset.

214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.4 Control Authorization (Cntrl Authority)
The 6MD663/6MD664 SIPROTEC are equipped with two key switches. These key
switches are pre-configured to the control authorization and control mode informa-
tion objects via the CFC plan key switches. In addition to this, the control authori-
zation or the control mode can also be set via a remote command or via an individual
derivation.
The upper key switch specifies the control authorization. In case of a horizontal
key position (local), the local control is admitted via the device user interface. With a
vertical key position, (remote) the remote control is admitted.
For safety reasons, the control authorization can only be modified on site via the
operator control panel of the device, but not via DIGSI 4.
To be able to switch via DIGSI 4, the control authorization must be set to REMOTE
on the device or the control authorization test condition for remote control must not
be set active. The control authorization is handed over to DIGSI 4 only upon calling
the control window.
The control mode can be changed during operation to enable, for example,
unlocked control during the commissioning phase.
The lower key switch determines the control mode. unlocked control is enabled in
case of a horizontal key position (Interlocking OFF), whereas for a vertical key posi-
tion (Normal), only interlocked switching is enabled.
The keyswitch for locked / unlocked switching cannot be removed in the Interlock-
ing OFF position for safety reasons.
Each modification of the keylock positions is recorded.
If there is no keyswitch (device without operating unit), the following values are set.
Switching authority / switching mode is derived via the CFC.
Table 6-1 Settings if no keyswitch is available
Function / Information Explanation

Switching authority Remote switching mode
Switch. mode local Locked

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

KeySwitch1 Key Switch 1 (Local/Remote)
Cntrl Auth Control Authority
KeySwitch2 Key Switch 2 (Interlocking OFF/ON)
ModeLOCAL Control mode LOCAL
ModeREMOTE Control mode REMOTE

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.5 Control Device (Control Device)
Circuit breakers, isolators and grounding electrodes are possible control devices
(switching objects).
A command processing is integrated into the 6MD663/6MD664 control devices. It
serves for initiating switching actions in the power system. Switching systems with
single or double busbar are supported. The number of operating equipment compo-
nents to be controlled is only limited by the number of existing binary inputs or out-
puts. This ensures high security against inadvertent wrong switching through
interlocking checks and a high variance with regard to switching device types and
operating modes.
If a switching command is rejected because an interlocking condition is not com-
pleted, the operator response informing about the reason of the rejection is dis-
played on screen. To enable another device operator action, this message must first
be acknowledged with ENTER.

Q0 circuit breaker Q0
Q0 circuit breaker Q0
Q1 bus disconnector Q1
Q8 earthing isolator Q8
Q8 earthing isolator Q8
Q9 feeder disconnector Q9
Q9 feeder disconnector Q9

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.6 Measurement (Measurement)
In the measured-value group, you can compose user-defined measured values for
your individual application. The two measuring transducer inputs (+-20 mA) con-
tained in the device are already specified in the default setting. These measuring
transducer inputs are non-linearized values which can be converted via DIGSI-CFC
to measured values such as pressure or temperature.
Add the derived measured values from the information catalog.

996 Td1= Transducer 1
997 Td2= Transducer 2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.7 Threshold-Switch (Thresh.-Switch)
The threshold value procedure consists of the transmission threshold settings dialog
and the threshold value switch.
Transmission The transmission threshold determines the transmission frequency of measured

threshold values. It is indicated in per cent. If a zero threshold value is selected for the trans-
mission threshold, each measured value is transmitted to the higher-level station.
With a non-zero threshold value, all changes of new measured values are added to
the last transmitted measured value. If the sum of the changes reaches the set per-
cent value, a new measured value is transmitted by the next possible time. Perform
the settings in the DIGSI 4 configuration matrix. The dialog box including the trans-
mission threshold tab is part of the object properties of each measured value. Central
threshold, Set threshold and Switching object can be set here.
q Use central threshold (10%): Check this box to use the 10% default threshold
value. All other input and selection options of this tab are deactivated in this way.
q Set threshold: Set the desired value in this rotating box. The set value multiplied
by 0,1% is the threshold value.
q Switching object: A changeover from the central and the parameterized threshold
can be initiated by the status of a message. From the drop-down menu, select the
message whose status shall initiate a changeover.
Threshold switch The group Threshold-Switch (Thresh.-Switch) (in the DIGSI 4 configuration matrix)
contains all potential switching objects. Threshold 1 is the preselected value. You
can add additional thresholds (single messages) from the information catalog.
Via the switching object setting in the measured-value object properties, assign the
threshold value switch to one or several measured values.

ThreshVal1 Threshold Value 1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.8 Measurement U 1.packet (MU U_1)
This packet serves to measure an individual voltage. The measuring result of the
voltage is the r.m.s. value of the fundamental component.
The frequency of the voltage is determined from the input signal. If the secondary
input voltage on the device is lower than 10 Veff, the frequency is marked as invalid.
The overflow occurs when the secondary input voltage on the device exceeds 120
Veff. The rated value of the frequency is accepted from the power system data (see
power system data section).
The setting is performed via the DIGSI 4 operating program in the menu
Settings Masking I/O MU U_1. Here, the voltage channel is assigned to the
measuring input. The information on the secondary transformer voltage is entered in
the properties box which is part of the MU U_1 window.
The measuring results are also configured in the menu Settings Masking I/O
MU U_1.
6.8.2 Setting Notes
SecVoltgNomVal The secondary, voltage nominal value can be specified in the predefined range. A
value is preselected.

0 SecVoltgNomVal 0.00..200.00 V 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal
Value

Input U/I Voltage or Current Input U/I
U Voltage U
f Frequency

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.9 Measurement I 1.packet (MU I_1)
This packet serves to measure an individual current. The measuring result of the cur-
rent is the r.m.s. of the fundamental component.
The frequency of the current is determined from the input signal. If it falls below 10%
of the nominal value, the frequency is marked as invalid. The nominal value of the
frequency is accepted from the power system data (see Power system data section).
Perform the settings via the following path of the DIGSI 4 operating program: Set-
tings Masking I/O MU U_1. The channel of the current is assigned to the mea-
suring input. The information regarding the secondary transformer current is entered
into the properties box of the MU I_1 window.
The measuring results are also configured via the path: Settings Masking I/O
MU U_1.
6.9.2 Setting Notes
SecCurrNomVal The secondary current nominal value can be specified in the predefined area. A

0 SecCurrNomVal 0.00..5.00 A 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal
Value

MwCh_I Current Input I
I Current I
f Frequency

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.10 Measurement 1phase 1.packet (MU1P_1)
This packet serves to perform a monophase measurement (current and voltage).

The phase current is set to the current input of the measuring transducer, whereas
the phase voltage is set to the voltage input. The r.m.s. values calculated from these
two input signals as well as the linked variables active power, reactive power, appar-
ent power, cos , sin , and the frequency calculated from the voltage are located
on this input (see information overview table).
The measuring results of the phase current and the phase voltage are r.m.s. values
of the corresponding fundamental component.
The frequency is determined from the applied phase voltage. If the secondary input
voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is marked as invalid. An over-
flow occurs if the secondary input voltage one the device exceeds 120 Veff. The nom-
inal value of the frequency is accepted from the power system data (see Power
system data section).
To perform the settings, use the following path in the DIGSI 4 operating program:
Settings Masking I/O MU1P_1 (for 1st packet). Here, the channels of the
phase current and of the phase voltage are assigned to the measuring inputs. The
information regarding the secondary transformer current is entered into the proper-
ties box of the MU1P_1 window. The phase-to-phase voltage is used as the value
for the secondary transformer voltage.
The measuring results are also configured via the path Settings Masking I/O
MU1P_1.
6.10.2 Setting Notes
SecVoltgNomVal The secondary, voltage nominal value can be specified in the predefined range. A
SecCurrNomVal The secondary current nominal value can be set in the predefined range. A value is
preselected.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

Value

Value

1P1Input_U 1P1 Voltage Input U
1P1Input_I 1P1 Current Input I
1P1_U 1P1 Voltage U
1P1_I 1P1 Current I
1P1_P 1P1 Active Power P
1P1_Q 1P1 Reactive Power Q
1P1_S 1P1 Apparent Power S
1P1_ 1P1 Phase Angle Phi
1P1_cos 1P1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi
1P1_sin 1P1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi
1P1_f 1P1 Frequency of U

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.11 Measurement 3phase 1.packet (MU3P_1)
This packet serves to perform a three-phase measurement (current and voltage).

The phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 as well as the phase voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3
are set to the current inputs of the measuring transformer. In this case, the r.m.s. val-
ues of the phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero current
and zero voltage as well as those of the linked variables reachieve power, active
power, apparent power cos , sin , and the frequency calculated from the UL1 volt-
age can be found at the output of the measuring transformer (see table information
overview).
The measuring results of the phase current and the phase voltage are r.m.s. values
of the corresponding fundamental component.
The frequency is determined from the applied phase voltage UL1. If the secondary
input voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is determined from the
phase voltage UL2 or UL3. If all three voltages are too low, the rated frequency is
used as frequency. In this case, the phase-to-phase variables and the frequency are
marked as invalid. The phase-to-phase voltages and the zero variables begin to fluc-
tuate, depending on the deviation from the nominal frequency. The overflow occurs
when the secondary input voltage on the device exceeds 120 Veff. The nominal value
of the frequency is derived from the power system data (see Power system data sec-
tion).
The settings are specified via the following path in the DIGSI 4 operating program:
Settings Masking I/O MU3P_1 (for 1st packet). Here, the channels of the
phase currents and phase voltages are assigned to the measuring inputs. In this
way, the rotating sense can, for example, be changed by changing the phases. The
information regarding the secondary transformer current is entered into the proper-
ties box of the MU3P_1 window. the phase-to-phase voltage is supposed as value
for the secondary transformer voltage.
The measuring results are also configured via the following path: Settings Mask-
ing I/O MU3P_1. First, the user should enter the primary value display factors for
each required output. In this context, it must be observed that the phase-to-phase
value is indicated for the phase-ground voltages if the phase-to-phase voltage (nom-
inal voltage) was set as primary value.
If the zero voltage is applied separately as measuring variable, it is set as individual

MU U_1 voltage in the transformation packet.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
SecVoltgNomVal The secondary, voltage nominal value can be set in the predefined area. A value is
preselected.
SecCurrNomVal The secondary current nominal value can be set in the predefined area. A value is
preselected.

Value

Value

3P1InputU1 3P1 Voltage Input U1
3P1InputI1 3P1 Current Input I1
3P1_U0 3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage
3P1_U1 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U1
3P1_U12 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12
3P1_I0 3P1 Zero Sequence Current
3P1_I1 3P1 Phase Current I1
3P1_P 3P1 Active Power Three Phase

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

3P1_Q 3P1 Reactive Power Three Phase
3P1_S 3P1 Apparent Power Three Phase
3P1_ 3P1 Phase Angle Three Phase
3P1_cos 3P1 Active Power Factor Three Phase
3P1_sin 3P1 Reactive Power Factor Three Phase
3P1_f 3P1 Frequency

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.12 Measurement Aron 1.packet (MUAron_1)
The ARON switching enables the complete calculation of a three-phase system

with only two voltage transformers and two current transformers.
Two phase currents (e.g. IL2 and IL3) as well as two phase-to-phase voltages (e.g.
UL1L2 and UL1L3) are applied on the measuring transducer inputs. In this case, the
r.m.s. values calculated from these four input signals, i.e. the r.m.s. values of the
phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero sequence current
and zero sequence voltage as well as of the combined variables active power, reac-
tive power, apparent power, cos , sin , and the frequency calculated from the
UL1L2 voltage are applied to the measuring transformer output (see information over-
view table).
The measuring results of the phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase volt-
ages, zero sequence current and zero sequence voltage are r.m.s. values of the cor-
responding fundamental compound.
The frequency is determined by means of the applied UL1L2 voltage. If the secondary
input voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is determined by means
of the UL1L3 voltage. If both voltages are too low, the rated frequency is used as fre-
quency. In this case, the combined variables and the frequency itself are marked
invalid. The phase-to-phase voltages and the zero variables start to fluctuate
depending on the deviation from the rated frequency. The nominal value of the fre-
quency is derived from the power system data (see power system data section).
Perform your settings by means of the following path in the DIGSI 4 operating pro-
gram: Settings Masking I/O MUAron_1.
The channels of the currents and voltages are assigned to the measuring inputs.
The measuring results are also configured via the path Settings Masking I/O
MUAron_1. First, the display factors of the primary values should be entered for
each required output.
SecVoltgNomVal The secondary voltage nominal value can be set in the predefined range. A value is
set as default value.
SecCurrNomVal The secondary current nominal value can be set in the predefined range. A value is
set as default value.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

Value

Value

A1Input_U1 A1 Voltage Input U1
A1Input_U2 A1 Voltage Input U2
A1Input_I1 A1 Current Input I1
A1Input_I2 A1 Voltage Input I2
A1_U12 A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12
A1_U13 A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U13
A1_I2 A1 Phase Current I2
A1_I3 A1 Phase Current I3
A1_P A1 Active Power P
A1_Q A1 Reactive Power Q
A1_S A1 Apparent Power S
A1_ A1 Phase Angle Phi
A1_cos A1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi
A1_sin A1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi
A1_f A1 Frequency

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.13 SYNC Function group 1 (SYNC function 1)
General When connecting the circuit breaker, the control device can check if the synchroni-
zation conditions of the two subnetworks are met (synchronization check).
The device distinguishes between synchronous and asynchronous networks and
reacts differently on the connection. In case of synchronous network systems
there are slight differences with regard to the phase relation and the voltage modu-
lus. The circuit breaker operating time does not need to be considered. However, in
case of asynchronous network systems, the difference amounts are higher and
the range of the connection window is scrolled faster. Consequently, the circuit
breaker operating time must be considered in this case. The control command is
automatically pre-dated by this time in order to ensure that the circuit breaker con-
tacts close exactly at the right time.
The automation functions enabled in the control device allows to automatically use
various reference voltages of the active busbar for synchronization (whereby the
individual reference voltage depends on the isolator position).
It is possible to save and hold available for operation maximally eight different setting
groups for the synchronization function. In this way, it is possible to consider the var-
ious features of several circuit breakers.
Functioning The synchronization function is used for connecting two subnetworks in a substation
control system or for operational switch on or on the protection level after a three-
pole short or long interruption. The synchronization function ensures that the con-
nection is only performed if both subnetworks are synchronous to each other or the
deviation is within the defined limits.
The connection is performed if the following conditions are met at the moment of
establishing the galvanic connection:
q Voltage moduli Umin <U< Umax
q Difference of the voltage moduli U< Umax
q Frequencies fmin f fmax
q Difference of the frequencies f < fmax
q Difference of the angles < max

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
For safety reasons, connection is only permitted below the curve shown in the dia-
gram for large differences in frequency and long circuit-breaker operating times.
1 .8
Max. permissible frequency differences

1 .6
1 .4
1 .2
0 .8
0 .6
0 .4
0 .2
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Circuit-breaker operating times in ms
Figure 6-1 Maximum permissible difference in frequency as a function of the circuit-

breaker operating time
Dead Bus and Dead Line connection are special cases as the connection is per-
formed under the following conditions, depending on the individual settings speci-
fied:
q Dead Line Vpp> Vmin and VLINE< Vdead and fmin fpp fmax
q Dead Bus Vpp< Vdead and ULINE> Vmin and fmin fLine fmax
q Dead Line & Dead Bus Vpp< Vdead and VLINE< Vdead
Busbar voltage Vpp and line voltage VLINE are assigned to voltages V1 and V2
depending on how the device is connected.
The connection is performed on an idle busbar, on an idle feeder or on both.
A synchronization comparison with the runtime of the synchronization function can
be executed by means of definitely applied voltages (normal case) or by means of a
voltage application via relay.
The synchronization comparison including an application of the voltage is necessary
e.g. for multiple busbars or in case of a failure of the coupling circuit breaker (backup
switching). Additional preparatory switching operations as well as the selection of the
subsettings group are necessary for applying the voltage at the time of the compar-
ison. The settings must be stored in the control device for each combination of sub-
networks.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
The measuring channels of the reference and feeder voltage must be assigned
depending on the synchronization module.
Voltage application If the voltage application is used, the user must set a switching sequence with the
following components:
q Voltage application
q Synchronization
q Voltage deselection
The voltage application option ensures that a 250 ms delay is considered in the mea-
suring algorithm after the synchronization start. In this way, the measured values can
stabilize.
Field of application The synchronization with internal control and internal synchronization is the standard
internal control, application with 6MD66 control devices. Maximally 8 synchronization modules
internal synchroni- (SYNC functions group 1 to 8) with different settings groups are available.
zation
The assignment of the synchronization-requiring control device to the corresponding
synchronization settings group is performed via the SyncSD setting (control device
to be synchronized).
By the time of the switching operation, the module selection can be controlled
dynamically via the Sync. effective input message. The Sync. effective input mes-
sage can be configured to a binary input, CFC or IGK.
Unsynchronized switching is performed if no synchronization function is effective
(Sync. effective OFF).
In this case, the contact between the control and the synchronization function is per-
formed internally via messages:
q Sync.Meas, measurement only
q Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (release switch-ON)
q Sync. Error (in case of an error)
Field of application The 6MD66 devices also enable the synchronization via an external control and
external control, internal synchronization.
internal synchroni-
To directly connect an external control (e.g. AWE), the setting of the control device
zation
to be synchronized must be set to <low>.
At the time of the switching operation, the module selection can be controlled dynam-
ically via the Sync. effective input message, whereby the Sync. effective input
message can be configured to a binary input, CFC or IGK.
Unsynchronized switching is performed if no synchronization function is effective
(Sync. effective OFF).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
In this case, the contact between the control and the synchronization function is per-
formed internally via messages:
q Sync.Meas. only, on binary input
q Sync.CloseRel, on relay (for outputting the switch-on command)
q Sync.Error, on relay
Subfunctions The synchronization check is composed of the two subfunctions control and syn-
chronization.
q The control function ensures the coordination of the complete command proce-
dure:
- Coordination of the different switching directions

- Standard interlockings such as timeout protection
- Command connection/disconnection of the command relays
- Command logging BF+/-, RM+/- and BFE.
- Feedback to the operator (operator response).
q The synchronization function processes the measuring phase of:
- >SyMeas, measurement start, to

- SyncCloseRel, switching release.
Command process- Depending on the setting and the current process condition, the individual phases of
ing phases with the command processing are executed or skipped or the command processing is
synchronization aborted. When integrating the synchronization procedure into a switching sequence,
check the deselection phases must be processed correspondingly also in case of an abor-
tion.
q Voltage application: The voltage application (applying measured values ate the
time of the switching operation) is optional.
It is, for example, set via a switching sequence in CFC. The corresponding mea-
sured values must be switched to the device analog inputs via relays.
q Selection of the SYNC function group (if necessary): The SYNC function group
selection (selection of a function module with tis settings and messages) is
optional. The selection is only required if several SYNC function modules are
actually switched active.
It is, for example, set via a switching sequence in CFC. The selection is per-
formed by activating the input message >Sync. effective.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
q Switchgear interlocking: This phase provides for the control subfunction. It

serves to execute all switchgear interlocking checks and to state if switching is
permitted or not.
In additon to this, it is checked if maximally one synchronization function (mea-
suring phase) is active.
q Checking start conditions: This phase provides for the control subfunction, It is
checked if switching is to be executed with our without synchronization.
It serves to execute all switchgear interlocking checks and to state if switching is
permitted or not.
In additon to this, it is checked if maximally one synchronization function (mea-
suring phase) is active.
- Control direction:
- Control command = ON: Continue with synchronization check.

- Control command = OFF: Continue with control phase
(no synchronization required).
- Synchronization check:
Checking if the control device concerned shall be switched on synchronized

or evaluation of the number of input messages
>SYNC. effective = ON.
Table 6-2 Start conditions check phase, SYNC function module selection
Number of SYNC Number of input Reaction

function modules messages
including the control >Sync. effective = ON
device to be switched
0 irrelevant Unsynchronized control device,
continue with control phase
>=1 0 Unsynchronized switching, con-
tinue with control phase
>=1 1 Unique assignment,
continue with operating mode
analysis and activated module
>1 >1 Error,
abortion with BF (too many mod-
ules effective)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
- Analysis of the operating mode:
Evaluation of the input messages of the selected module.
Table 6-3 Start conditions check phase, operating mode analysis
Sync. Error Sync.CloseRel Reaction

ON irrelevant Abortion with BF-
OFF ON Switching release,
continue with control phase
OFF OFF Continue with measurement phase,
initiation by: >SyMeasON
q Measuring: This phase executes the synchronization subfunction.
Sync.Meas. Measurement
& Meas.
Annunciation
Sync. Error
Sync.MonTime Exc
&
>Sy dirCO.
& Sync Close Rel
>Sync. blocked
Sync. blocked
Figure 6-2 Input messages and output messages of the synchronization function
This phase is coordinated by means of setting messages:

- >Sy.Meas., measurement start/stop
- >Sy dirCO, direct command output
- >Sync. blocked, blocking switching release

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
The actual measuring procedure with the output messages starts afterwards:
- >SyncCloseRel, switching release (continue with control phase)
- >Sync.Error, synchronization disturbed
- >Sync.blocked, switching releases blocked
- >Sync.MonTimeExc, monitoring time elapsure
Table 6-4 Controlling the measuring phase
Action Measur- Reaction

ing
>Sync.Meas ON and Switching release:
>Sy dirCO = ON and SyncCloseRel
>Sync.blocked = OFF
>Sync. Meas. ON and Start
>Sy dirCO = OFF
>Sync. Meas OFF Stop
Synchronism conditions reached, or Stop Switching release:
>Sy dirCO ON und Sync. CloseRel ON
>Sync.blocked = OFF
Synchronism conditions reached, or Stop
>Sy dirCO ON and
>Sync.blocked = ON
>Sync.blocked = OFF irrelevant Switching releases are given:
Sync.blocked OFF
>Sync.blocked = ON irrelevant Switching releases are
blocked:
Sync.blocked ON
Monitoring time elapsure Stop Message:
T-SYN. DURATION Sync.MonTimeExc ON
Errors (problems in the synchronization Stop Message:
function) Sync.Error ON
A measuring request >Sy Meas ON in the status >Sync.blocked = ON corresponds

to the measuring initiation in the SINAUT LSA.
An abortion of the measuring phase is initiated via >Sy Meas OFF.
q Control: This phase executes the control subfunction.
The command procedure is aborted for:
- Abortion command with AB+

- Monitoring time elapsure T-SYN. DURATION with BF-
- Sync.Error ON, synchronization distrurbed with BF-
The command procedure is started via the following message:
- SyncCloseRel ON, switch release comes with BF+

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
The normal command sequence runs afterwards.
q Deselection of the SYNC function module: The action selection of the SYNC
function module must be terminated. This is also true for an abortion of the com-
mand procedure.
q Voltage deselection: The voltage application action must be terminated. This is

also true for an abortion of the command procedure.
Interfaces The synchronization function of the circuit breakers is incorporated in the firmware
of the SIPROTEC 4 devices.
The following data are relevant for the user as an interface:
- Commands, commands to the circuit breaker or the functioning of the

various control sources.
- Input messages, messages for controlling the synchronization function.
- Output messages, messages on the status of the synchronization function and
messages on criteria impeding switching
- Measured values, calculated measured values of the synchronization function
- Messages, messages on the command procedure (such as CO+/CO-).
- Settings, settings for configuring properties
Commands Table 6-5 Start conditions check phase, operating mode analysis
Designation Description
Command ON/OFF Control command to different control sources.
to SyncSG ON: Control command for switching the control device ON.
(with or without synchronization procedure)
OFF: Control command for switching the control device ON.
(without synchronization procedure)
Command abortion Abortion command, a running command procedure, the synchro-
- to SyncSG, or nization or switching procedure must be aborted.
- to all Abortion of the synchronization procedure is without conditions.
Abortion of the synchronization procedure is only possible for a
command with of the operating mode "impulse, interruptible".

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Input messages The input messages are enabled once per synchronization settings group. For this
reason, they are configured as often as synchronization settings groups are
required.
Table 6-6 Input messages, function modules SYNC function group
Designation Explanation
>Sync. effective Function effective.
Activation and deactivation of a function module. In the "Testing
start conditions" phase, the module SYNC function group is
selected by means of this message.
For selecting a module or for a unique emergency control, a
switching sequence must be set via CFC, e.g. for emergency
control:
- effective ON
- command ON
- effective ON
An emergency control is also initiated via
>Sy dirCO ON, but only if >Sync.blocked OFF.
ON: The module is effective.

OFF: The module is ineffective (unsynchronized switching).
>Sync.blocked Block switching release.
The synchronization functions normally (the measuring function
is executed), but a switching release is prevented. The blocking
of the switching release is signalled via the Sync.blocked output
message.
ON: switching releases are blocked

OFF: switching releases are provided
>Syn dirCO Direct command output
The measuring function is bridged, i.e. a message for
>Sync.blocked ON immediately initiates a switching release.
ON: The measuring function is skipped or stopped with >Sy

Meas ON. The switching release is provided.
OFF: The measuring function is started with >Sy Meas ON.
>Sy Meas Start/Stop of the (measuring) synchronization function.
ON: The synchronization function is started.

OFF: The synchronization function is aborted.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
>Sync. U1>U2< Switch test U2 dead on / off.
INC: Connection occurs even if voltage U2 is missing.
(The threshold value for dead line or busbar can be parameter-
ized.)
>Sync. U1<U2> Switch test U1 dead on / off:
INC: Connection occurs even if voltage U1 is missing.
ized.)
>Sync. U1<U2< Swtich test U1 & U2 dead on / off.
INC: Connection occurs even if voltages U1 and U2 are missing.
ized.)
The input measuring channels describe a measured-value channel and can be con-
figured directly on an analog input in the matrix.
Table 6-7 Input measuring channels function modules FB_SYNC
>Sy ChU1 Channel of voltage U1.
>Sy ChU2 Channel of voltage U2.
>Sy ChU11 Channel of phase-ground voltage U11LE.
This value is required for calculating a phase-phase voltage U1.
>Sy ChU12 Channel of phase-ground voltage U12LE.
This value is required for calculating a phase-phase voltage U1.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Output messages Status messages are output from the synchronization function. The status mes-
sages are output in the context of the active FB_SYNC function module.
Table 6-8 Output messages of the synchronization function
Sync.CloseRel Synchronism conditions exist, switching is released.
ON: This immediately leads to a switching command (triggering
of command relays).
Sync.Error Error, problems within the synchronization function
Sync.blocked Blocking by external event
Sync.MonTimeExc Monitoring time elapsed
Sync. synchron The networks meet the synchronism conditions for asynchro-
nous or synchronous networks.
Sync. V1>V2< Condition V2 dead exists.
Sync. V1<V2> Condition V1 dead exists.
Sync. V1<V2< Condition V1 & V2 dead exists.
Sync. Vdiff> The difference voltage amount is greater than the setting.
The corresponding SVK_Udiff measured-value message is
transmitted additionally.
Sync. fdiff> The difference voltage amount is greater than the setting.
The corresponding SVK_Fdiff measured-value message is
Sync. Alphadiff> The amount of the difference angle is greater than the setting.
The corresponding SVK_Fdiff measured-value message is
transmitted additionally, provided that the Fdiff < FdiffSyn condi-
tion is met.
Sync. f1>> The f1 frequency is greater than the fmax setting.
The corresponding SVK_F1 measured-value message is trans-
mitted additionally.
Sync. f1<< The f1 frequency is smaller than the fmin setting.
Sync. f2>> The f2 frequency is smaller than the fmax setting.
Sync. f2<< The f2 frequency is smaller than the fmin setting.
Sync. V1>> The V1 voltage is greater than the Umax setting.
The corresponding SVK_Usyn1 measured-value message is

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Sync. V1<< The V1 voltage is smaller than the Umin setting.
The corresponding SVK_Usyn1 measured value message is
transmitted additionally, provided that Dead Bus is not switched
on or that no Dead Bus voltage was set.
Sync. V2>> The V2 voltage is greater than the Umax setting.
Sync. V2<< The V2 voltage is smaller than the Umin setting.
transmitted additionally, provided that Dead Line is not switched
on or that no Dead Line voltage was set.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Output messages The measured values are calculated by the measuring function and made available
for display or further processing (e.g. for limit-value determination in CFC).
It is determined by means of configuration if a measured value is enabled or dis-
abled.
The measured values are calculated for each function module SYNC function group.
The storage is performed independent of the information objects.
Table 6-9 Synchronization measured values
Sync. V1 Synchronization voltage V1 is also the reference voltage
Sync. V2 Synchronization voltage V2 is also the feeder voltage
Sync. Vdiff Difference of the synchronization voltages U1 and U2.
Sync. Alpha Angle between the voltages V1 and V2.
Sync. f1 Frequency of the synchronization voltage V1.
Sync. f2 Frequency of the synchronization voltage V2.
Sync. fdiff Frequency difference between f(V1) and f(V2).
T-CB close The Circuit breaker closing (operating) time indicates the runtime of the circuit
breaker including all relay and contactor pickup times. It can be specified in the pre-
defined range. A value is set as default value.
Balancing U1/U2 The Factor U1/U2 ... can be set in the predefined range. A value is set as default
value.
Tr. U1-U2 The Angle adjustment .... The phase angle can be set in the predefined range. A
value is set as default value.
SecTransNomVal1 Here, the Secondary transformer nominal value V1 of the measured-value input
for the relevant reference voltage must be set on the input/output boards. In this con-
text, it must be observed that, in case of a measuring voltage application, transform-
ers with the same transformation ratio and the same connection must be used for all
connectable voltages. The voltage can be set in the predefined range. A value is set
as default value.
SecTransNomVal2 Here, the Secondary transformer nominal value V2 of the measured-value input
for the relevant reference voltage must be set on the input/output boards. In this con-
text, it must be observed that, in case of a measuring voltage application, transform-

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
ers with the same transformation ratio and the same connection must be used for all
connectable voltages. The voltage can be set in the predefined range. A value is set
as default value.
SyncSD Synchronizable control device. The synchronization function can be used for con-
trolling an internal or external command procedure. In case of an internal command
processing, a connection to the control device to be synchronized is established at
the parameter SyncSG. The command is initiated via a control command to the con-
trol device, e.g. from the control display. In case of an external command processing,
the parameter is "empty".
Umin The Minimum voltage for synchronization V min indicates the voltage value from
which onwards a connection is permissible. It can be specified in the predefined
range. A default value is preset.
Umax The Maximum voltage for synchronization Vmax indicates the voltage value up to
which a connection is still permissible. It can be specified in the predefined range. A
default value is preset.
Udead The Voltage threshold indicates the voltage maximum up to which a line or busbar
is detected as dead. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is
preset.
Sync.U1>U2< This parameter serves to specify if a connection shall take place in case of a healthy
busbar and a dead line or dead generator (Dead Line). The default setting is NO.
Sync.U1<U2> This parameter serves to specify if a connection shall take place in case of a dead
busbar and a healthy line (Dead Bus). The default setting is NO.
Sync.U1<U2< This parameter serves to specify if a connection shall take place in case of a dead
busbar and a dead line (Dead Line and Dead Bus). The default setting is NO.
T-SYN. DURATION The maximum duration of synchronism check must be set here. If the connection
cannot be established successfully within this period, the synchronization procedure
is aborted. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset.
fmin This parameter defines the minimum of the frequency range in which the synchro-
nous connection is permissible. The working range of the measuring procedures is
not influenced by this parameter. The lower limit of the frequency working range
must be lower than its upper limit. It can be specified in the predefined range. A
default value is preset.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
fmax This parameter defines the maximum of the frequency range in which the syn-
chronous connection is permissible. The working range of the measuring procedures
is not influenced. The upper limit of the frequency working range must be higher than
its lower limit. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset.
UdiffAsyn This parameter indicates the maximum voltage difference of the amounts of Vsyn1
and Vsyn2 for asynchronous conditions. It can be specified in the predefined
fdiff This parameter indicates the maximum frequency difference up to which a con-
nection is permissible for asynchronous systems. It can be specified in the pre-
defined range. A default value is preset.
f SYNCHRON This parameter indicates the maximum frequency difference up to which a connec-
tion is permissible for synchronous systems. It can be specified in the predefined
UdiffSyn This parameter indicates the maximum voltage difference of the amounts of Vsyn1
and Vsyn2 for synchronous conditions. It can be specified in the predefined range.
A default value is preset.
diff This parameter indicates the maximum angle difference between the voltages of
the subsystems, for which the connection is performed. It becomes effective if the
frequency difference of the subsystems Df <= FdiffSyn is valid. The angle can be
specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset.
T SYNCHRON This parameter indicates the Switch delay time for synchronous systems. This is
the minimum period during which Udiff (maximum permissible voltage difference)
and fdiff (maximum permissible frequency difference) must remain in the parameter-
ized range until the control command is initiated. If a value leaves the parameterized
range, the time counter is reset. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default
value is preset.
Note:
To obtain a stable connection range, the measured values have a hysteresis:
- 10 % or 1 V for voltages (the respectively lower value is valid).
- 20 mHz for frequencies
- 1 for angles

C53000-G1876-C102-2
6.13.3 Parameter overview

0 T-CB close 0.01..0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
0 Balancing U1/U2 0.80..1.20 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2
0 Tr. U1-U2 0..360 ; 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo)
0 SecTransNomVal1 0..170 V 100 V Secondary Transformer Nominal

Value 1
0 SecTransNomVal2 0..170 V 100 V Secondary Transformer Nominal

Value 2
0 SyncSD Synchronizable control device
0 Umin 20..125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchroni-

zation
0 Umax 20..140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchroni-

zation
0 Udead 1..60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/

Dead Bus
0 Sync.U1>U2< YES NO Synchronize to U1> and U2<

NO
0 Sync.U1<U2> YES NO Synchronize to U1< and U2>

NO
0 Sync.U1<U2< YES NO Synchronize to U1< and U2<

NO
0 T-SYN. DURATION 1.00..600.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchro-

nism-check
0 fmin 95..105 % 95 % Minimum frequency
0 fmax 95..105 % 105 % Maximum frequency
0 UdiffAsyn 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference,

asynchronous
0 fdiff 0.03..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference,

syn.
0 f SYNCHRON 10..40 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/

Async.
0 UdiffSyn 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference,

synchronous
0 diff 2..60 10 Maximum angle difference, syn.
0 T SYNCHRON 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00 sec Switch Delay for synchronous

systems
6-38
Functions

Sy1 ChU1 Sync1, Voltage input U1
Sy1 ChU2 Sync1, Voltage input U2
>Sy1 eff. >Sync1 effective
>Sy1 block >Sync1 block
>Sy1 dirCO >Sync1 direct Command Output
>Sy1 Meas >Sync1 Measurement only
>Sy1U1>U2< >Sync1 switch to U1> and U2<
>Sy1U1<U2> >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2>
>Sy1U1<U2< >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2<
Sync. CloseRel Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
Sync. Error Synchronization Error
Sync.blocked Sync. blocked
Sync.MonTimeExc Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded
Sync. synchron Sync. Synchron
Sync. U1> U2< Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled
Sync. U1< U2> Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled
Sync. U1< U2< Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled
Sync. Vdiff> Sync. Voltage difference exceeded
Sync. fdiff> Sync. frequency difference exceeded
Sync. diff> Sync.angle difference exceeded
Sync. f1>> Sync. frequency f1 too high
Sync. f1<< Sync. frequency f1 too low
Sync. f2>> Sync. frequency f2 too high
Sync. f2<< Sync. frequency f2 too low
Sync. U1>> Sync. voltage U1 too high
Sync. U1<< Sync. voltage U1 too low
Sync. U2>> Sync. voltage U2 too high
Sync. U2<< Sync. voltage U2 too low
Sync. U1 Sync. voltage U1
Sync. U2 Sync. voltage U2
Sync. Vdiff Sync. voltage difference U1,U2
Sync. Sync. angle between U1,U2
Sync. f1 Sync. frequency f1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions

Sync. f2 Sync. frequency f2
Sync. fdiff Sync. frequency difference f1, f2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.14 Command editing
General The SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 includes a command editing for initiating switch-
ing operations in the system. The control can be executed by different control
sources. The control source is recorded in the Event Log at the moment of the com-
mand output.
Table 6-10 Control sources
Control text Control source

CS = Local Local control via the device operator control panel
CS = SICAM Local control by central controller (e.g. SICAM-SAS)
CS = Remote Remote control by central controller
CS = Auto Automatic command by central controller (e.g. SICAM-CFC)
CS = Auto Device Automatic command in device (e.g. binary input)
CS = Process Process command (only in 6MD665 device)
The command was initiated below the SIPROTEC device on the
process level and output.
CS = DIGSI Control via DIGSI 4
Proceed as follows to display the cause text:

q In DIGSI 4, Online -> Annunciation -> Event Log, Control Source column.
q In the device via the menu -> Annunciation -> Event Log, Footer.
The command editing is adapted to the specific requirements of control systems.
The number of operational equipment components to be controlled is only limited by
the number of enabled binary inputs or outputs. High security against wrong switch-
ing is ensured by interlocking checks. A great variance with regard to control device
types and operating modes is ensured, too.
Operation via inte- Control devices can be controlled via the device operator control panel via:
grated operator
control panel
q the control display or
q the menu Event Log -> Control.
The autonomous keys in different colors are arranged in the operator control panel,
below the graphic display. Press the CTRL key to access directly the control display.
Only in this display, the two control keys and are available for indicating the
control direction.
Use the navigation keys , , , to choose and select the control device to
be actuated. The control direction is determined by pressing the or key.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Optionally, the user can press the ENTER key to open a dialog window in which the var-
ious possibilities (ON, OFF, Cancel) are offered. In this window, the user can perform
his selection via and . Consequently, the switch icon in the control display
flashes in setpoint direction. At the lower display edge, the user is requested to con-
firm his switching operation via the ENTER key. The safety inquiry is displayed. Press
again the ENTER key to initiate the actual switching operation. If this confirmation is not
performed within one minute, the setpoint flashing changes again to the correspond-
ing actual status. Prior to the command release or during the switch selection, an
abortion is possible at any time via the ESC key.
During normal processing, the control display indicates the new actual status after
the control command was executed and the message Command end at the lower
display edge. In case of control commands with feedback, the message RM
reached is displayed for a short time before this.
If the control command is rejected because an interlocking condition was not met,
the operating response is displayed which explains the reason of this rejection (see
also section ). This message must be confirmed via the ENTER key to allow further
operation of the device.
Operation via Control devices can be controlled via the operator control interface by means of the
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 4 operating program installed on a PC.
Operation via sys- Control devices can be controlled via the serial system interface and a connection to
tem interface the substation control system. To do this, it is necessary that the required peripheral
is physically enabled both in the device and in the system. In additon to this, certain
settings must be performed in the device for the serial interface.
Operation via So-called automatic commands can be parameterized in the device for controlling
binary inputs/ control devices due to events at binary inputs, such as external control panels. All
automatic com- events can be linked with each other and configured to a control command. The con-
mands figuration is performed via a CFC plan in the DIGSI 4 operator program. For auto-
matic commands, the interlocking checks can be deactivated separately.
6.14.1 Command types
The following different command types exist with regard to the system control via the
device:
Commands to the These commands include all command directly outputted to the operational equip-
process ment components of the control system and causing a process state change:
q Control commands for controlling circuit breakers (synchronized or unsynchro-
nized), isolators and grounding electrodes,
q Step commands, e.g. for increasing and decreasing transformer steps
q Adjusting commands with parameterized runtime, e.g. for controlling E coils.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Device-internal They do not initiate a direct command output to the process. They serve for initiating
commands internal functions, communicating the detection of status changes to the drive of for
acknowledging them.
q Manual overwriting commands for manually overwriting/updating process-linked
objects such as messages and switching statuses, e.g. in case of a missing tele-
control interface. A manual update procedure is marked in the information status
and can be displayed accordingly.
q Tagging commands (for setting) the information value of internal objects, e.g.
control authority /local/remote), parameter changeovers, transmission interlocks
and deleting/preselecting metered values.
q Acknowledge and reset commands for setting/resetting internal memories or
data stocks.
q Information status commands for setting/deleting the "Information status" addi-
tional information regarding the information value of a process object, such as
capture block or output block.
6.14.2 Sequence in the command path
Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure that a control command can only
be executed when the check of previously specified criteria was terminated posi-
tively. In addition to general, predefined checks, further interlockings can be config-
ured separately for each operating equipment component. The actual execution of
the command task is monitored. The overall command task procedure is described
in brief in the following list:
Checking a Command input, e.g. via integrated operation

command task
q Password check access authorization
q Checking the control mode (locked/unlocked) selecting deactivation flags
Configurable command checks
q Control authorization
q Control direction check (setpoint-actual comparison)
q Switching error protection, bay-specific interlocking (logic via CFC)
q Double-operation blocking (blocking of parallel switching operations)
q Switching error protection, system interlocking (centrally via SICAM)
Fix command checks
q Timeout monitoring (time between command task and processing is monitored)
q Parameterization is running (during running parameterization procedure, the
command is rejected or delayed)
q Operating equipment enabled as output (if an operating equipment component
was configured, but not configured to a binary input)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
q Output blocking (the command is rejected if an output blocking is set related to

objects and active at the moment of command processing)
q Board hardware error
q Command for this operating equipment component already active (for an operat-
ing equipment, only one command can be processed at a time, object-related
double operation blocking)
q 1ofn check (for multiple assignments such as root relays it is checked if a com-
mand procedure was already initiated for the output relays concerned).
Command execu- q Command procedure error by an abortion command

tion monitoring
q Run-time monitoring (feedback monitoring time)
6.14.3 Switching error protection
Switching error protection checks in a SICAM/SIPROTEC system are divided in the

following groups:
System interlocking checked in central controller
Remote interlockings checked in bay device
The system interlocking is based on the process image in the central controller. The
bay interlocking is based on the object image (feedbacks) in the bay device. The
extent of the interlocking checks is specified by means of parameterization. Switch-
ing objects subject to a system interlocking in the central controller are marked cor-
respondingly in the bay device by means of a setting.
For all commands, it can be determined if switching is to be performed locked (nor-
mal) or non-locked (check):
- for local commands via keylock switches or reparameterization with
password inquiry,
- for automatic commands from the command processing via CFC by means
of deactivation flags
- for local/remote command via an additional deactivation command
6.14.3.1 Locked/unlocked control
The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC devices are also called stan-
dard interlocking. These checks can be activated via DIGSI 4 (locked switching/tag-
ging) or deactivated (unlocked).
Locked or unlocked control means that the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Locked control means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within
the framework of the command check. If a condition is not met, the command is
rejected via a message with a minus sign (e.g. BF) and a corresponding operating
response. Table 6-11 illustrates the possible command types to a switching device
as well the corresponding messages.
Table 6-11 Command types and corresponding messages
Command type Command Cause Message

Process output command Switching CO CO+/
Manual overwrite command Manual overwrite MT MT+/
Information status command, input ignored Input ignored IB ST+/
Inform. status command, output disabled Output disabled AS ST+/
Abortion command Abortion AB AB+/
The plus sign as part of a message indicates a command acknowledgement. the

result of the command input is positive, i.e. as expected. Consequently, the minus
sign signifies a negative, not expected result. The command was rejected. The table
indicates possible operating responses together with their causes. As an example,
Figure 6-3 illustrates in the Event Log command and feedback of a positive switching
operation of the circuit breaker.
The interlocking check can be configured separately for all control devices and tag-
gings. Other internal commands, such as manual overwriting or abortion, are not
checked, i.e. they are execute independent of the interlockings.
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.98 11:52:05,625
Q0 ON/OFF BF+ ON
19.06.98 11:52:06,134
Q0 ON/OFF RM+ ON
Figure 6-3 Example of an operational message when switching the Q0 circuit breaker
Standard interlock- The standard interlockings include the following fixed-programmed checks per con-
ing trol device which can be switched ON or OFF via parameters:
(fixed-pro-
Control authorization DIGSI: A control command of a DIGSI connected locally or
grammed)
remotely (command with control source DIGSI) is only admitted if a remote con-
trol was admitted on the device (via keylock switches or parameterization). If a
DIGSIPC logs on the device, it stocks there its Virtual Device Number (VD).
Only commands with this VD (for control authorization = REMOTE) are accepted
by the device. Control commands of the remote control are rejected.
Control authorization LOCAL: A control command of the local control (command
with LOCAL control source) is only admitted if a local control was admitted on the
device (by means of keylock switches or parameterization).
Control authorization REMOTE: A control command of the remote control (com-
mand with REMOTE control source) is only admitted if a remote control was

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
admitted on the device (by means of keylock switches or parameterization).

Switching direction check (Setpoint = Actual): The control command is rejected
and a corresponding message is output if the switch is already in the setpoint
position. If this check mechanism is switched ON, it is valid both for locked and
unlocked switching.
Bay-specific interlocking: Logic links stored in the device and created via CFC.
We distinguish between remote interlockings which can be deactivated and
remote interlockings which cannot be deactivated. Remote interlockings which
cannot be deactivated are considered in any case, also in case of unlocked con-
trol.
Double operation blocking: Parallel switching operations are locked against each
other. Only one switching operation can be executed at a time.
Blocking by protection: This interlocking option enabled for devices with inte-
grated protection functions has no signification and no effect with the 6MD663/
6MD664 device version.
System interlocking (substation controller): For bay command initiation with
- CS = Local control
- CS = Auto device (automatic command), or
- CS = DIGSI (control via DIGSI 4)
The SIPROTEC device sends a release request to the central controller for
checking the system interlocking. Next, the system interlocking is checked in the
central controller in CFC and acknowledged by a release response positive or
negative. The system interlocking check is deactivated as soon as a positive
release response has arrived (AV: n) and all checks are repeated.
The overall request cycle via the central controller is time monitored within the
framework of timeout monitoring. In case of a command initiation outside the bay
(CS = SICAM / remote / Auto) the device parts from the fact that a system inter-
locking check has already taken place and skips the release request.
Figure 6-4 provides an overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the
device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
Command with Control authorization Control mode

control source
ON/OFF
Local
& Local
REMOTE1), LOCAL &
DIGSI
AUTO &
rem. &
Control authorization
(LOCAL/REMOTE)
& DIGSI
Contr.authoriz. DIGSI DIGSI

1
& Remote
Control mode LOCAL unlocked control

(unlocked/locked)
1 switch in position j/n
Control mode &
REMOTE
(unlocked/locked)
locked control
&
1
Switch in position j/n
Subst. Controller j/n 1 Command outpu
on relay
Zone control j/n
Blocking by prot. j/n
Double.oper.blocking
Blocking by protection Cont.auth.LOCALY/N
Release SG ON Cont.auth.REM. Y/N
Release SG OFF
Event
State
1)
Control source REMOTE includes source LOCAL.
LOCAL .... Command via control system in the station
REMOTE Command via telecontrol technology to control system and from control system to device
Figure 6-4 Standard interlockings

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
The screen below illustrates the setting of interlocking conditions via DIGSI 4.
Figure 6-5 DIGSI 4 dialog box - object properties for setting interlocking conditions
The configured interlocking reasons can be read out in the device display. They are
marked by letters whose signification is explained in the following Table 6-12:
Table 6-12 Deactivation IDsI
Deactivation IDs ID Display

(abbrevi.)
Control authorization SV S
Substation controller AV A
Zone control FV F
Switch in position (switch position check) SI I
Blocking by protection SB B
Figure 6-6 illustrates an example of the interlocking conditions for 3 control devices
with the abbreviations provided in Table 6-12. These interlocking conditions can be
read out in the device display. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indi-
cated.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
INTERLOCKING 01/03
--------------------
Q0 ON/OFF S F I B
Q1 ON/OFF S F I B
Q8 ON/OFF S F I B
Figure 6-6 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Release logic via A release logic for the zone control (bay interlocking) can be established via the
CFC CFC. By means of corresponding release conditions, the information is provided
free or bay interlocked (e.g. object Release SG ON and Release SG OFF with
the information values: ON/OFF).
Control authoriza- The "control authorization" interlocking condition exists for selecting the control
tion authority. The command source authorized for controlling can be selected via this
interlocking condition. The following control authorization zones are defined in the
following priority order:
- LOCAL
- DIGSI 4
- REMOTE
The control authorization object serves to interlock or release the local operation
with regard to remote and DIGSI commands. The 6MD663/6MD664 device is
equipped with keylock switches. The upper keylock switch is the control authoriza-
tion switch. The Local position allows local control, whereas the Remote position
allows remote control.
The control authorization DIGSI object serves to interlock or release operation via
DIGSI 4. Both a locally connected DIGSI and a remotely connected DIGSI are con-
sidered in this context. If a DIGSI PC (local or remote) logs on a device, it provides
here its Virtual Device Number VD. Only commands with this VD (for control autho-
rization = OFF or REMOTE) are accepted by the device. The VD is removed when
the DIGSI PC logs off.
Depending on the CS control source and the device configuration, the command
task is checked against the current information value of the control authorization
and control authorization DIGSI objects.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
The following interlocking logic results in detail:
Act. informa- Control authori- Command with Command with Command with CS =
tion value zation DIGSI CS = LOCAL CS = SICAM, CS = DIGSI
control autho- REMOTE or CS = Auto
rization
LOCAL (ON) not logged ON free 2) locked
locked
DIGSI not
locked, as
logged ON
LOCAL control
LOCAL (ON) logged ON free 2) 2)
locked locked
locked, as locked, as
LOCAL control LOCAL control
REMOTE (OFF) not logged ON 1) free locked
locked
DIGSI not
locked, as
logged ON
REMOTE control
REMOTE (OFF) logged ON 1) 2) free
locked locked
locked, as locked, as
DIGSI control DIGSI control
1) if parameterized check control authorization for local commands", otherwise free

2) if parameterized: check control authorization for remote commands, otherwise
free
CS = Control source
CS = Auto device:
Internally derived commands (command derivation in CFC) are not subject to the
control authorization and are consequently always free.
Control mode / The control mode serves to activate or deactivate the configured (removable) inter-
deactivation locking conditions at the time of the switching operation. The local/mode group of the
DIGSI 4 configuration matrix includes the information objects Control mode local
and Control mode remote.
q Control mode local: Commands with local control are deactivated via this infor-
mation object. Depending on the configuration, the locked or unlocked (deacti-
vated) can be set via a keylock switch or via an operator action. With the 6MD663/
6MD664 device, the Normal position of the lower keylock switch enables locked
switching, whereas the Interlocking OFF position enables unlocked switching.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
q Control mode remote: SICAM or DIGSI 4 commands (CS = SICAM, CS =

remote, CS = Auto or CS = DIGSI) are remote deactivated via a global control
mode. A separate task is sent for deactivation. The deactivation is respectively
performed for only one switching action and only for commands with the same
control source. The keylock switch position is irrelevant in this context.
For Automatic command in device (CS = Auto device), the instructions of the CFC
manual must be considered (module: BOOL after command). The deactivation is
performed via deactivation IDs.
Bay The consideration of bay interlockings (e.g. via CFC) includes the control-relevant
interlockings process state interlockings for avoiding wrong switching operations (e.g. isolator
against grounding electrode, grounding electrode only if no voltage applied, etc.) as
well as the use of mechanic interlockings in the switch bay (e.g. HV door open
against switch ON CB).
An interlocking per control device can be configured separately for the switching
direction ON and/or OFF. The release information with the information value control
device is locked or released can be provided in the following ways:
q directly via a single-point information, double-point information, keylock switch or
internal message (tagging), or
q by means of a release logic via CFC.
The current status is inquired for a control command and updated in cyclic intervals.
The assignment is performed via release object ON command/OFF command.
System interlock- System interlocking are considered (configuration via central controller).
ings/substation
controllers
Double operation Parallel switching operations are locked. On arrival of a command, all command
blocking objects subject to the blocking are checked if a command runs for them. During the
command execution, the interlocking is also active for other commands.
Blocking by protec- This interlocking option enabled for devices with integrated protection functions is
tion irrelevant for the 6MD663/6MD664 device version.
Switch position For control commands, it is checked if the control device concerned is already in the
check setpoint status with regard to the feedback (switch in position), i.e. if a circuit breaker
(switch in position) is in the ON status and if it is tried to transmit an ON command, this ON command
is rejected with the operating response switch in position. Control devices in fault
position are not locked by the software.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Functions
6.14.4 Command logging / acknowledgement
During command processing, command and process feedbacks are sent to the mes-
sage processing, independent of the further message configuration and processing.
These messages include a so-called message cause. In case of a corresponding
configuration, these messages are entered into the operational indication log.
Command All messages with the control source = local are converted to a corresponding oper-
acknowledgement ator response and shown in the text box of the display.
to integrated oper-
ating function
Command The messages with the control source = SICAM/Remote/Auto/DIGSI must be sent
acknowledgement to the control source, independent of the configuration (configuration to the serial
to SICAM/Remote/ port).
Auto/DIGSI
In this case, the command is not acknowledged via an operator response like for the
local command, but via the usual command and feedback logging.
Feedback monitor- For all command procedures with feedback, the command processing executes a
ing time monitoring. A monitoring time (command runtime monitoring) is started in par-
allel with the command. This feature checks if the control device has reached the
desired final position within this time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the
feedback arrives. If no feedback is transmitted, the operator response feedback
time elapsed is displayed and the procedure is terminated.
Commands and command feedbacks are also logged in the operational indication
log. The normal termination of a command input is the arrival of the feedback (RM+)
of the control device concerned or, in case of commands without process feedback,
a message after a terminated command output.
In the feedback, the plus sign represents a command acknowledgement. The com-
mand was executed with a positive result, i.e. like expected. The minus sign repre-
sents a negative, not expected result.
Command output/ The command types required for switching control devices ON and OFF or for
relay triggering increasing/decreasing transformer taps are described in chapter 5 within the frame-
work of the description of the configuration.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Control during Operation 7
This chapter describes interaction possibilities with the SIPROTEC 6MD663/
6MD664 device during operation. The information that can be obtained and the pro-
cedure for retrieving the data are discussed. Methods of influencing the device func-
tions during operation and controlling the system using the device are covered.
Detailed knowledge about the device functions is not required at this point. However,
the configuration of the device covered in Chapter 5 especially configuration of the
input and output functions is assumed to have already taken place.
Please note that the examples shown are general and may differ in wording or details
from the device at hand. Also, depending on the model variant, some of the functions
discussed below may not be available.
7.1 Information retrieval 7-2

7.2 Controlling device functions 7-14
7.3 System control 7-23

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Control during Operation
7.1 Information retrieval
General The device makes available plenty of information for retrieval on site or for long-dis-
information tance data transmission:
q Annunciation
q Operational measured and metered values
The following chapters describe this information in detail and explain how to call it,
save it on your PC and acknowledge it.
7.1.1 Annunciations
7.1.1.1 Message output
During operation, messages provide information on the status of measuring data,

power system data and the device itself. In addition to this, they serve to control func-
tional sequences during testing and commissioning.
No password entry is required for calling messages.
The messages generated in the device can reach the user in different ways:
via the LED display on the front cover of the device,
via binary outputs (output relays) or via the device connections,
via the front cover display,
via displays on a PC screen, through the operating serial interface or the service
interface by means of the DIGSI 4 program,
transmission via one of the serial interfaces to a control center
LEDs The green RUN light-emitting diode lights permanently during normal operation
The red ERROR light-emitting diode indicates that the processor system has detect-
ed an error. If this LED lights up during operation, the device is not ready. Chapter 9
provides information on measures to be taken in this case.
The remaining LEDs on the front cover display the messages configured according to
chapter 5. Their individual signification should be indicated on the corresponding la-
belling strip.
If the messages are stored for LEDs, these memories can be deleted with the LED key.
This keys also serves for checking if the LEDs work correctly. All these LEDs must
light up as soon as this key is actuated.
LEDs indicating conditions light up as long as this condition exists. For this reason,
they are not stored, but extinguish as soon as the condition does no more exist. They
are also part of the functional test via LED .

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Output relays Messages configured to the output relays as described in chapter 5 are transmitted by
means of a signaling-circuit voltage. Afterwards, they are normally available in a mes-
sage station. If messages are stored for output relays, their memories can also be re-
set by preesing the LED key.
Operator control Proceed as follows to retrieve messages via the operator control panel:
panel on the front
When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 is dis-
cover
played and the first menu point ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is selected.
All menus and message lists start with a headline. The number in the right upper cor-
ner of the display indicates the number of menu entries or messages following. The
number in front of the slash indicates which of the menu entries or messages is being
selected or displayed (see Figure 7-1, first line respectively).
Use the key to access the $1181&,$7,21 menu illustrated in Figure 7-1. In this
menu, you can reach the message groups by entering the corresponding selection
number or by selecting the desired menu entries using the and keys and con-
tinuing with . They are explained in detail in the following subsections.
0$,10(18

!$QQXQFLDWLRQ!
0HDVXUHPHQW! $1181&,$7,21

!(YHQW/RJ!
6WDWLVWLFV!
Figure 7-1 Selecting messages on the front cover
PCInterfaces A personal computer running the DIGSI 4 program can be connected to the operat-
ing interface on the front of the device to retrieve the messages. A PC can also be con-
nected to the service interface on the back of the device. This connection typically ap-
plies when the PC is hard-wired with several devices, using a data bus (station com-
puter) or modem.
Details about the operation of DIGSI 4 are contained in the DIGSI 4 Device Oper-
ation handbook, order no. E50417-H1100-C097.
If the DIGSI 4 2QOLQH directory is opened with a double-click, the operating func-
tions for the device appear in the navigation window (Figure 7-2). By double clicking
on $QQXQFLDWLRQ, the tree structure expands and shows the individual message
groups. The groups are described in detail below.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-2 Function selection screen in DIGSI 4
System (SCADA) The system interface (if available) is generally hardwired and transfers all device in-
Interface formation to a master station via data cable or optical fibre cable.
Message grouping The messages are grouped as follows:

Event log: messages occurring during device operation, e.g. messages on the de-
vice function status, measuring data, power system data, protocoling control com-
mands, etc.
Warning messages displaying a fault, an alarm or a warning.
Deleting and setting the above-mentioned messages
A complete list of all message and output functions which can be generated in the de-
vice with their maximum functional scope are indicated in Annex B.1 together with the
corresponding information number. This Annex also indicates the possible destination
of each message. If functions are not provided by a device version, the corresponding
messages are, of course, not displayed.
7.1.1.2 Warning messages
The warning messages group contains messages configured in DIGSI 4 to the desti-
nation warning messages and active. A message is active if it has the value AP-
PEARING or ON.
Only the message status is displayed. The length of the warning message list is not
restricted and may even include all configured messages. They are updated in cyclic
intervals. Appearing messages are deleted.
The operation on the device and by means of DIGSI 4 is identical to the operation of
operational messages (see below).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.1.1.3 Event log (operating messages)
Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation
and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological
order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has
been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message.
The annex contains a table indicating and explaining all predefined operating messag-
es. However, only the messages relating to the corresponding case are displayed. In
this context, the display also indicates if the message is only appearing ($33($5,1*
in case of events) or appearing and disappearing (A' in case of conditions).
From the When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 is dis-
Device Front played and the first menu point is selected ($QQXQFLDWLRQV).
Use the key to access the $1181&,$7,216 menu (see Figure 7-1).
Select (YHQW/RJ (already highlighted). The (9(17/2* table is displayed.
If no messages exist, the text /LVWHPSW\ is displayed. Otherwise, the table pro-
vides a chronological list of important events and status changes (see Figure 7-3 as
example). When changing to the menu, the latest message is displayed first. The date
and the time of day of the message are noted in the display line above. The end of the
entries is marked by (QG.
(9(17/2*

5HVHW/('21
Figure 7-3 Example of operational messages on the front panel
The and keys serves to scroll up and down the operational message table.
Press the MENU key to return to the 0$,10(18.
:
From PC with At the Annunciations point (Figure 7-2), double-click to find the settings groups (Fig-
DIGSI 4 ure 7-4 left).
Double-click the desired message group, in this case (YHQW/RJ. The data window
(right window pane) displays a list (Figure 7-4).
Double-click an entry in the list view to display the contents of the corresponding set-
tings group in a sequential window (Figure 7-5).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-4 Event Log window in DIGSI 4
Figure 7-5 Example of operating messages in DIGSI 4
7.1.1.4 Saving and deleting message memories
From the Deleting the message memories of the device is not necessary under normal condi-
Device Front tions as the oldest messages are overwritten automatically by new events if the stor-
age capacity is not sufficient for new messages. Nevertheless, it may be useful to de-
lete messages, e.g. after a commissioning procedure, to ensure that the memories
contain only information on actually interesting messages. The memories must be re-
set separately for the various message groups.
To delete the message memories, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 is displayed
and the first menu point ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is selected.
Use the key to access the $1181&,$7,21 menu (see Figure 7-1).
Next, click to select the 'HOHWH6HW menu point and then use the key to select
the settings group.
Press the key to select the message group whose memories are to be deleted (see
Figure 7-6) and then press ENTER .
Password no. 5 (settings change) is inquired. Enter the password and confirm with
ENTER . The system asks $UH\RXVXUH". Click the preset answer <HV (Figure 7-6).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Confirm with ENTER if the corresponding message group actually is to be deleted. If you
do not want to delete the message memories, click to select the answer 1R and
confirm with ENTER . Before confirming with ENTER , you can switch between <HV and 1R
using the and keys. As an alternative, you can cancel the delete procedure us-
ing the ESC key.
6(75(6(7 Press the associated number key to se-

lect the messages to be erased.
!(YHQW/RJ
!6WDWLVWLFV
Etc
3:3DUDPHWHU&KDQJH" Enter Password No. 5 (for setting change)

ENTER
and confirm with ENTER
Confirm <(6 with the ENTER key and com-

$UH\RXVXUH"
plete the erasing of the selected messag-
!<(612
es, or switch to 12 with the key and
cancel the erasure with the ENTER key.
Figure 7-6 Deleting message memories, example of operational messages on the front
cover
:
From PC with When operating the device with a personal computer, you can save the above-men-
DIGSI 4 tioned messages under DIGSI 4 on the hard disk of your computer before deleting
them in the device. To do this, follow exactly the same steps taken to retrieve the mes-
sages. Instead of double clicking on the message group in the message list to open
the group, select the option )LOH 6DYH in the DIGSI 4 window menu bar.
DIGSI 4 then automatically creates a directory for the messages if one does not
exist and saves the message group in this directory. For details, see the DIGSI 4
Device Operation manual, order no. E50417H1176C097, Section 9.4.
When all of the desired message groups have been saved on the PC, they can be
erased from the device as described above.
Of course, you can erase the saved data from the hard disk of your PC as every file.
7.1.1.5 General interrogation
:
From PC with The general interrogation retrievalbe by means of DIGSI 4 provides the possibility of
DIGSI 4 calling the current status of the SIPROTEC device.
The messages are found by double-clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ(see Figure 7-2),
double-clicking on *HQHUDO,QWHUURJDWLRQThe date and time appear in the
right window pane. Double-click this information to open the general interrogation win-
dow. All of the messages that are defined for a general interrogation are shown along
with the actual values and states.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous annunciation
:
From PC with The spontaneous messages that can be displayed via DIGSI 4 represent the proto-
DIGSI 4 colling of appearing current messages.
Find the message groups by clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ (Figure 7-2).
Double-click the desired message group in the data window, i.e. 6SRQWDQHRXV$Q
QXQFLDWLRQ in our example. The date and time appear in the right pane of the data
window. By double clicking on them, the 6SRQWDQHRXV$QQXQFLDWLRQ window
opens, as shown in the following figure. Each entering message is displayed immedi-
ately, without requiring an update to be waited for or to be initiated.
Figure 7-7 Spontaneous annunciation window in DIGSI 4
7.1.2 Measured values and metered values
Operating measured values and metered values are determined in the background by
the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via
the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI 4, or transferred to a central master
station via the system interface.
No password entry is required to view the measured or metered values. The values
are updated every few seconds.
Most measured values can be displayed in primary quantities, secondary quantities,
and percentages based on nominal values. A precondition for correct display is that
the nominal variables be correctly specified in the system data.
7.1.2.1 Measured values
Retrieving mea- In 6MD663/6MD664, the maximum scope makes available the following measured
sured values values:

C53000-G1876-C102-2
IL1, IL2, IL3, IE: phase currents and ground current, in A or kA primary, in A second-
ary and in % of the device nominal current.
I1, I2: positive-sequence component and negative-sequence component of the cur-
rents, in A or kA primary, in A secondary and in % of the nominal device current.
UL1E, UL2E, UL3E: Voltages, in kV primary, in V secondary and in % of UN/3,
provided that phase-ground voltages are connected.
UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1: Voltages in kV primary, in V secondary and in % of UN.
UE: displacement voltage either measured directly or calculated from 3U0 = (UL1-E
+ UL2-E + UL3-E) in kV primary, in V secondary and in % of UN/3, provided that
phase-ground voltages are connected.
S, P, Q: Apparent, active and reactive power in kW or MW or GW primary, kVA or
MVA or GVA primary, kVAR or MVAR or GVAR primary and in % of S N = 3UN IN.
cos : power factor.
The sign corresponds to the sign of active power.
f: frequency in Hz.
Pressure.
Temperature.
From the With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 appears.
Device Front
Use the key to select the menu item0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of mea-
sured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. See figure 7-8.
0$,10(18

$QQXQFLDWLRQ!
!0HDVXUHPHQW! 0($685(0(17

!2SHUDWLRQSUL
!2SHUDWLRQVHF
Etc.
Figure 7-8 Selection of measured values on the front example
The measured values are grouped as follows:

1 2SHUYDOXHVSULPDU\ Operational measured values, primary.
The measured values are converted from secondary to pri-
mary according to the specified transformer data and the
nominal variables of the device.
2 2SHUDYDOXHVVHFRQG Operational measured values, secondary.
Indicates the values of the measured variables pending im-
mediately on the device terminals.
3 2SHUDWLRQDO3HUFHQWOperational measured values, in per cent of the nominal
variables
The nominal variables are specified by the order designation
and by set nominal data.
4 8VHU'HILQHG Measured values defined by the user during device configu-
ration (see Section 5.2),

C53000-G1876-C102-2
5 (QHUJ\ see Section 7.1.2.2.

6HW3RLQWV
If a measured value is not available, 3 dots are displayed instead of the measured val-
ue. If a value is undetermined (e.g. cos , if no current exists), is displayed. In
case of a measured-value overflow, are displayed.
Use the key to select the measured value group that has the values desired, and
switch to the display of this group with the key. Figure 7-9 shows an example for
the display of operating measured values.
0($685(0(17

!2SHUDWLRQSUL 23(5$7,2135,
!2SHUDWLRQVHF
!,/ $
Etc. !,/ $
Etc.
Figure 7-9 Viewing operating measured values on the front display
Move up and down in the table of measured value groups using the and keys.
Use the key to return to the 0($685(0(17 sub-menu. Use the MENU key to return to
the 0$,10(18.
:
From PC with At the 0HDVXUHPHQW point, double-click the corresponding measured-value group.
DIGSI 4
Figure 7-10 Measured-value window in DIGSI 4 example

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The measured values are grouped as follows:

1 3ULPDU\ Measured values, primary.
The operational measured values are converted from sec-
ondary to primary corresponding the parameterized trans-
former data and the nominal variables of the device.
2 6HFRQGDU\ Measured values, sekundr.
Indicates the operational measured values of the measuring
variables pending immediately on the device terminals.
3 3HUFHQW Operational values, in per cent of the nominal variables.
The nominal variables are specified by the order designation
and by parameterized nominal data.
4 User-defined User-defined measured values are measured values defined
by the user within the framework of device configuration.
5 (QHUJ\ see section 7.1.2.2.
6 6HWSRLQWV0HDVXUHG9DOXH
If a measured value is not available, 5 dots are displayed instead of the measured val-
ue. If a value is undetermined (e.g. , no current), a long dash is displayed.
indicate a measured-value overflow.
Double-click the desired measured-value group, e.g. 3ULPDU\. The following sub-
group is displayed.
Double-click the desired subgroup, e.g. 2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHVSULPDU\.
Double-click an entry in the list view in the right window pane to display the corre-
sponding contents of the measured-value group.
Figure 7-11 Measured-value window in DIGSI 4

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-12 Example of measured values in DIGSI 4
7.1.2.2 Energy meter
Retrieving metered Meters can be parameterized in the 6MD663/6MD664 device, e.g. summarizing active
values and reactive power (:S:T) separately according to the input and output of the active
power or capacitive and inductive reactive power. As a prerequisite, however, this di-
rection must be specified as ahead.
Device Front
Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of mea-
sured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears.
Select the item (QHUJ\ with the key and switch to the table of energy measure-
ments using the key.
Moving up and down in the table of energy measurements is done using the and
keys.
The key can be used to return to the 0($685(0(17 level. Press the MENU key to
return to the 0$,10(18.
:
From PC with The metered value groups can be found under 0HDVXUHPHQW (Figure 7-2) with a
DIGSI 4 double click.
Double click on 2WKHUV, then (QHUJ\.
By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the asso-
ciated contents of the metered group are displayed in another window.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Setting metered In the 6MD663/6MD664 device, meters can be set to certain values or to zero. How-
values (only for ever, this is only possible for pulse metered values.
pulse metered val-
ues)
Device Front
Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of mea-
sured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears.
Select the item (QHUJ\ with the key and switch to the table of energy measure-
ments using the key.
Moving up and down in the table of energy measurements is done using the and
keys.
Press the ENTER key. After entering the correct password, you will now reach the values
to be specified.
Enter the value and then press ENTER .
The key sequence and ENTER serves to confirm the safety inquiry and to save the
newly selected value in the device.
Press to return to the 0($685(0(17 level. MENU only allows to change to the 0$,1
0(18.
:
From PC with Double-click the desired measured-value group at 0HDVXUHPHQW.
DIGSI 4
Double-click (QHUJ\.
Double-click an entry in the list view in the right window pane to display the corre-
sponding contents of the meter group in an additional window.
Right-click the value to be changed and select the entry 6HWfrom the context menu.
The password is inquired. Next, open the 6HWYDOXH dialog. Enter the desired value
in its input box.
Click 2. to transmit the entered value to the device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.2 Controlling device functions
During the device operation, the user has several possibilities of specification for influ-
encing the individual functions and messages. The possibility of deleting saved infor-
mation is one of them (see section 7.1.1.4). Correcting the date and the time of day
and influencing information on the system interface during test operation are addition-
al possibilities explained in the following sections.
7.2.1 Reading and setting date/time of day
The specification if and by which synchronization source the internal clock is to be set
was already executed at date/time control explained in section 5.10. As the internal
clock control (RTC) also continues with the incorporated buffer battery even without
device power supply, a plausible time of day is already displayed on the device start-
up. It can now be changed automatically or manually by means of the connected syn-
chronization source. Until the synchronization and the specification of a valid time of
day, various time representations are possible on the device. These representations
are explained in the following subsections:
Time Status Besides the display of date and time, the status of these readings is also provided. The
text of the status display can have the appearances given in Table 7-1, under regular
conditions of time control.
Tabelle 7-1 Time Status

Status Text No.
1
synchronized
67 2
(5 3
(567 4
not synchronized
16(5 5
16 6
The text symbols, or status bits, for the time status have the following meanings:
16 Not synchronized Time was neither set manually nor synchronized

after power-up.
(5 Time error At the moment, there is no cyclical synchronization

within the tolerance times (time can jump)
67 Daylight savings The latest synchronization signal received supplied a

time daylight savings time bit

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Representation of Various representations of the date and time stamp may be given in the '$7(7,0(
the Time sub-menu and in all messages stamped with the date and time. The year number and
the values of the status bits time invalid and time malfunction determine the repre-
sentations. The possible representations and the associated causes are listed in Table
7-2.
Tabelle 7-2 Representations of Date and Time:
Item Display (Example) Year Time Time Invalid

Malfunction
Date Time
1 HHHHHHHH " Year = 1990 irrelevant
2 " Yes No
3 " " 1990<Year<2090 Yes Yes
4 No No
5 HH"HHHHHH " No Yes

C53000-G1876-C102-2
(? appearing in the date and time field indicate that the clock synchronisation has been lost).
Item 1 appears if the internal clock RTC did not have a valid time upon start-up. The
messages in the memory buffers are dated 01/01/1990.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually (see margin header Changing the
Time below).
No. 2 appears if the time was actually set, but not synchronized. This can happen:
briefly upon device power-up,
if synchronization is lost; that is, if the cyclical synchronization is interrupted for a
time longer than the set tolerance time.
Corrective action: If an external synchronizing source is being used, check the source
and the connection.
No. 3 is displayed if the RTC had a valid value upon device start-up but the time was
neither manually set nor synchronized since.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually, or wait until the cyclical synchroni-
zation takes effect.
No. 4 displays the normal condition; that is, the time is synchronized cyclically accord-
ing to the type of operation.
No. 5 is displayed if synchronization via the system interface is marked as invalid.
Changing the Time The time can be changed

By setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI 4;
By adjusting the settings for time control.
The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided that the device al-
lows this and password N 5 (individual parameter) was entered. A precondition is that
the appropriate type of operation for time control must be selected (see Section 5.7).
When the source of time synchronisation is internal or pulse via binary input the
date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations
time error ON and time error OFF appear in the annunciation log to indicate time
synchronization and loss of time synchronization, respectively.
In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchroni-
zation is momentarily lost. The messages time error ON and time error OFF are giv-
en when manually changing the year in the IRIG B mode.
Without healthy or external time synchronisation the free running date and time can
also be relatively adjusted (+/ 23:59:59) using the entry field 'LIIWLPH.
This input possibility is not to be confused with the parameter 2IIVHW (see Section
5.7), which affects the specific general offset to the received synchronization time of
the radio clock receiver (e.g. local time vs. GMT time).
Changing the Time The time can be changed

By setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI 4,
By adjusting the settings for time control.
The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided that this was per-
mitted during the configuration of the time control.
When the source of time synchronisation is internal or pulse via binary input the
date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations

C53000-G1876-C102-2
time malfunction ON and time malfunction OFF indicate the related time change.
With pulse via binary output, the message time malfunction OFF is displayed as
soon as a pulse edge has arrived after the time change.
In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchroni-
zation is momentarily lost and the identification ST was set in the time status. The IRIG
B mode has the special feature that it allows a year change at any time, accompanied
by the messages time malfunction ON and time malfunction OFF .
The date and the time of day can also be adjusted relatively (+/ 23:59:59) using the
entry field Diff.time. This input possibility must not be confused with the parameter
2IIVHW (see Section 5), which affects the synchronization time of the radio clock re-
ceiver.
Device Front
Select 6HWWLQJV, and in the sub-menu 6(783(;75$6. To set the date and time
manually, choose the selection 'DWH7LPH and move to the '$7(7,0( display us-
ing the key. See Figure 7-13.
6(783(;75$6

!'DWH7LPH! '$7(7,0(
!&ORFN6HWXS! 6WDWXV
!
'LIIWLPH
Figure 7-13 Operator menu for manual date and time adjustment
To change one of the previous settings (date, time, differential time), mark the item us-
ing the and keys, and then press the ENTER key.
The actual setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. Overwrite this setting with
the desired new one using the number keys. Be careful to enter the format properly.
Confirm the change with the ENTER key.
To change the time offset or the tolerance time for a clock error signal, select &ORFN
6HWXS under 6(783(;75$6, as shown in Figure 7-14. Under 2IIVHW, the time off-
set can be changed. Under (UURU7LPH, the time delay for the alarm can be adjust-
ed. These adjustments are done in the same manner as setting the time, by overwrit-
ing the displayed values and confirming with the ENTER key.
To return to the S(783(;75$6 level, press the key, several times if necessary. To
return to the 0$,10(18, press the MENU key.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
6(783(;75$6

!'DWH7LPH!
!&ORFN6HWXS! &/2&.6(783

2IIVHW!PLQ
(UURU7LPHPLQ
6RXUFH,QWHUQDO
Figure 7-14 Operator menu for date and time settings
:
From PC with Proceed as follows to manually enter the date and the time of day into the device:
DIGSI 4
Click 'HYLFH in the menu bar (see Figure 7-15). Select the 6HWFORFN command.
Figure 7-15 Selecting the Set clock command example
The dialog 6HWGDWH WLPHLQGHYLFH opens. The displayed values correspond

to the current data and approximately the current time of day. The day of the week is
determined automatically from the data and cannot be edited.
Edit the 'DWH and 7LPH input boxes. You must use the correct spelling (see
Figure7-16 ).
Click 2. to transfer to set values to the device. The former values are changed and
the current dialog box closes.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-16 Set time & date in device dialog box
To change the time offset or the tolerance time in case of a disturbed clock signal,
pass via 6HWWLQJV and double-click the settings function selection (Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17 Settings window in DIGSI 4 example
Double-click 7LPHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQ to open the 7LPHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQ

WLPHIRUPDW dialog window. Here, you can change the message delay at the point
monitoring (Fault message after) and the time offset in the value input field Offset
to time sign.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-18 Window for setting time synchronization and time format in DIGSI 4
7.2.2 Influencing information on the system interface during a test operation
If the device is connected to a central control or memory equipment, you may influ-
cence information transmitted to the control center.
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred via
the system interface can be marked with an added test modebit while the device is
being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being
incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system fault or event. As an-
other option, all messages and measured values normally transferred via the system
interface can be blocked during the testing (data transmission block).
This changeopver can be performed via binary inputs, via an operator action on the
device front or by means of a PC via the operating serial interface or the service inter-
face.
If binary inputs are used, then the appropriate inputs must be configured.
The password no. 4 for test and diagnostics is required for local switch or switch via
PC.
From the With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 appears.
Device Front
Using the key, highlight the menu item 7HVW'LDJQRVH, and then press the
key to enter sub-menu. 7(67',$*126( will appear at the top of the menu.
At this point, highlight the menu item 7HVW(QDEOH using the key, and then press
the key to enter sub-menu. 7(67(1$%/( will appear at the top of the menu.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7(67',$*126(

'HYLFH5HVHW!
!7HVW(QDEOH! 7(67(1$%/(
%ON'DWD7UDQV!
+DUGZDUH7HVW! !7HVWPRGH2))
6HW5HVHW!
6,(0(16,QWHUQ
Figure 7-19 Applying test mode from the front panel
To switch to test mode, press the ENTER key, enter the password for test and diagnos-
tics, and confirm with the ENTER key. A new window appears with the options 21 and
2)). Use the and keys to select the desired mode, and press the ENTER key. The
question $UH\RXVXUH" is displayed. Highlight the desired response and press
the ENTER key. If the mode is changed, the device responds with the message &RQ
WURO([HFXWHG.
Use the key to return to the 7(67',$*126( level; press the MENU key to return to
the 0$,10(18.
The procedure for changing the Block Data Transmission mode is the same.
7(67',$*126(

!%ON'DWD7UDQV! %/.'$7$75$16
+DUGZDUH7HVW!
!'DWD6WRS2))

Figure 7-20 Applying data transmission block from the front panel (simplified)
The settings for the test mode and the data transmission block are normally 2)). Def-
initions:
7HVWPRGH With the 21 setting, the test mode-bit is transferred for messages
compatible with IEC 608705103.
'DWD6WRS With the 21 setting, no messages or measured values are trans-
ferred (data tranmission block).
:
From PC with Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar to reach the commands %ORFN'DWD7UDQVPLV
DIGSI 4 VLRQ or 7HVW0RGH.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-21 Applying Test Mode or Block Data Transmission in DIGSI 4
Click on %ORFN'DWD7UDQVPLVVLRQ to activate or deactivate the transfer block.

After entry of Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and confirmation with 2., the
setting change is complete. Activation is indicated with a check mark in front of the
command. Follow the same procedure for the command 7HVW0RGH, if this option is
desired.
Note:
Remember to change the settings to 2)) when the tests are complete for which these
blockings were switched on.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.3 System control
SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 includes control functions for controlling the primary

technology in the device via separate operator control elements and via the DIGSI 4
operator program. Examples: Control commands, also synchronized, for controlling
circuit breakers, isolators and ground electrodes, step commands for increasing and
decreasing transformer steps and adjusting commands with parameterized runtime
for controlling E coils.
Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure that a control command can only be
executed if the test of the predefined criteria was completed with a positive result.
If an auxiliary contract pair (ON and OFF) is available for a control device and if this
was considered within the framework of device configuration, these switch position
feedbacks can be monitored for plausibility. If neither the position message ON nor
OFF are exist for a switch, the operating equipment display a fault of the switch con-
cerned.
The switch control in 6MD663/6MD664 can be performed via 4 command sources:
Local operation via the integrated operator control panel
Binary inputs
Remote control via the system interface
Operation via the operating via interface, using a PC and the DIGSI 4 program.
The control authorization of the command source can be specified via Control author-
ity.
In case of locked switching, all configured locking conditions are checked before a
switching operation. If a condition is not met, the command is rejected with a corre-
sponding operating response. A pre-defined standard interlocking is implemented in
the device. If required, it can be adapted to the individual application by means of con-
figuration. The following checks can be switched on or off for a control device:
Control authority
Feeder interlocking (e.g. logic via CFC)
System interlocking (via SICAM)
Double-operation blocking (blocking parallel switching operations)
Switching direction check (SETPOINT/ACTUAL comparison)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.3.1 Controlling via higher-level control technology
Controlling via higher-level control technology (SICAM SAS substation control sys-
tem, see SICAM SAS manual) is the standard remote control.
The device is equipped with a serial interface for a connection to higher-level control
components. Via this interface, the device can receive standardized command tele-
grams and transmit them to the control devices concerned, set taggings or initiate ed-
iting in CFC. This command processing is specified within the framework of configu-
ration and masking (Destination column).
7.3.2 Displaying switch position and switching
From the The default and the control display of 6MD663/6MD664 allow for retrieving the current
Device Front control device positions. The control devices can be actuated in the control display by
means of 3 separate, colored keys below the graphic display. Chapter 6.14 describes
the procedure of switching from the control display.
The following text describes another possibility of retrieving switch positions and initi-
ating switching operations: When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU
key. The 0$,10(18 is displayed.
Use the key to select the &RQWURO menu point and for editing control functions.
The &21752/ selection is displayed (see Figure 7-22).
0$,10(18

0HDVXUHPHQWV!
!&RQWURO &21752/

!%UHDNHU6ZLWFK!
!7DJJLQJ!
Figure 7-22 Operator menu on the front cover, for selecting the system control
Use the key to select %UHDNHU6ZLWFK and for the next selection. %5($.(5
6:,7&+ is displayed (see Figure 7-23).
Select 'LVSOD\ (preset) and confirm with . The ',63/$< selection is now avail-
able from which you can retrieve the switch positions of all configured control devices.
%5($.(56:,7&+

!'LVSOD\! ',63/$<
!&RQWURO!
!4212))2))
!4212))21
Figure 7-23 Operator menu on the front cover, for displaying switch positions
Press the to return to the %5($.(56:,7&+ level.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
To control a control device, select from the %5($.(56:,7&+ menu the option &RQ
WURO and then press to switch to the table of the operating equipment to be con-
trolled (see Figure 7-24). All configured switching elements are displayed. The actual
status of each control device is displayed first. Use the and keys to move to the
desired switch.
%5($.(56:,7&+

!'LVSOD\!
!&RQWURO! &21752/

4212))!!21
4212))!!21
4212))!!21
Figure 7-24 Operator menu on the front cover, for controlling control devices
Select the control device to be switched by means of and and then press the
ENTER key.
Enter password no. 1 (for locked switching) and acknowledge with ENTER . Note: If the
control mode is 81/2&.(' (section 7.3.7), switching operations require password no.
2 (for unlocked switching).
A new window is displayed. Depending on the operating and command mode of the
selected switching object, various possibilities are offered. You may switch among
them using the and keys (see Figure 7-25).
&2175
!23(1

36!&/26(
21
Figure 7-25 Selection window on the front cover, for switch operation (example)
For switching, you must first confirm with ENTER . The safety inquiry is displayed: $UH
\RXVXUH" If you answer with <(6 and if local command input is permitted, the
switching action is initiated. The display shows a corresponding message. Acknowl-
edge it by pressing again the ENTER key.
If the switching action is not allowed, e.g. because of a missing control authority (see
section 7.3.6) or interlocking (see section 7.3.7), or if you cancelled the procedure, the
switching operation is not executed. The display shows a corresponding message.
Acknowledge it by pressing again the ENTER key. The interlocking conditions can be
inquired on the display according to the explanations in section 7.3.5.
Use the key to return to the %5($.(56:,7&+ level and MENU to change to the 0$,1
0(18.
:
From PC with If you double-click the 2QOLQH directory in DIGSI 4, the left window pane displays
DIGSI 4 the operating functions of the device. Click on &RQWURO to display the function selec-
tion in the right window pane (Figure 7-26).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 7-26 Operating equipment control window
Double-click %UHDNHU6ZLWFK to open a dialog box displaying the current status of

each switch (see Figure 7-27). Switching operations can be performed from this box,
provided that the control authority was set to 5(027(. This control authority is trans-
ferred to DIGSI 4 only by the time when the control window is called (Figure 7-27). In
section 5.2, you have specified via the configuration matrix to which operating compo-
nents in this information is displayed in this box.
Figure 7-27 Operating equipment in DIGSI 4 dialog window
The left column of the dialog box displays the designation of the operating equipment.
It corresponds to the contents in the /RQJWH[W column of the matrix.
The $FWXDO column displays the actual status of an operating equipment (21, )$8/7,
2))), and the possible setpoint status is displayed in the 6HWSRLQW column.
The right section of the dialog box contains four check boxes. If one of these boxes is
checked (inputs block, transfer block, manual overwrite and chatter suppression the
corresponding block is set or the feedback on the actual status of an operating equip-
ment was manually overwritten.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Normally, operating equipment is switched in the ,QWHUORFNHG mode. The config-

ured interlocking conditions are checked before a switching operation is executed. As
soon as you give a control command in the 6HWSRLQW column, the password of inter-
locked switching (password no. 1) is inquired for safety reasons. The release of addi-
tional state changes persists until the %UHDNHU6ZLWFK dialog window is closed or
the control mode is changed.
If a control command was executed successfully, the display of the actual status of the
operating equipment concerned is updated in the window.
To switch operating equipment without previous check of interlocking conditions, you
must first enter the password for unlocked switching (password no. 2)- Select the 8Q
ORFNHGVZLWFKLQJ option by clicking the box with the same name.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power sys-
tem conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switch-
ing operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property dam-
age.
7.3.3 Manual overwrite
In case of a failed switch position feedback, e.g. caused by an interrupted connection

line to a device binary input, this is considered as a fault and the switch actuation is
blocked. If you nevertheless want to actuate the switch concerned, it is possible to pre-
scribe the current switch position to the device by a procedure called manual over-
write. The manually overwritten switch position is continued to be used in the device
and is thus, for example, considered in the interlocking conditions.
A prerequisite of manual tagging is, however, that first the capture of the switch posi-
tion of the switch concerned is blocked for the device. This separation from the system
is performed by setting the corresponding status (see section 7.3.4).
From the Proceed as follows to manually overwrite the position information of a control device:
Device Front
When the device is in operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,10(18 is displayed.
Use to select &RQWURO and for editing the control functions. The &21752/ se-
lection is displayed.
Use to reach the %5($.(56:,7&+ menu, (see Figure 7-28).
Use to select 0DQXDORYHUZULWH and for the next selection. The 0$18$/
29(5:5,7( window is displayed (see Figure 7-28).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The actual status of each control device is displayed first. Use and to move to
the desired switch.
%5($.(56:,7&+

'LVSOD\
!
&RQWURO 0$129(5:5,7(
!
!0DQXRYHUZULWH 4212))!21
4212))21
4212))2))
Figure 7-28 Operator menu for manual overwriting of control devices, on the front cover
Press ENTER and enter password no. 2 (for unlocked switching) and acknowledge with
ENTER .
A selection window is now opened for the selected switch. It offers the manual over-
write possibilities 212)) (see Figure 7-29).
Make your selection using the or keys and confirm with ENTER .
1$&+)

!2))

!/621
Figure 7-29 Selection window for manually updating a switch position, on the front cover
The following safety inquiry is displayed: $UH\RXVXUH" If you answer with <(6
and if manual updating is allowed, the display shows a corresponding message. Ac-
knowledge by pressing again the ENTER key.
If manual updating is not allowed, e.g. because of a capture blocking/an ignored input
(see section 7.3.4), or if the procedure was cancelled, manual updating is rejected by
a corresponding message on the display. Confirm it by pressing again ENTER .
Use the key to return to the %5($.(56:,7&+ level or MENU to return to the 0$,1
0(18.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, manual updating is only possible on site via the device operator
DIGSI 4 control panel, but not via DIGSI 4.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.3.4 Setting status
During commissioning or testing, it may be useful to interrupt the connection between

the device and the switch or between the device and the central device for a short time
without physically separating it. Such a separation also becomes necessary if, for ex-
ample, a switch position feedback doesnt work correctly (see section 7.3.3). The6(7
67$786 menu point serves for this purpose.
It displays a list of all configured control devices together with the corresponding status
information marked by letters. The signification of these letters is listed below:
N Manual overwrite, i.e. the information content was changed via an operator ac-
tion.
E Capture block set (Input ignored), i.e. the message input is separated from the
process (from the system).
Z Blocked, i.e. the transfer to the central device is blocked.
F Chatter suppression active, i.e. a chatter suppression was set due to frequent
message changes.
A Output block active, i.e. the command output is separated from the process
(from the system).
if none of the above-mentioned explanations is the reason
Note:
The chatter suppression only influences physical inputs! Dont set a capture blocking
for messages created via CFC which are configured on the Manual overwrite oper-
ating level, as these messages dont cause a separation from the system - in contrast
to physical inputs.
From the With the device ready for operation, first press MENU to display the 0$,10(18.
Device Front
lection box is displayed.
Use to select %5($.(56:,7&+.
Next, use to select 6HWVWDWXV and for the next selection. 6(767$786 is
displayed (see Figure 7-30).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
%5($.(56:,7&+

'LVSOD\
!
&RQWURO
! 6(767$786
!0DQ2YHUZULWH!
%UHDNHU7,2
'LVF6ZLW!
*QG6ZLW
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
10DQXDOXSGDWH
(&DSWXUHEORFN
=%ORFNHG
)&KDWWHUVXSSUHVVLRQ
$2XWSXWEORFN
Figure 7-30 Set status operator menu, on the front cover
Use the keys and to position the cursor respectively in the second (capture
blocking/Input ignored) and fifth column (output blocking) of the switch whose status
you want to change. That is the only method to change inputs into this table.
Press the ENTER key to open a selection window displaying the signification of this box
and the change options.
The second column is reserved for setting the capture block (() and the fifth one for
setting the output block ($). The first, third and fourth column can only be read out in
this menu.
The example above (figure 7-30) indicates that the witch position of the circuit breaker
(4) was manually overwritten (updated) (N), after setting the capture block ((), i.e.
separating the message input from the system and the output block is active ($), i.e.
the system command output is separated from the system, too. Separators (Q1) and
ground electrodes (Q8) are not subject to restrictions.
Use the keys and to select the desired change option and then confirm with
ENTER .
Enter password no. 2 (for unlocked switching) and confirm with ENTER .
The safety inquiry is displayed: $UH\RXVXUH" A corresponding message is dis-

played if you answer with <(6.
Actuate several times or press ESC once to return to the %5($.(56:,7&+level
or press MENU to change to the 0$,10(18.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, a status change can only be executed on site via the device oper-
DIGSI 4 ator control panel, but not via DIGSI 4.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
7.3.5 Interlocks
Operating equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, grounding electrodes, area

subject to interlocking conditions. These conditions can be read out on the device via
,17(5/2&.. However, it is not possible to change them via this menu point.
The display is performed analog to the status display by means of an object table, as
described in section 7.3.4. The parameterized interlocking reasons are displayed,
which block or might block a local switching action. The interlocking reasons are
marked by letters whose significations are explained in the following list:
S Checking control authority;
A Object subject to a system blocking (commands entered on site are transmitted
to the central unit)
F Check feeder interlock
I Check Setpoint = Actual;
B Blocking by protection trip;
Unlocked
From the With the device ready for operation, first press MENU to display the 0$,10(18.
Device Front
lection box is displayed.
Use to select,QWHUORFN and for the next selection. ,17(5/2&. is displayed
(see Figure 7-31).
&21752/

!7DJJLQJV!
!,QWHUORFN! ,17(5/2&.

4(212))6),%
4212))6),%
4212))6),%
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Col-
66ZLWFKLQJDXWKRULW\
$6\VWHPLQWHUORFN
))HHGHULQWHUORFN
,&KHFNVHWDFWXDO
%3URWHFWLRQEORFNLQJ
Figure 7-31 Example of retrieving interlockings of operating equipment, on the front cover
:
From PC with The interlockings were specified via the matrix and the Object Properties dialog box
DIGSI 4 of each control device within the framework of configuration (see section 5.2.5). The
actively set interlocking reasons can be retrieved in the same way without password
inquiry.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
When double-clicking the Online directory in DIGSI 4, the left window pane displays
the operating functions of the device. Double-click 6HWWLQJV to display their function
selection in the right window pane. Double-click ,20DWUL[ to open the matrix. Se-
lect the switching object (in the line of the command message of the switching object).
Right-click to call the properties of the switching object. The next dialog box displays
the check conditions for locked switching. If a check box is checked, the check condi-
tion concerned is active.
7.3.6 Control authority
The control authority determines which command sources are authorized for switch-
ing. Please be aware that only those control commands are subject to the control au-
thority for which the parameter Check control authority for ... was set at interlocking
in the object properties.
From the With the 6MD663/6MD664 device, the control authority is specified by the upper of the
Device Front two key lock switches. In case of a horizontal key position (Local), the local control is
permitted via the device user interface, whereas a vertical key position ( Remote) al-
lows remote control.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, the control authority can only be changed on site via the device
DIGSI 4 operator control panel, but not via DIGSI 4.
To be able to switch via DIGSI 4, the control authority on the device must be set to
REMOTE or the check condition of the control authority for remote control must not be
set active. The control authority is transferred to DIGSI 4 only by the time when the
control window is called (see Figure 7-27).
7.3.7 Control mode
The control mode can be changed during operation, e.g. for enabling unlocked switch-
ing during the commissioning phase.
From the With the 6MD663/6MD664 device, the control mode is determined by the lower of the
Device Front two key lock switches. With a horizontal key position (Interlocking Off), unlocked
switching is permitted, whereas with a vertical key position (Normal), only locked
switching is possible.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power sys-
tem conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switch-
ing operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property dam-
age.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
:
From PC with If you open the DIGSI 4 Online directory by a double-click, the left window pane dis-
DIGSI 4 plays the device operating functions. Click on &RQWURO displays their function selec-
tion in the right window pane (Figure 7-26). Double-click %UHDNHU6ZLWFK to open
a dialog box (Figure 7-27), offering amongst other options the selection option for
locked and unlocked switching.
To switch operating equipment without a previous check of the interlocking conditions,
select the 8QORFNHGVZLWFKLQJ option by clicking on the box with this name, as
described in section 7.3.2.
To set the control mode to locked switching, the option box must not be selected. A
selection can be deleted by clicking the box once again.
The release for additional switching operations persists until the %UHDNHUVZLWFK
dialog box closes or the control mode is changed.
7.3.8 Control messages
Within the framework of power system control, the device outputs some messages
documenting the course, e.g. the command end or the reasons of a rejection.
Table 7-3 explains these messages and their causes together with additional messag-
es regarding the control of device functions.
Table 7-3 Possible Control Messages
Message Text Message Cause

6\VWHP(UURU Interruption by system error
0DQ2YHUZULWH2. Return routing carried out
0DQ2YHUZULWH)DLO Return routing cannot be carried out
&RQWURO$ERUW2. Command interruption carried out correctly
&RQWURO$ERUW)DLO Process cannot be interrupted because no command is issued,
command runs in different switching direction, or interruption is not
planned or set up.
&RQWURO([HFXWHG Command was correctly executed and ended
&RQWURO)DLOHG Refusal because the command number or the origination source is
not permitted
,QWHUORFNHG Refusal because the communication interface was blocked or the
command object is blocked by a protective function.
6ZLWFKJU,QWORFNHG Refusal because the command object is subject to field interlock-
ing
6ZLWFKLQ3RVLWLRQ Refusal because the present switch position = command direction
6HWWLQJ(UURU Refusal because of a parameter fault, such as unknown command
type
1RW$XWKRUL]HG Command from ON-SITE refused because command object is
subject to control authority, which is set to REMOTE
&RQWURO([SLUHG Refusal because command is too old (expiry monitor)
1R&RQWURO'HYLFH Information address is not planned as command output

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 7-3 Possible Control Messages
Message Text Message Cause

&RQILJ(UURU Refusal because no relay is assigned to this object, or the relay
jumpered in the device does not exist
&RQWURO%ORFNHG Refusal because an output block is set
6\VWHP2YHUORDG" Refusal because a relay to be controlled is already active (e.g., by
another command)
6:WRQHUURU" Refusal because another relay is already controlled
6\VWHP2YHUORDG No more free timers available
8SSHU6HWW/LPLW For transformer LTC step commands, highest level already
reached
/RZHU6HWW/LPLW For transformer LTC step commands, lowest level already reached
([HFXWLQJ&RQWURO New command refused because a command is already in process-
ing
&RPPDQG7LPHRXW Feedback indication missing
%LQDU\,QS,JQRUHG Recording block set
&KDWWHU$FWLYH Chatter block is active
6HWW&KDQJH$FWLYH Refusal because parameter loading process is running
6WDWXV&KDQJH2. Status FRPPDQGH[HFXWHG
6WDWXV&KDQJH)DLO Status command cannot be executed
&KDQJH2. Marking executed
&KDQJH)DLOHG Marking cannot be executed
&KHFNLQJ,QWHUORFN Command is sent to the central unit to check system interlocking
6HWWLQJVDUH2. Parameter change was correctly accepted
7LPH/LPLW([SLUHG Parameter change was interrupted because time expired
7HUPLQDWHG3LFNXS Parameter change interrupted because a fault became active dur-
ing parameterization
5HVWRUH3DUDPHWHUV As a reaction to a fault recognized during parameterization, the last
active parameter set is activated again
3OHDVH:DLW Initiated process running and requires some time
&KHFNLQJ6HWWLQJV The changed parameters are tested before acceptance
6ZJU)HHGEDFN2. Return message: destination reached
6ZJU)HHGEDFN)DLO Return message: destination not reached
&KDQJH5HMHFWHG Parameter change was rejected (e.g., because time expired, or ab-
normal occurrence during parameterization)
&RQWURO2. Positive conclusion message for commands
9DOXH,QFRUUHFW Plausibility error in command
$9ORFNHG System interlocking exists in central device
$97LPH2XW No feedback to tripping request from central device

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Mounting and Commissioning 8
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. Users of this chapter
should be familiar with commissioning control devices, using the network and with the
safety rules and instructions. Some hardware adaptations to the system data may be-
come necessary.
8.1 Mounting and connection 8-2

8.2 Checking the connections 8-20
8.3 Commissioning 8-24
8.4 Switching the device available for operation 8-30

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Mounting and Commissioning
8.1 Mounting and connection
Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and
hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial
property damage.
Requirements The nominal device data check as described in section 3.2.1 has been completed and
it has been verified that this data match with the power system data.
A visual device check must be performed for detecting damages.
8.1.1 Mounting
Control panel q Take off the 4 caps in the corners and 2 caps fixed centrally on the upper and lower
mounting side of the front cover. In this way, you can access 6 oblong holes in the fixation
angle.
q Insert the device into the control panel section and fix it with 6 screws. Dimension
drawing see section 10.6, Figure 10-1.
q Reinstall the 6 caps.
q Attach solid, low-resistance protective ground and operational earth on the rear
panel of the device by means of a M4 screw. The cross section of the line used for
this purpose must correspond to the maximum cross section connected, but must
not be less than 2.5 mm2.
q Establish connections via the plug-in or screw connections on the rear panel of the
housing according to circuit diagram.
If fork-type cable lugs are used in case of screw connections or in case of direct con-
nections, the user must fix the screws before inserting the lines in a way that the
screw head is in alignment to the outer edge of the connection module.
If ring-cable lugs are used, the cable lug must be centered in the connection hole
that the screw thread exactly fits into the hole of the cable lug.
The requirements with regard to maximum cross section, tightening torques, bend-
ing radius and strain relief according to section 2.1 must be strictly observed.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Oblong
hole SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 6MD66
Schloplatz
MENU
Schalterfall
1000 A
Tr geffnet 21 kV
Feder ungesp.
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Meldungen F1 7 8 9
Local
Mewerte F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 8-1 Control panel mounting of a 6MD663/6MD664 device
Frame and cabinet 2 set-squares are required for incorporating a device in a frame or cabinet. The order
mounting numbers can be found in the annex A.
q First the two set-squares in the frame or cabinet are screwed loosely by means of
respectively 4 screws.
q Take off the 4 caps in the corners and 2 caps fixed centrally on the upper and lower
side of the front cover. In this way, you can access 6 oblong holes in the fixation
angle.
q Fix the device to the set-squares by means of 6 screws.
q Next, tighten the 8 screws of the set-squares in the frame or cabinet.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 6MD66
Schloplatz
MENU
Schalterfall
1000 A
Tr geffnet 21 kV
Feder ungesp.
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Meldungen F1 7 8 9
Local
Mewerte F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 8-2 Mounting a 6MD663/6MD664 in a frame or cabinet

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Surface-mounting The following steps must be executed for mounting the device:
housing
q Tighten the device by means of 10 screws. Dimension drawing see section 10.6,
Figure 10-2.
q The following steps must be executed for mounting the operator control unit:
q Take off the 4 caps in the corners of the front cover. In this way, you can access
4 oblong holes in the fixation angle.
q Insert the operator control unit into the control panel section and fix it with 4 screws.
Dimension drawing see section 10.6, Figure 10-3.
Caution!
Never plug in or withdraw the connector between the device and the remote operator
control unit when the power supply is connected!
q Establish the connection from the operator control unit to the device. To do this,
plug the 68-pole connector of the operator control unit cable into the intended con-
nection on the rear panel of the device (see section 2.2, Figure 2-14).
8.1.2 Connection variants
Currents/Voltages Connection circuits are illustrated in Annex A.3. The Figures A-7 to A-10 illustrate con-
nection examples of the current and voltage transformers.
As the voltage inputs of the 6MD663/6MD664 device have an operating range from 0
to 170 V, this means that phase-phase voltages can be assessed up to
3 170 V = 294 V.
Binary inputs and Section 5.2 provides a description of the configuration options, i.e. the individual ad-
outputs aptation to the power system.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.1.3 Hardware adaptation
8.1.3.1 General
A subsequent adaptation of the hardware to the power system conditions can, for ex-
ample, become necessary with regard to the control voltage for binary inputs or the
termination of bus-capable interfaces. In case of changes of the device properties de-
scribed on the type panel, the type panel must be adapted manually (due to repairs,
etc.). Please also observe the indications in sections 8.1.3.2 to 8.1.3.5.
Auxiliary voltage There are different input voltage ranges of the auxiliary voltage (see ordering data in
Annex A.1). The versions for 60/110 V and 220 to 250 V can be changed to one an-
other by changing the plug-in jumpers. The assignment of these jumpers to the nom-
inal voltage ranges and their spatial arrangement on the PCB are described in section
8.1.3.3 next to the title Processor module CPU. On delivery of the device, all jumpers
are correctly arranged according to the indications on the rating plate and dont need
to be changed.
Life contact The life contact of the device is a changeover contact from which either the opening
or the closing contact can be attached to the F3 and F4 device connections via a plug-
in jumper (X40). The assignment of the plug-in jumpers to the contact type and the
spatial arrangement of the jumpers are described in section 8.1.3.3 next to the title
Processor module CPU.
Nominal currents The input transformers of the device are set to 1 A or 5 A nominal current by means
of burden switching. The positioning of the plug-in jumpers has been executed in the
factory according to the indications on the rating plate. The assignment of the plug-in
jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial arrangement of the jumpers are ex-
plained in section 8.1.3.3 next to the title I/O4 module. All jumpers must be set for
the same nominal current, i.e. respectively one jumper (X61 to X64) for each input
transformer and additionally the common jumper X60.
Should you perform a change here, you must not forget to communicate this change
to the device also via the parameter Transformer current I, secondary in the mea-
suring transducer packets (see chapter 6).
Control voltage of In the delivery status, the binary inputs are set in a way ensuring that a direct current
the binary inputs equalling the supply voltage is set as control variable. In case of deviating nominal val-
ues of the power system control voltage, it may become necessary to change the
switching threshold of the binary inputs.
To change the switching threshold of a binary input, the plugging of the corresponding
jumper must be changed. The assignment of the jumpers to the binary inputs and their
spatial arrangement are described in section 8.1.3.3 next to the titles Processor mod-
ule CPUand I/O4 module.
Note:
If binary inputs are used for the trip monitoring, please note that two binary inputs (or
one binary input and one equivalent resistance) are connected in series. In that case,
the switching threshold must be clearly below half the nominal control voltage.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Exchanging The serial interfaces can be exchanged. Section 8.1.3.4, paragraph next to title Ex-
interfaces changing interface modulesdescribes which interfaces can be exchanged as well as
the exchange procedure.
Terminating bus- For a safe data transmission, the RS485 bus or Profibus must be terminated at the
capable interfaces last device at the bus (connecting terminating resistors). For this purpose, terminating
resistors are installed on the PCB of the CPU processor modules and on the Profibus
interface module. They can be connected by means of plug-in jumpers. The spatial
arrangement of the jumpers on the PCB of the CPU processor modules is explained
in section 8.1.3.3 next to the subtitle Processor module CPUand on the Profibus in-
terface module in section 8.1.3.4 next to the subtitle Bus-capable serial interfaces.
Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way.
In the delivery status of the device, the terminating resistors are switched ON.
8.1.3.2 Dismounting the device
Proceed as follows to work on the PCBs, e.g. for checking or changing switching ele-
ments or for exchanging modules:
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the de-
vice. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement name-
plates.
q Preparing workplace: Preparing a surface appropriate to electrostatic sensitive devic-

es (EGB). In addition to this, the following tools are required:
a screwdriver, blade width 5 to 6 mm
a crosstip screwdriver for Pz size 1
a box spanner, width 4.5 mm
q On the rear panel, remove the studs of the DSUB socket on position A.
q If the device has additional system interfaces on slots B to D in addition to the ser-
vice interface, the diagonal screws must be removed, respectively.
q Remove the caps on the front cover of the device and withdraw the then accessible
screws.
q Remove the front cover and tilt it to the side.
For the device variant with a remote operator control unit, the device front cover can
be removed directly after untighting the screws.
The module slots can be seen from Figures 8-3 and 8-4.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and con-
nectors must be avoided. Touch an earthed metal part before handling the internal
components. Do not insert or remove connectors at live interfaces.
q Remove the plug-in connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module CPU
() and the front cover from the front cover. To do this, spread the interlockings on the
upper and lower end of the plug-in connector to release the plug-in connector of the
ribbon cable.
This task is not necessary for the device variant with remote operator control unit. In
this case, however, the user must remove the 7-pole X16 plug-in connector behind the
DSUB socket from the processor module CPU () and the plug-in connector of the
ribbon cable leading to the 68-pole plug-in connector on the device rear panel.
q Remove the plug-in connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module CPU
() and the input/output modules I/O4 () and I/O5 ().
q Withdraw the modules and put it on a surface suitable for electrostatic sensitive devic-
es.
q Check the jumpers according to Figures 8-5 to 8-9. If necessary, change or remove
them.
processor module
1 Processor module CPU

1 42 1 42 2 Input/output module I/O4
3 Input/output module I/O5
Slot 5 Slot 19(1) Slot 33(2) Slot 5(3) Slot 33(5)
1 2 2 2 3
BI1 to BI6 to BI21 to BI36 to binary inputs

BI5 BI20 BI35 BI50
Figure 8-3 Front view of a 6MD663 device after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced in scale)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
processor module
1 Processor module CPU

1 42 1 42 2 Input/output module I/O4
3 Input/output module I/O5
Slot 5 Slot 19(1) Slot 33(2) Slot 5(3) Slot 19(4) Slot 33(5)
1 2 2 2 2 3
BI1 to BI6 to BI21 to BI36 to BI51 to binary inputs

BI5 BI20 BI35 BI50 BI65
Figure 8-4 Front view of a 6MD664 device after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced in scale)
The figures in brackets behind the slot indicate the module address in the device (see
tables 8-8 and 8-9).
8.1.3.3 Switching elements on printed-circuit boards (PCB)
Processor module The layout of the PCB for the CPU processor module is illustrated in Figure 8-5.
CPU The set nominal voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to table
8-1, the neutral position of the life contact according to table 8-2. The selected control
voltages of binary inputs BI1 to BI5 according to table 8-3 and of the integrated RS232/
RS485 interface are checked according to tables 8-4 to 8-6.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
3
2
1
X51
F1
X40
1
3
X53
2
1
2
3
1
2
X55
4
2
4
2
X22
X21
3
1
3
1
X52
3 4
2
1
4
2
4
2
4
2
X25
X23
3
1
3
1
3
1
X24
X104
X106
1
2
3
X107
X111
X110
321 321
108
321
3X
1
2
3 2 1 X103
X105
X90
123
X109
+
G1
Figure 8-5 Processor module CPU with representation of the jumpers required for
checking the settings
Table 8-1 Jumper position of the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
CPU processor module
Jumper Nominal voltage

DC 24 to48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 to 250 V
X51 unequipped 12 12 23
X52 unequipped 12 and 34 12 and 34 23
X53 unequipped 12 12 23
X55 unequipped open open 12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 8-2 Jumper position of the neutral position of the Life contact on the processor
module CPU
Jumper Neutral position open Neutral position closed Default posi-

tion
X40 12 23 23
Table 8-3 Jumper position of the control voltages of binary inputs BE1 to BE5 on the
Binary input Jumper Threshold 17 V 1) Threshold 73 V 2) Threshold 154 V

3)
BI1 X21 12 23 34
BI2 X22 12 23 34
BI3 X23 12 23 34
BI4 X24 12 23 34
BI5 X25 12 23 34
1) Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 24 to 60 V

2)
Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 110 V
3)
Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 220 to 250 V
It is possible to convert the R485 interface to a RS232 interface by changing the jump-
er positions.
The jumpers X105 to X110 must be plugged in the same way!
Table 8-4 Jumper position of the integrated RS232/RS485 interface on the CPU proces-
sor module
Jumper RS232 RS485

X105 to X110 12 23
In the delivery status, the jumpers are plugged according to the ordered configuration.
Table 8-5 Jumper position of CTS (flow control) on the CPU processor module
Jumper /CTS of theRS232 interface /CTS triggered by /RTS

X111 12 23
The jumper position in the delivery status depends on the order number of the individ-
ual device.
For RS232 (12nd data position of the order number = 0, 1, 3): position 12
For RS485 (12nd data position of the order number = 2, 4): position 23
Provided that they are not terminated externally via resistors, the respectively last de-
vices must be configured via the jumpers X103 and X104.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 8-6 Jumper position of the terminating resistors of the RS485 interface on the
Jumpers Terminating resistor Terminating resistor Delivery status

switched on switched ON
X103 23 12 12
X104 23 12 12
Note: Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way!
Jumper X90 serves for internal test purposes. The delivery position 12 must not be
changed.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
I/O4 module The layout of the PCB for the I/O4 input/output module is illustrated in Figure 8-6.
The selected control voltages of the binary inputs BE6 to BE65 are checked according
to table 8-7.
Figures 8-3 and 8-4 illustrate the assignment of the binary inputs to the module slot.
HL
X73
X72
X71
123
43 21
X21
43 21
X22
43 21
X23
43 21
X24
4 3 21
X25
4 3 21
X26
43 21
X27
43 21
X28
43 21
X29
43 21
X30
4 3 21
X31
4321
X32
43 21
X33
43 21
X34
43 21
X35
Figure 8-6 I/O4 input/output module with representation of the jumpers required for check-
ing the settings

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 8-7 Jumper position of the control voltages of the binary inputs BE6 to BE65 on the
I/O4 input/output module
Binary input Jumper Thres- Thres- Threshold

hold hold 73 V 154 V 3)
17 V 1) 2)
BI6 BI21 BI36 BI51 X21 12 23 34

BI7 BI22 BI37 BI52 X22 12 23 34
BI8 BI23 BI38 BI53 X23 12 23 34
BI9 BI24 BI39 BI54 X24 12 23 34
BI10 BI25 BI40 BI55 X25 12 23 34
BI11 BI26 BI41 BI56 X26 12 23 34
BI12 BI27 BI42 BI57 X27 12 23 34
BI13 BI28 BI43 BI58 X28 12 23 34
BI14 BI29 BI44 BI59 X29 12 23 34
BI15 BI30 BI45 BI60 X30 12 23 34
BI16 BI31 BI46 BI61 X31 12 23 34
BI17 BI32 BI47 BI62 X32 12 23 34
BI18 BI33 BI48 BI63 X33 12 23 34
BI19 BI34 BI49 BI64 X34 12 23 34
BI20 BI35 BI50 BI65 X35 12 23 34
1) Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 24 to 60 V

2)
Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 110 V
3)
Default position for devices with supply nominal voltages DC 220 to 250 V
The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O4 input/output modules serves for setting
the bus address. Their position must not be changed. Table 8-8 illustrates the jumper
positions in the delivery status.
Figures 8-3 and 8-4 illustrate the module slots.
Table 8-8 Jumper position of the module addresses of the I/O4 input/output modules
Jumper Slot
Slot 19(1) Slot 33(2) Slot 5(3) Slot 19(4)
X71 12 (H) 23 (L) 12 (H) 23 (L)
X72 23 (L) 12 (H) 12 (H) 23 (L)
X73 23 (L) 23 (L) 23 (L) 12 (H)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
I/O5 module The layout of the PCB of the I/O5 input/output module is illustrated in Figure 8-7.
The set nominal currents of the current input transformers are checked here. All jump-
ers must be set for one nominal current, i.e. respectively one jumper (X61 to X64) for
each input transformer and additionally the common jumper X60.
321
X60
5A 1A
HL
5A 1A
321
X73
X62
X61
X72
5A 1A
321
X71
123
X63
5A 1A
321
X64
5A 1A
321
Figure 8-7 I/O5 input/output module with representation of the jumpers required for check-
ing the settings
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O5 input/output module serve for setting the bus
address. Their position must not be changed. Table 8-9 illustrates the delivery status
of the jumper positions.
Figures 8-3 and 8-4 illustrate the module slot.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 8-9 Jumper position of the module address of the I/O5 input/output module
Jumper Position
X71 12 (H)
X72 23 (L)
X73 12 (H)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.1.3.4 Interface modules
Exchanging inter- The interface modules are positioned on the CPU processor module CPU ( in Figure
face modules 8-3 and 8-4). Figure 8-8 illustrates the view on the PCB with the arrangement of the
modules.
Mounting position
(device rear panel)
DIGSI 4
Service interface D
Profibus FMS
system interface B
Figure 8-8 Example, CPU processor module with interface modules
Please observe the following rule:

You can only use interface modules with which the device can be ordered from the
factory according to the order key (see Annex A).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Table 8-10 Exchange modules for interfaces
Interface Slot Exchange module

Profibus FMS RS485
System interface B Profibus FMS Single ring
Profibus FMS Double ring
DIGSI 4
D LWL 820 nm
Service interface
The order numbers of the exchange modules are listed in the Annex A.
Bus-capable serial For bus-capable interfaces, the respectively last device on the bus requires a termina-
interfaces tion, i.e. terminating resistors must be connected. With the 6MD663/6MD664 device,
this concerns the variants with RS485 or Profibus interfaces.
The terminating resistors are positioned on the corresponding Profibus interface mod-
ule located on the processor module CPU ( in Figure 8-3 and 8-4) or directly on the
PCB of the processor module CPU (see section 8.1.3.3, next to subtitle Processor
module CPU, table 8-6).
Figure 8-8 illustrates the view on the PCB of the CPU with the arrangement of the
modules.
The module of the Profibus interface is illustrated in Figure 8-9.
In the delivery status, the jumpers are plugged in a way ensuring that the terminating
resistors are switched OFF. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged in
the same way.
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
Terminating resistor
Jump- 3 2 1
switched ON switched off X4
er
X3 12 23 3 2 1
X3
X4 12 23
Figure 8-9 Position of the plug-in jumpers for the configuration of the terminating resistors
of the Profibus interface
Terminating resistors for the Profibus interface can also be implemented externally
(e.g. on the connection module). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the
Profibus interface module or directly on the PCB of the processor module CPU must
be switched OFF.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Note:
The RS485 interface used with this device for ensuring inter-device communication
cannot be externally equipped with a terminating resistor as the +5 V voltage is not
brought out with this device.
The RS485 interface on the processor module can be terminated directly on the pro-
cessor module (jumper setting see section 8.1.3.3).
+5 V
392
A/A
221
B/B
392
Figure 8-10 Termination of the electrical Profibus interface (external)
8.1.3.5 Assembly of the device
The device is assembled in the following steps:

q Insert modules carefully into the housing. The module slots are illustrated in Figures
8-3 and 8-4.
q First, plug the connector of the ribbon cable on the input/output modules I/O and then
on the processor module CPU. Avoid to bend connection pins! Dont apply force!
q Plug the connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module CPU and the
front cover of the device on the connector of the front cover.
This procedure is not necessary for the device variant with remote operator control
unit. Instead of this, the connector of the ribbon cable derived from the 68-pole con-
nector on the device rear panel must be plugged on the connector of the processor
module CPU. The 7-pole X16 connector belonging to the ribbon cable must be
plugged behind the DSUB socket. The plugging position is not relevant in this context
as the connection is protected against polarity reversal.
q Press the connector lockings together.
q Attach the front cover and fix it again to the housing by means of the screws.
q Plug on the caps.
q Tighten again the screws of the interfaces on the device rear panel.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.2 Checking the connections
8.2.1 Checking the data connections of the serial interfaces
the following tables illustrate the pin assignment of the various serial device interfaces
and of the time synchronization interface.
Operating serial If the recommended interface line is used (order designation see Annex A.1), the cor-
interface rect connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the PC or Laptop is set auto-
matically.
System interface For versions equipped with a serial interface to a control center, the user must check
the data connection. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and re-
ception channels is of particular importance in the context. With the RS232 and the
fiber optics interface, each connection is determined for a transmission direction. For
this reason, the data output of the first device must be connected with the data input
of the second device and vice-versa.
With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and
ISO 2110:
TxD Data output
RxD Data input
RTS Request to send
CTS Clear to send
GND Signal/operational ground
The line shielding is grounded on both line ends. With a RS232 interface, GND must
always be incorporated. With a RS485 interface, GND must be incorporated in case
of long lines and an electromagnetically affected environment. In case of an extreme
electromagnetic environment, a separate, individually shielded pair of wires can be in-
corporated for improving the interference immunity of the GND.
Table 8-11 Assignment of the DSUB socket on the individual interfaces
Pin no. Oper. RS232 RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, RS485

interface
1 Shielding (electrically connected with shielding shroud)
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD A/A (RxD/TxDN) B/B (RxD/TxDP)
4 CNTRA (TTL)
5 GND GND C/C (GND) C/C (GND)
6 +5 V (loadable with
<100 mA)
7 RTS *)
8 CTS B/B (RxD/TxDP) A/A (RxD/TxDN)
9

C53000-G1876-C102-2
*) Also when operated as RS485 interface, pin 7 carries the RTS signal with RS232 level.
For this reason, pin 7 must not be connected!
Termination The RS485 interface is bus-capable for semi-duplex operation with the signals A/A
and B/B as well as the common reference potential C/C (GND). It must be checked
that the terminating resistors are connected only for the respectively last device of the
bus but not for all other devices of the bus. The jumpers for the terminating resistors
are located on the Profibus interface module (see Figure 8-9) or directly on the PCB
of the processor module CPU (see Figure 8-5).
If the bus is expanded, it must again be ensured that the terminating resistors are add-
ed only for the last device of the bus, but not for all other devices of the bus.
Time synchroniza- It is optionally possible to process 5V, 12 V or 24Vtime synchronization sig-

tion interface nals, provided that they are carried to the inputs named in table 8-12.
Table 8-12 Assignment of the DSUB socket of the time synchronization interface
Pin no. Designation Signal signification

1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return wire
4
5 SHIELD Shielding potential
6
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8
9 SHIELD Shielding potential
Fiber optics The transmission via fiber optics is particularly insensitive to electromagnetic interfer-
ence and thus ensures galvanic isolation of the connection. The transmission and the
reception connection are marked by the symbols for transmission output and
reception input.
The character rest position for the fiber optic connection is preset with Light OFF. to
modify the character rest position, use the DIGSI 4 operating program and proceed
as described in section 5.9.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.2.2 Checking the system connections
Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages.
They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with
all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.
DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions!
Short-circuit the secondary side of the current transformers before any current
connections to the device are opened!
Before applying for the first time a voltage to the device, the device should be posi-
tioned in the operating area for a period of at least two hours to ensure a temperature
compensation and to avoid humidity and condensation.
q The protective circuit breakers of the auxiliary power supply and of the measuring volt-
age must be switched OFF.
q Checking all currant and voltage transformer connections according to the system and
connection plan:
q Are the current transformers grounded correctly?
q Do the current transformer connections have the same polarity?
q Is the phase assignment of the current transformers correct?
q Is the grounding of the voltage transformers correct?
q Do the voltage transformer connections have the same, correct polarity?
q Is the phase assignment of the voltage transformers correct?
q Is the current input polarity IE correct (if used)?
q Is the voltage input polarity UE correct (if used for open delta winding)?
q The short circuiters of the connectors for the current circuits must be checked. This
can be performed by means of a secondary test equipment or a continuity test equip-
ment.
q Remove the screws of the front cover.
q Remove the ribbon cable of the input/output module I/O5 (Figure 8-3 or Figure 8-
4) and withdraw the module to such an extent that there is no contact with the plug
socket at the housing.
q Check continuity on the connection side, for each current connection pair.
q Insert the module again firmly; press the ribbon cable with care. Avoid bending con-
nection pins! Dont apply force!
q Check again the connection side for continuity, for each current connection pair.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
q Reinstall the front cover and tighten it with screws.

q Loop the ammeter into the auxiliary power supply line; range about 2,5 A to 5 A.
q Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check polarity of the voltage
and voltage level at the device terminals or at the connection modules.
q The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the de-
vice. A short deflection of the pointer is irrelevant and indicates the charging current
rush of the storage capacities.
q Switch off m.c.b. for the auxiliary power supply.
q Remove ammeter; re-establish normal auxiliary voltage connection.
q Switch on m.c.b. for the auxiliary power supply.
q Switch on voltage transformer protective circuit breaker.
q Check direction of rotating field on the device terminals.
q Switch off m.c.b. for transformer voltage and auxiliary supply voltage.
q Check tripping lines to the circuit breakers.
q Check control lines from and to the other devices.
q Check signalling lines.
q Switch on m.c.b.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.3 Commissioning
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth
conductor before any other electrical connection is made.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the
supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the
supply voltage (storage capacitors!).
After disconnection of the auxiliary voltage wait at least 10 s before connecting the
voltage again to then define the starting conditions.
The limit values stated in the Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded at
all, not even during testing and commissioning.
When checking the device by means of a secondary test equipment, it must be en-
sured that no other measuring variables are applied.
DANGER!
The secondary connections of the current transformers must be short-circuited
to them before interrupting the current lines to the device!
8.3.1 User-definable functions
As the device provides user-definable functions and especially the CFC logic, the user
must also check the created functions and logical links.
Of course, it is not possible to find a general procedure for doing this as the configu-
ration of these functions and the setpoint conditions must be known and checked. Es-
pecially, possible interlocking conditions of the switching devices (circuit breakers, iso-
lators, grounding electrodes) must be observed and checked.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.3.2 Switching on and of the test mode and the transmission blocking
If the device is connected to a control system (SICAM Station Controller), the user can
influence information transmitted to the control center.
If the test mode is switched ON, messages transmitted by a SIPROTEC4 device to
a central station are marked with an additional test bit indicating that these messages
do not concern actual faults. In addition to this, the user can determine by activating
the transmission blocking that no messages at all are transmitted via the system in-
terface during a test operation.
Section 7.2.3 describes how to activate/deactivate the test mode and the transmission
blocking. Be aware that the device processing by means of DIGSI 4 requires Online
operating mode for using these test functions.
8.3.3 Checking switching statuses of the binary inputs/outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify
control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during
start-up. The test feature should not be used for routine maintenance when the device
and protected equipment are in service (hot conditions).
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4
results in an actual and immediate, corresponding change in the SIPROTEC
device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers will be operated by these
actions!
Note: After the Hardware Test is complete, the device enters a start-up phase. All
message buffers are erased. If necessary, the message buffers should be read out be-
fore.
The Hardware Test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:
q Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
q Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window.
q Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name
opens (see Figure 8-11).
Hardware Test The dialog box is horizontally divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for
Dialog Box output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated
with an appropriately marked switching area. By clicking in an area, components with-
in the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present conditions of the hardware components are symbol-
ically shown. The present physical conditions of the binary inputs and output relays
are shown as symbols for open and closed contacts. The present condition of a light-
emitting diode is shown as the symbol for an LED, turned on or off.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Schedule column, which is next to the Status column. The intended condition
offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the operating equipment, commands, or messages
that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.
Changing The displays of the intended conditions are shown as switching fields. To change the
Hardware condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the
Conditions Schedule column.
If the password was activated for Hardware Test, then Password No. 6 will be request-
ed before the first hardware modification is allowed. Only after entry of the correct
password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain pos-
sible while the dialog box is open.
Figure 8-11 Dialog Box for Hardware Test

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Note:
As soon as the first condition change of a hardware component is initiated under the
Hardware Test, then all components in that group (BI, REL or LED) are separated
from substation, or device-side, functionality. This means, for example, that external
signals to binary inputs would be ignored by the device if their status conditions
change and the test procedure had not been closed.
Local control is re-established when the dialog box is closed.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hardware
Display components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
for each component, if a command to change the condition is successfully per-
formed,
for all hardware components if the Update field is clicked,
for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update (20sec)
field is marked.
Ending the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
Procedure start-up period immediately after this. The dialog box closes. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions.
8.3.4 Switching test of the configured operating equipment
Switching via com- After the primary commissioning, all configured switching equipment should be
mand input switched on and off from the device by means of the integrated control. If this was not
yet performed within the framework of the previously described hardware test, the
switch position feedbacks coupled via binary inputs should be read out on the device
and compared with the actual switch position.
The switching procedure is described in section 7.3.2. Be aware that the switching au-
thority is set according to the used command source. With the switching mode, the
user can choose between locked and unlocked switching. In this case, he must be
aware that unlocked switching is a safety risk.
For a switch-off command to a circuit breaker, the user must be aware that an OFF-
ON test cycle can be initiated due to the cooperation with an external automatic re-
closing.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
DANGER!
A successfully started test cycle can lead to the closing of the circuit breaker!
8.3.5 Testing system interface
The DIGSI 4 device operation provides a function for testing if messages were trans-
mitted correctly via the system interface. Double-click the object Test messages for
system interface to open the dialog box Test system interface.
Figure 8-12 Dialog box: Test system interface
The Annunciation columns displays the display texts of all messages configured in
the matrix to the system interface. The Status SETPOINT serves to specify a value
for messages to be tested. Different input boxes are available, depending on the indi-

C53000-G1876-C102-2
vidual message type (e.g. Message appears/ Message disappears). Click on one of the
boxes to select the desired value from the drop-down list..
Warning!
Transmitting messages via the system interface by means of the test function has the
same effect like an actual message on the SIPROTEC device. Connected operating
equipment such as circuit breakers or isolators can be switched in this way! To avoid
this, you must activate the output blocking on the SIPROTEC device or mechanically
interrupt the connections.
Password no. 6 for hardware test menus is inquired as soon as you press the first key
in the Action column. After the correct password entry, you can now transmit the mes-
sages individually. To do this, click the button in the corresponding line. The corre-
sponding message is transmitted and can now be read out both in the operational
messages of the SIPROTEC device and in the central message equipment of the
system.
The release for additional test messages persists until the dialog box is closed.
Note:
The device performs an initial start-up when leaving the test mode. In this way, all
hardware components are again put in the operating status prescribed by the system
conditions. However, all message buffers are erased, too. If required, you should
therefore read out the message buffers before the initial start-up procedure.
Ending the proce- To end the system interface test, click Close. The dialog box closes and during the sub-
dure sequent initial start-up, the device is for a short time not ready for operation.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
8.4 Switching the device available for operation
Tighten the screws. All terminal screws also not used ones must be tightened.
The setting values should be checked again, if they were modified during the tests. In
addition to this, it is particularly important to check if all power system data, control and
additional functions were set correctly in the configuration parameters (sections 6.1.1,
6.1.2 and 6.4).
The user should check the device-internal clock and set/synchronize it if necessary,
provided that it is not synchronized automatically. Further details on this subject are
described in section 7.2.1.
Erase the message buffers via the path MAIN MENU Annunciation Delete/Set
to ensure that these buffers will only receive information on actual results and statuses
(see section 7.1.1). The meters of the switching statistic are set to the output values
in the same selection box (see section 7.1.2).
The meters of the operational measured values (e.g. working meters) are reset via the
path: MAIN MENU Measurement Reset (see section 7.1.3).
Press the key ESC (if necessary, several times) to return to the default display. The de-
fault display appears in the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured val-
ues).
The displays on the front cover of the device are deleted by pressing the LED key in
order to ensure that they only deliver information on actual events and statuses. In this
context, saved output relays are reset, too. When pressing the LED key, the config-
urable LEDs on the front cover light up, which means that the LEDs are checked, too.
If the LEDs display statuses relevant by that moment, these LEDs, of course, dont go
out.
The green RUN LED must light up, whereas the red ERROR must not light up.
If a test switch exists, it must be switched to the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Maintenance and troubleshooting 9
This chapter informs you an the maintenance measures which are necessary and rec-
ommended for ensuring the reliability of the SIPROTEC 6MD663/6MD664 device,
which modules should be checked or exchanged in routine intervals and how to be-
have in case of a malfunction of the device.
9.1 General 9-2

9.2 Routine checks 9-3
9.3 Maintenance measures 9-4
9.4 Fault locating 9-9
9.5 Corrective action/repairs 9-12
9.6 Return 9-16

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Maintenance and troubleshooting
9.1 General
Digital SIPROTEC protection and control equipment has no special requirements

with regard to maintenance. All measuring and signal-processing circuits are solid
state. All input modules are solid state as well. The output relays are equipped with a
protective cover.
As the device is mainly self-monitoring, hardware and software problems are signalled
automatically. This ensures high reliability of the device and maintenance checks in
short intervals are unnecessary.
As soon as the device detects a hardware problem, it blocks automatically. The de-
vice ready relay drops out and signals a malfunction via its life contact. If faults are
detected in the external connection circuits, the device usually only outputs a mes-
sage.
Detected software errors initiate a processor reset and a restart. If an error could not
be remedied via the restart, the device performs a second restart. If three consecutive
restarts did not lead to a success, the device is automatically taken out of operation.
The red ERROR LED on the front cover lights up. The device ready signaling relay
drops out and signals the fault via its life contact.
For fault diagnostic purposes, the error reactions can be called in chronological order
as operational messages (see Section 7.1.1).
When the device is connected to the substation control and protection system or an-
other central storage equipment, monitoring messages are also transmitted to the
control station via the serial port.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
9.2 Routine checks
A routine check of the logic links and routings is not required as these components are
part of the continuously monitored firmware programs. The maintenance intervals in-
tended for checking or servicing the system can also be used to perform an operation-
al check of the control equipment. This is due to the fact that maintenance mainly is
executed for checking the device ports, i.e. the connection to the system.
The steps listed below are recommendations. If the result of one or several steps
proves a malfunction, follow the instructions described in Section 9.4.
o Make sure that the green RUN LED on the front cover lights up and that the red ER-
ROR LED does not light up.
o The LEDs on the front cover must indicate that of the current device and system status
are OK.
o Press the LED key. All LEDs (except the red ERROR LED) light up.
o For checking the analog inputs, retrieve the operational measuring variables (see Sec-
tion 7.1.3) and compare them with the actual measuring variables.
o Retrieve the operational measuring variables (see Section 7.1.1.2). Make sure that
they do not contain any entries with regard to problems of the device, of the measuring
variables or other abnormal information.
o Initiate a device restart as a restart provides for a complete hardware test. During the
restart, the device is not ready for operation. Press the MENU key on the front cover, use
the arrow keys and via 7HVW'LDJQRVLV for a 'HYLFHUHVHW and then
press the ENTER key. By means of the PC equipped with the DIGSI 4 program, you will
find this at 7HVWIXQFWLRQV by double-clicking 'HYLFHUHVHW A password inquiry
is displayed next. Enter password no. 4 (for test and diagnosis) and confirm the restart
with <HV.
o Additional interfaces can also be checked via the PC at 7HVWIXQFWLRQV. At +DUG
ZDUH the program indicates the Actual statuses of all binary inputs and outputs in
tables: LEDs, binary inputs, binary outputs. You can compare them with the actual sta-
tuses. However, the statuses should not be changed during operation.
Warning!
Changing of the states of the binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs must not be done with
test features during normal operation. Any such change immediately affects the inputs
and outputs of the device, and therefore the connected switching devices! This in-
cludes, for instance, non-interlocked primary switching!
o The command circuits can be checked via operator actions. Instructions on this sub-
ject are provided in Section 7.3.1.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
9.3 Maintenance measures
9.3.1 Replacing the buffer battery
Messages and oscillographic fault records of the device are stored in battery-buffered
RAM. A buffer battery must be inserted to preserve these messages/records in case
of a power failure. The buffer battery is also required to ensure that the internal system
clock with the calendar continue to function in case of an auxiliary voltage failure.
The battery should be replaced if the operational message %DWWHU\IDXOW is dis-
played, but at the latest after about 10 years of service. For devices with UL listing,
only UL-compliant batteries should be used to make sure that UL homologation is pre-
served.
Recommended Battery:
Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA. For example:
VARTA Order Number 6127 501 501
Duracell
Eveready
The procedure for replacing the battery is depends on the construction of the device.
Following are the instructions for a device for surface or cabinet mounting, and for a
device with a remote operator control unit.
9.3.1.1 Replacing the battery with a housing for panel surface or cabinet mounting
The battery is inserted at the front edge of the processor module (CPU). The front cov-
er must be removed for replacing the battery.
Proceed as described below to replace the battery:
o Retrieve device messages and metered values. This should be done via the front op-
erator interface using a PC with the DIGSI 4 operator program; in this way, the infor-
mation is stored on the PC.
Note: All of the device configuration and control settings are not affected by a power
supply interruption. They are saved independently of the battery. The settings are not
lost when the battery is removed, nor are the settings affected if the device operates
without a battery.
o Have the replacement battery ready.
Caution!
Do not short the battery! Do not reverse the polarity of the battery! Do not recharge the
battery!

C53000-G1876-C102-2
o Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches for both terminals.
Caution!
nectors must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise,
touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or
remove the port plugs under live conditions!
Warning!
Hazardous voltages can exist in the device, even after disconnecting the power supply
or withdrawing the boards! Capacitors can be charged.
o Remove the front panel and loosen the screws that are securing the front panel.
o Carefully pull off the front panel. The front panel is connected to the internal CPU print-
ed circuit board with a short ribbon-cable. At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable be-
tween the front panel and the CPU () board. To disconnect the cable, push up on
the top latch of the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug con-
nector. Carefully set aside the front panel.
o The battery is located on the bottom-front side of the CPU () board. See Figure 9-1.
Battery Grip
Battery
+
G1
Slot 5 Slot 19 Processor board CPU

2
22
2 Input/output board I/O
Figure 9-1 Front View without Front Panel Position of Buffer Battery (simplified and re-
duced)
o Remove the old battery from the snap-on connector using the plastic battery grip
shown in Figure 9-1.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
o Remove the battery grip from the old battery, and place the grip on the new battery.
o Insert the new battery according to Figure 9-1.
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU () board and the front panel. Be espe-
cially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use any force!
o Press the interlockings of the plug-in connector.
o Carefully replace the front panel. Fasten the panel to the case with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
o Connect the auxiliary voltage again. After the device reset, the messages and metered
values can be loaded back into the device.
If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface,
then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Sub-section 7.2.1 if assistance is
needed to set the clock.
Warning!
The used battery contains Lithium. Do not throw the battery into the trash!
Do not reverse the polarity! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the bat-
tery into a fire! Explosion hazard!
9.3.1.2 Battery replacement with a housing for panel surface mounting with a remote operator control
unit
The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. If a battery
replacement is necessary, this battery does not need to be replaced by a new one.
The front cover of the operator control unit includes a G2 snap-on grip for a battery.
The procedure of replacing a battery is described below.
o Retrieve device messages preferably via the front operating interface using a PC with
the DIGSI 4 program; in this way, information is stored on the PC.
without a battery.
o Remove the caps from the front cover of the operator control unit.
Caution!
battery!
o Untighten the screws and remove the front cover.

o Insert the new battery into the snap-on grid as shown in Figure 9-2.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
G2
+ +
Battery

Figure 9-2 Rear view of the front cover with inserted battery
o Carefully replace the front cover. Fasten the panel to the case with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Connect the auxiliary voltage again. After the device reset, the messages and metered
values can be loaded back into the device.
If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface,
then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Sub-section 7.2.1 if assistance is
needed to set the clock.
Warning!
9.3.1.3 Battery replacement with a housing for panel surface mounting without a remote operator
control unit
The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. If a battery
replacement is necessary, the device must be removed from the wall by untightening
the screws.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
The buffery exchange procedure is described below.

o Retrieve device messages preferably via the front operating interface using a PC with
the DIGSI 4 program; in this way, information is stored on the PC.
without a battery.
Caution!
battery!
Caution!
nectors must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise,
touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or
remove the port plugs under live conditions!
Warning!
o Untighten the screws to remove the device from the wall.

o Replace the old battery by a new one (see Section 9.3.1.1).
o Fix the device again on the wall and tighten the screws.
o Apply the auxiliary power supply again. After the device restart, the messages and
metered values can be loaded again into the device.
Provided that the internal system clock is not synchronized automatically via one of
the serial ports, it can be set now as described in Section 7.2.1.
Warning!

C53000-G1876-C102-2
9.4 Fault locating
If a device reports a problem or failure, the procedure below is recommended.

If none of the LEDs on the front panel are lit, then verify that the:
q Printed circuit boards are fully inserted, in the correct slots, and properly connected
to the front panel.
q Are the plugs of the ribbon cables inserted at the correct places and did they snap
into place correctly?
q Are the auxiliary voltage level and the polarity correct at the corresponding connec-
tions (Connection drawings are shown in Appendix A.)
q Fuse in the power supply has not blown. The location of the fuse is shown in Figure
9-6. If the fuse needs to be replaced, see Sub-section 9.5.2.
If the red ERROR LED is on and the green RUN LED is off, then the device has
recognized an internal fault. Re-initializing the device can be attempted, see Section
9.2.
If you see the following display, the device has arrived in Monitor-mode. In this case
you may initialize the device via DIGSI 4:
021,725

(TXLSPHQWGDWD!
8VHULQWHUIDFH!
6\VWHP,IDFH!
5HVHW!
6LHPHQVLQVWHQ!
Figure 9-3 Monitor text in the device display
q Connect the operating interface of the SIPROTEC 4 device with the PC and call
the DIGSI 4 program.
q In the menu line at 'HYLFH, select the ,QLWLDOL]HGHYLFH option (Figure 9-4).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 9-4 Initializing the device via DIGSI 4
q Enter the password for the settings group (no. 7, see chapter 4, Section 4.16). The
device display first disappears from the screen. After a successful initialization, the
LED signal again a normal operation and the default display is shown again. The
device-specific setting values have been loaded again into the device, provided that
they have been stored in the PC during commissioning. The device is ready for op-
eration.
Additional support If these steps do not resolve the problem, please call your local Siemens representa-
tive or customer hotline.
Our customer hotline needs the following information to assist you:
the complete MLFB (order number) of the device
the serial number of the device (BF...)
the firmware version
the bootsystem version
This data can be retrieved in the display of the device ready for operation. The re-
quired submenu can be accessed via 0$,10(18 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS([WUDV
0/)%9HUVLRQ. The MLFB and the factory number can be seen from the rating
panel on the device housing.
In addition to this, this data can also be retrieved from the file created in DIGSI 4 for
the device, as illustrated in Figure 9-5.
q In the offline mode, select the 3URSHUWLHV option from the )LOH menu line. The
desired data is displayed in the 'HYLFH tab.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Figure 9-5 Retrieving the Device Data in DIGSI 4

C53000-G1876-C102-2
9.5 Corrective action/repairs
9.5.1 Software measures
A restart of the processor system, as described in Section 9.2, can be done as an at-
tempt to solve a problem. Setting changes can be made to solve simple problems,
such as sporadic alarms from elements of the measured value supervision. These at-
tempts of solving problems can be done while the device is in service.
If a processor restart or setting change does not remedy the problem, then no further
action should be done while the device is in service. Instead, replace the device with
a tested spare.
9.5.2 Hardware measures
Hardware modifications or repair should be limited in scope to changes that are abso-
lutely necessary. Some examples of hardware repair are changing the mini-fuse in the
power supply and replacing a printed circuit board or module.
Hardware modifications or repair should only be done by experienced personnel. Do
not insert or extract a printed circuit board unless the device is completely isolated.
Soldering work must not be done on the printed circuit boards.
Dismounting the The device must be dismounted if work is to be done on the printed circuit boards. The
device procedure below should be used.
o Preparing the workplace: Prepare a support appropriate for electrostatic sensitive de-
vices (ESD). In addition to this, the following tools are required:
a screw driver, blade width 5 to 6 mm,
a crosstip screw driver Pz size 1,
a socket spanner, width across flats 4.5 mm.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove the port plugs under live
conditions!
Warning!
o Withdraw all connectors from the rear panel of the device.

If FO connections exist, they must be protected against impurities.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
o On the rear panel of the device, untighten the studs of the DSUB socket on position
A.
o If the device has some more system interfaces on the rear panel (in addition to the
service interface on position A), the two transversely positioned screws must be un-
tightened, respectively.
o In case of the surface mounting variant, untighten the screws and remove the device
from the wall.
o Remove the caps from the front cover and untighten the then accessible screws.
o Remove the front cover and carefully tilt it aside.
For devices equipped with a remote operator unit, the front cover can be removed di-
rectly as soon as the screws have been untightened.
S
o Remove the plug-in connectors of the ribbon cable between the CIP processor board
and the front cover from the front cover. To do this, press the lockings on the top and
bottom of the plug-in connector to press out the plug-in connector of the ribbon cable.
This step is not necessary for devices equipped with a remote operator control unit.
Instead of this, the user must remove the 7-pole X16 plug-in connector behind the
DSUB socket from the CPU processor module (this plug-in connector leads to the 68-
pole plug-in connector of the device rear panel).
o Withdraw the plug-in connector of the ribbon cable between the CPU processor board
input/output boards.
o The boards can now be withdrawn from the housing and positioned on a support suit-
able for electrostatic sensitive components.
Replacing the fine-

wire fuse
o Hold available replacement fuse 5 x 20 mm. Make sure to use the correct nominal val-
ue, the correct inertia and the correct identification letter.
The fuse type depends on the auxiliary voltage, e.g. for 24/48 V DC a T4H250V fuse
according to IEC 60127-2 is required (see Table 9-1). To respect again the UL ho-
mologation, only UL-complying fuses can be used (e.g. Wickmann, Type 181).
o Withdraw the CPU processor board which also provides for the power supply. Position
it on the support suitable for electrostatic sensitive components.
o Withdraw the defective fuse from its grip on the upper edge of the board (Figure 9-6).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
F1
Figure 9-6 Fine-wire fuse of the power supply on the CPU processor board
Table 9-1 Selection of the Power Supply Fuse for the device
Variant Nominal auxiliary volt. Fuse

6MD663/42 24 V to 48 V T4H250V
6MD663/43 60 V T2H250V
6MD663/44 110 V T2H250V
6MD663/45 220 bis 250 V T2H250V
o Insert new fuse into grip according to Figure 9-6.

o Carefully reinsert the CPU processor board. The corresponding board slot can be
seen from Figure 9-1.
Reassembling the To reassemble the device:

Device
o By first attaching to the I/O board, connect the ribbon-cable between the I/O board and
the CPU board. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not
use force! Be sure the connectors latch.
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the front panel. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the plug con-
nectors latch.
For the surface-mounted device, first connect the ribbon-cable from the 68-pin con-
nector on the back of the device. Then attach connector X16 under the D-subminiature
port on the CPU board. Make sure all connections are done properly.
o Fasten the front cover to the case with the screws.
o Re-place the caps.
o For the surface-mounting variant, fasten the device again on the wall using the
screws.
o Tighten the screws of the rear interfaces.
o Plug all connectors on the corresponding sockets.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
o Reconnect FO connections, if existing. Hilfsspannung fr das Gert wieder eins
Warning!
Dont look into the fiber optic elements!
Connect the device again to the auxiliary voltage. If the green RUN LED still does
not light up, this is due to an error or a short circuit in the internal power supply. The
device should be returned to the factory (see Section 9.6).

C53000-G1876-C102-2
9.6 Return
Siemens strongly recommends that no further repairs on defective devices, boards,

or components be done. Special electronic components are used for which proce-
dures for preventing electrostatic discharges must be followed. Most importantly, spe-
cial production techniques are necessary to avoid damaging the wave-soldered multi-
layer boards, the sensitive components, and the protective varnish.
If a problem cannot be solved by the procedures described in Section 9.5, then the
complete device (including front cover) should be returned to the factory.
The original transport packaging material should be used for returning a device. If al-
ternative packaging material is used, then the device and other contents must be pro-
vided with protection against shock and vibration according to IEC 60255211
Class 2 and IEC 60255212 Class 1.
Before returning a device, retrieve and save all of the configuration, function and con-
trol settings, and any important information. Note any changes that were made to the
jumpers on the internal printed circuit boards after the device was first delivered.
Note:
Repaired devices are returned from the factory with all jumpers on the printed circuit
boards set in the original positions according to the ordering number. All configuration,
function and control parameters have the default setting.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data 10
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 6MD663/6MD664 de-
vice and its individual functions, including the limiting values that must not be exceed-
ed under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped
6MD663/6MD664 devices are followed by the mechanical data, with dimensional
drawings.
10.1 General Device Data 10-2

10.2 Breaker Control 10-12
10.3 Circuit breaker synchronization 10-13
10.5 Additional functions 10-17
10.6 Dimensions 10-18

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.1 General Device Data
10.1.1 Analog inputs and outputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal Current IN 1 A or 5 A

Burden per Phase and Ground Path
for IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
for IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
Thermal (rms) 200 A for 1 s
15 A for 10 s
12 A continuous
Precision 0.5 % of measured value for 50 % to 120 % IN
(at reference conditions,
see Section 10.4)
Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage 80 V to 125 V

Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
Thermal (rms) 220 V continuous
Precision 0.5 % of measured value for 50 % to 120 % UN
(at reference conditions,
see Section 10.4)
Measuring Trans- Input Current -20 mA to +20 mA

ducer Inputs Overload capacity 100 mA continuous
Input Resistance 10
Power input 5,8 mW for 24 mA
Precision 1 % of nominal value (at reference conditions)
Limit range behav- Overflow Phase current > 1.2 of nominal current
ior, current The derived variables P, Q, S, cos , sin and
also overflow as a consequence.
Limit range behav- Overflow secondary input voltage on device > 120 Veff
ior, voltage The derived phase-phase voltages, as well as
the derived variables P, Q, S, cos , sin and
also overflow as a consequence.
Limit range behav- Zero, invalid a line voltage < 0.1 of nominal voltage
ior, powers or the related apparent power S < 1 %
Overflow a phase current or a phase-ground voltage
in overflow

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Limit range behav- Zero, invalid a line voltage < 0.1 of nominal voltage
ior, cos , or the related apparent power S < 1 %
sin , Overflow a phase current or a phase-ground voltage
in overflow
Limit range behav- Zero, invalid Frequency < 45 Hz or secondary input voltage on
ior, frequency device < 10 Veff
Overflow Frequency > 65 Hz
10.1.2 Auxiliary voltage
Direct current Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH 24 to 48 V 60 V
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 V 48 to 72 V
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH 110 V 220 to 250 V

Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 132 V 176 to 300 V
ripple voltage,
peak 15 % of the auxiliary voltage
IEC 6025511
Power input
normal (no relay picked up)approx. 10.0 W
per picked up relay additionally approx. 0.27 W
Bridging Time for 50 ms for U 110 V
Failure/Short Circuit 20 ms for U 24 V
IEC 6025511
10.1.3 Binary inputs and outputs
Binary inputs Number

6MD663 50 (configurable)
Nominal voltage range 24 V to 250 V, bipolar

Peak current for High level 80 mA ( = 1.5 ms)
Current input, picked up approx. 1.8 mA per BI
Switching thresholds changeable via jumpers

for nominal voltages 24 to 48 V Uan 19 V
and 60 V Uab 14 V
for nominal voltages 110 V Uan 88 V
Uab 66 V

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
for nominal voltages 220 to 250 V Uan 176 V

Uab 132 V
Maximum permissible voltage 300 V
Input pulse suppression Coupling via 220 nF coupling capacity
for a switching voltage of 220 V and a
recovery time >60 ms
Output Relays Command/Signalling relays
Number: 1) 6MD663 35 (configurable)

Contacts per relay 1 NO contact
Switching capacityON 1000 W/VA
OFF 30 VA
40 W ohmic
25 W for L/R 50 ms
Switching voltage 250 V

Perm. current per contact and 5 A continuous
total current of common contacts 30 A for 0.5 s
Life contact 1 mit 1 NO contact or 1 NC contact

(switchable)
Switching capacity ON 30 W/VA

OFF 20 VA
30 W ohmic
25 W for L/R 50 ms
Switching voltage 250 V

Permissible current 1 A continuous
1) The maximally permissible number of picked up relays is 29.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.1.4 Communication interfaces
Operator interface Connection front side, not blocked, RS 232,

9-pole DSUB socket
for connecting a PC
Operation with DIGSI 4
Transmission voltage min. 4800 Bd; max. 115200 Bd
Delivery position: 38 400 Bd; Parity: 8E1
recommended: 57 600 Bd
Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 49 feet
Service interface Connection isolated interface for data transfer

Operation with DIGSI 4
Transmission speed min. 4 800 Bd, max. 115200 Bd
Delivery position: 38400 Bd
RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 depending on order variant
Connection rear panel, slot C
9-pole DSUB socket
shielded data cable
Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz

RS232
Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 49 feet

RS485
Maximum Distance of Transmission 1000 m

Fiber optics (FO)
FO connector type ST connector

rear panel, slot D
Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Laser class 1 accord. EN 608251/ 2 for use of FO 50/125 m or
for use of FO 62,5/125 m
Optical Link Signal Attenuation max. 8 dB, for FO 62.5/125 m
Maximum Distance of Transmission max. 1.5 km
Character Idle State selectable: factory setting Light off

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Inter-relay commu- Connection isolated interface for data transfer

nication interface
Transmission voltage min. 4 800 Bd, max. 115200 Bd
RS485
Connection rear panel, slot C
9-pole DSUB socket
shielded data cable
System interface RS232/RS485/ isolated interface for data transfer

Profibus RS485/Profibus FO to a control center
depending on order variant
RS232
Connection rear panel, slot B
9-pole DSUB socket
Transmission voltage min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
RS485
9-pole DSUB socket
Transmission voltage min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Maximum Distance of Transmission max. 1 km
Profibus RS485
9-pole DSUB socket
Transmission voltage up to 12 MBd
Maximum Distance of Transmission 1000 m for 93,75 kBd
500 m for 187,5 kBd
200 m for 1,5 MBd
100 m for 12 MBd
Profibus FO
FO connector type ST connector

Single/double ring, dep. on order variant

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Transmission voltage up to 1,5 MBd

recommended: > 500 kBd for normal version
57 600 Bd for remote oper. contr. unit
Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Laser class 1ac. to EN 608251/ 2 for use of FO 50/125 m or
for use of FO 62,5/125 m
Optical Link Signal Attenuation max. 8 dB, for FO 62,5/125 m
Maximum Distance of Transmission max. 1,5 km
Time synchroniza- Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG BSignal

tion interface Connection rear panel, slot A
9-pole DSUB socket
Signal nominal voltages optionally 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
Signal level and loads:
Signal nominal input voltage

5V 12 V 24 V
UIHigh 6,0 V 15,8 V 31 V
UILow 1,0 V for IILow = 0,25 mA 1,4 V for IILow = 0,25 mA 1,9 V for IILow = 0,25 mA
IIHigh 4,5 mA to 9,4 mA 4,5 mA to 9,3 mA 4,5 mA to 8,7 mA
RI 890 for UI = 4 V 1930 for UI = 8,7 V 3780 for UI = 17 V
640 for UI = 6 V 1700 for UI = 15,8 V 3560 for UI = 31 V
10.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product standards)

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
DIN 57 435 Section 303
See also standards for individual tests
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 602555, IEC 6087021

High Voltage Test (routine test) 2.0 kV (eff), 50 Hz
all circuits, except auxiliary voltage,
binary inputs, measuring transducer
inputs and communications and
time synchronization interfaces
High Voltage Test (routine test) 3.5 kV
Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs and
measuring transducer inputs
High Voltage Test (routine test) 500 V (eff), 50 Hz
only isolated communications
and time synchronization interfaces
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1,2/50 s; 0,5 J; 3 positive
all circuits, except communications and 3 negative shocks in distances of 5 s
and time synchronization interfaces
class III

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
EMC Tests for Im- Standards: IEC 602556 and 22, (product standards)
munity (Type Tests) EN 500822 (generic standard)
DIN 57 435 Teil 303
High Frequency Test 2,5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms;
IEC 60255221, class III 400 Surges per s: Test Dur.2 s; Ri = 200
and VDE 0435 Section 303, class III
Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
IEC 60255222 class IV discharge, both pole.:; 150 pF; Ri = 330
and IEC 6100042, class IV
Irradiation with HF Field,
non-modulated 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
IEC 60255223 (Report) class III
Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
amplitude modulated 1 kHz
IEC 6100043, class III
Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency
pulse modulated 200 Hz;
IEC 6100043/ENV 50204,Kl. III duty cycle of 50 %
Fast Trans. Dist. Variables/Burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; Burst length = 15 ms;
IEC 60255224 and IEC 6100044, repetition frequ. 300 ms; both polarities;
class IV Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
High Energy Surge Voltages Pulse: 1,2/50 s
(SURGE), IEC 6100045
Installation class 4
Auxiliary voltage common mode:4 kV; 12 ; 9 F
diff. mode: 2 kV; 2 ; 18 F
Measuring inputs, binary inputs common mode:4 kV; 42 ; 0,5 F
and relay outputs diff. mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0,5 F
Line Conducted HF, amplitude module.10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 6100046, class III
Power System Frequency Magnetic
IEC 6100048, class IV 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
IEC 602556 0,5 mT; 50 Hz
Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2,5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1,5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave; 50 surges per s;
Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200
Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 pulses per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s; Ri = 80
Damped Oscillations 2,5 kV (peak value), alternating polarity
IEC 60694, IEC 61000412 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz,
Ri = 200
Irradiation 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
EMC Tests For Standard: EN 500811 (generic standard)

Noise Emission
Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
(type test
only auxiliary voltage Limit value class B
IECCISPR 22
Radio Noise Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IECCISPR 22 Limit value class B
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Standards: IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068

Shock Stress Dur-
Vibration Sinusoidal
ing Operation
IEC 60255211, class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0,075 mm Amplitude;
IEC 6006826 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g Acceleration
frequency sweep rate1 octaves/min
20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another.
Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255212, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, Duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068227 resp. 3 shocks in both directions of the
3 axes
Vibration for earthquakes Sinusoidal
IEC 60255212, class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz 4 mm Amplitude
IEC 6006833 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: 2 mm Amplitude
(vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g Acceleration
(horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0,5 g Acceleration
(vertical axis)
1 cycle in 3 vertical axes
Vibration and Standards: IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682

shock resistance
Vibration Sinusoidal
from transport
IEC 60255211, class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7,5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 6006826 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g Acceleration
20 cycles in 3 vertical axes
Shock Half-sine shaped
3 axes
Continuous Shock Half-sine shaped
3 axes

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Temperatures Standards: IEC 602556

Recommended operating temperature 5 C to +55 C
Limiting, standby mode
operating temperatures Legibility of
display may be
20 C to +70 C restricted from +55 C
in neutral position, ie. no pickup and no messages
Limiting temperatures for storage 25 C to +55 C
Limiting temperatures for Transport 25 C to +70 C
STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.
Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year 75% relative

humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93%
relative humidity.
CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to
direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause conden-
sation to occur.
10.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical
utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure elec-
tromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended:
All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel
as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable
surge suppression components.
For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is ener-
gized. When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards for
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The mod-
ules and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.
10-10 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.1.9 Construction
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 10.6
Approx. weight
6MD663 in case for flush mounting 10.5 kg
6MD664 in case for flush mounting 11 kg
6MD663 in case for remote 12.5 kg

operator control unit
6MD664 in case for remote 13 kg
operator control unit
Remote operator control unit 2.5 kg

Protection class according to IEC 60529
for operating equipment
in case for flush mounting front IP 51
rear IP 20
in case for remote control unit IP 20
remote operator control unit front IP 51
rear IP 50
For personal protection IP 2x Terminals covered with cap
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 10-11

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.2 Breaker Control
Number of switching devices (breakers) depends on the number of binary inputs

and outputs
6MD663 2-pole: 8 breaker and
11/2-pole: 10 breakers
6MD664 2-pole: 11 breakers and
11/2-pole: 14 breakers
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Single point, double point, output
indications, taggings, transformer tap
indications, bit patterns and meters
Commands Single-pole and double-pole commands
1-, 11/2- and 2-pole,
pulse and continuous outputs
PLC PLC logic, DIGSI-CFC 1)
Local control Control via menu, control keys,
function key assignments
Remote control via communication interfaces
control and protection system (e.g. SICAM)
DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem)
1
) DIGSI-CFC is the graphical user interface for the PLC programmable modules.
10-12 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.3 Circuit breaker synchronization
Operating modes Test programs Synchronization check,

line dead busbar
energized,
Busbar dead line
energized,
Line and busbar dead,
Direct control,
or combinations
Synchronization Switch ON possible with synchronous and
asynchronous network conditions
(with circuit breaker operating time)
Voltages Maximum working voltage 20 V to 140 V (phase/phase)(stepping 1 V)

U< for dead state 1 V to 60 V (phase/phase)(stepping 1 V)
U> for energized state 20 V to 125 V (phase/phase)(stepping 1 V)
Tolerances 2 % of pick-up value or 2 V
Drop-out conditions about 0.9 (U>) or 1.1 (U<); max. 1 V
U measurement Modulus difference 1 V to 40 V (phase/phase)(stepping 0.1 V)

Tolerance 1V
Synchronous net- measurement 2 to 60 (stepping 1)

work system condi- Tolerance 2
tions
fmeasurement 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz (stepping 0,01Hz)
Tolerance 15 mHz
The maximum permissible frequency differ-
ence
depends on the CB operating time.
(s. Section 6.13.1)
max. phase displacement 5 for f 1 Hz
10 for f > 1 Hz
ON delay 0,00 s to 60,00 s (stepping 0.01 s)
Asynchronous net- fmeasurement 0,03 Hz to 2,00 Hz (stepping 0,01Hz)

work system condi- Tolerance 15 mHz
tions The maximum permissible frequency differ-
ence
depends on the CB operating time.
(s. Section 6.13.1)
Limit synchronous/asynchronous adjustable from 0.01 Hz to 0.04 Hz in
steps of 1 mHz
Circuit breaker operating time 0.01 s to 0.60 s (stepping 0.01 s)
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 10-13

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Times minimum measuring time about 80 ms

Synchronization function delay 250 ms
after start
maximum waiting time 0.01 s to 600.00 s (stepping 0.01 s)
(max. synchronization duration)
Tolerance of all times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Operating range Synchro checkk at nominal frequency 50 Hz 2 Hz

60 Hz 2 Hz
10-14 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.4 Operational measured values
Measuring trans- Operational measured values for currentsIL1; IL2; IL3

ducers technical
in A (kA) primary and in A sec. or in % IN
data
Range 10 % to 120 % IN
Tolerance < 1 % of IN for f - fN< 5 Hz
and for 10 % to 50 % IN
< 0,5 % of meas. value for f - fN< 5 Hz
and for 50 % to 120 % IN
Operational measured values for voltagesUmeasured
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % UN
Range 10 % to 120 % von UN
Tolerance < 1 % of UN for f - fN< 5 Hz
and for 10 % to 50 % UN
< 0,5 % of meas. value for f - fN< 5 Hz
and for 50 % to 120 % UN
Operational measured values for powers Apparent power in kVA (MVA or
GVA) primary and in % SN
Tolerance for 50 % to 120 % S/SN
< 1 % of meas. value for f - fN< 5 Hz
for U/UN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Reactive powerin kW (MW or GW)
primary and in % PN
Tolerance for cos = 0,707 to 1,00
for U/UN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Reactive powerin kVAR (MVAR or
GVAR) primary and in % QN
Tolerance for sin = 0,707 to 1,00
for U/UN, I/IN = 50 to 120 %
Operational measured value power factor cos
Tolerance for cos = 0,707 to 1,00
< 1 % for f - fN< 5 Hz
for U/UN, I/IN = 50 to 120 % and
for cos < 0,707
< 0.01 %
Operational measured value power factor sin
Tolerance for sin = 0,707 to 1,00
< 1 % for f - fN< 5 Hz
for U/UN, I/IN = 50 to 120 % and
for sin < 0,707
< 0.01 %
Operational measured values for angle in
Tolerance < 0.5
Operational measured values for frequ. f in Hz
Tolerance 20 mHz for U/UN = 10 to 120 %
and for f = fN 5 Hz
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 10-15

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Measuring trans- Current

ducer limit range Overflow range Phase current > 1.2 IN
behavior The derived variables P, Q, C, sin ,
cos and then become invalid.
Voltage
Overflow range Voltage > 1.2 UN
The derived phase-phase voltages
as well as the derived variables P, Q, C,
sin , cos and then become invalid.
Powers P, Q, S
Zero range, are invalid a line voltage < 0.1UN or
the related apparent power S < 1 %
Overflow range a phase current or a phase-earth
voltage is in overflow
Phase angle sin , cos and

Zero range, are invalid a line voltage < 0.1UN or
the related apparent power S < 1 %
Frequency
Zero range, is invalid f < 45 Hz or
a line voltage < 0.1UN
Overflow range f > 45 Hz
Measured values Technical data of the 20 mA inputs

Nominal input current - 20 to 20 mADC
Measuring range - 24 to 24 mADC
Input resistor 1 1 %
Reactive power input 5.76 W for IIN = 24 mA
Tolerance 1.0 %, related to nominal value 20 mA
10-16 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.5 Additional functions
Time allocation Resolution for operational messages 1 ms

Max. time monitoring (internal clock) 0.01 %
Buffer battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Message Batter fault for insufficient
battery load
Commissioning Operational measured values

aids Switch test
Clock Time synchronization DCF77/ IRIG B signal

Binary input
Communication
Inter-relay Number participants in IRC combination maximum 16

communication
Number of informationen , each IRC maximum 32
participant can put on the IRC bus
Minimum pending period for messages 20 ms (due to IRC cycle time)
to be transmitted via
inter-relay communication
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 10-17

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
10.6 Dimensions
Panel surface and

cabinet mounting
29,5 172 34 29,5 172 29 30

Mounting plate Mounting plate
266
244
266
244
2 2
34
Side view (with plug-in terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
450
445 446 +2
6 5 or M4
255,8 0,3
245 + 1
5 or M4 6 6 5 or M4
5 or M4 6
5,4
7,3
Rear view 13,2
216,1 0,3 13,2
425.5 0,3 13,2
Dimensions in mm
Panel section
Figure 10-1 Dimensional drawing of a 6MD663/6MD664 for panel surface and cabinet mounting
10-18 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Panel mounting
with/without re-
mote operator con-
trol unit
Mounting plate Mounting plate

209,5 34 209,5 29 30
266
312,8
244
266
312,8
244
34
Side view (with plug-in terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
450
445
4,5
300 0,3
6,4
Rear view
25 100 0,3
200 0,3
300 0,3
400 0,3
Dimensions in mm
Fixation points on
mounting plate
Figure 10-2 Dimensional drawing of a 6MD663/6MD664 for surface mounting with/without operator control unit
6MD663/6MD664 Manual 10-19

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Technical Data
Remote operator
control unit
Connection cable
Mounting plate 68-pole to basic unit
29,5 27
Length 2,2 m 225
246,2 220
266
Side view Rear view
221 +2
5 or M4
255,8 0,3
247,2 +1
6
4,3
13,2 180 0,5

7,3 206,5 0,3
Panel section
Figure 10-3 Dimensional drawing of a remote operator control unit for a 6MD663/6MD664
10-20 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix A
This appendix primarily is a reference for the experienced user. It contains ordering
data, overview and connection diagrams as well a the pre-installed CFC plan.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A-2

A.2 Overview diagrams A-5
A.3 Connection examples A-18
A.4 Pre-installed CFC plan A-22
6MD663/6MD664 Manual A-1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
_ _ 0AA0
High-frequency bay control device 6MD66
Details
50 single-point indications 3
32 single-pole single-point commands (can also be summarized as double-pole/double-point commands)
3 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers, 2 measuring inputs 20 mA
65 single-point indications 4
42 single-pole single-point commands (can also be summarized as double-pole/double-point commands)
3 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers, 2 measuring inputs 20 mA
Nominal current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, switching threshold of binary inputs)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 17 V 1) 2
DC 60 V, threshold binary input 17 V 1) 3
DC 110 V,threshold binary input 73 V 1) 4
DC 220 V to 250 V, threshold binary input 154 V 1) 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case, remote operator control unit, in low-voltage case A
plug-in terminals (2-/3-pole connector)
Surface-mounting case, without operator control unit, in low-voltage case B
Surface-mounting case, remote operator control unit, in low-voltage case C
screw terminals (direct connection / ring- and fork-type cable lugs)
Flush-mounting case, with integrated local control unit (graphic display, keyboard) D
Flush-mounting case, mit integrierter local control (graphic display, keyboard) E
Surface-mounting case, without operator control unit, in low-voltage case F
Region-specific default settings/functions and language presettings

Region DE, 50 Hz, language German (language can be changed) A
Region world, 50/60 Hz, language English (language can be changed) B
Region USA (ANSI), language US English (language can be changed) C
System interfaces (device rear ports)

Profibus FMS Slave, electric RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST-connector 5
Profibus FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST-connector 6
Function interface (device rear ports)

No function interface 0
DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electric RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-connector 3
Inter-relay communication, electric RS485 4
Inter-relay communication, electric RS485 and DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-connector 5
1)
The thresholds can be changed per measuring input by means of plug-in jumpers - possible options: 17 V, 73 V and 154 V
A-2 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.1.1 Accessories
Interfaces Exchange modules for interfaces

Designation Ordering number
LWL 820 nm C73207-A322-D633-1
Profibus FMS RS485 C73207-A322-D601-1
Profibus FMS double ring C73207-A322-D602-1
Profibus FMS single ring C73207-A322-D603-1
Optical Link External converter for signal conversion (optical/electric) for use with inter-relay com-
Module (OLM) munication.

Optical Link Module 7XV5651-0BA00
Covering caps :
Covering cap for terminal type Ordering number

Voltage terminal 18-pole, current terminal 12-pole C73334-A1-C31-1
Voltage terminal 12-pole, current terminal 8-pole C73334-A1-C32-1
Connecting :
bridges
Connecting bridge for terminal type Ordering number
Voltage terminal 18-pole, 12-pole C73334-A1-C34-1
Current terminal 12-pole, 8-pole C73334-A1-C33-1
Socket case
Socket case Ordering number

2-pole C73334-A1-C35-1
3-pole C73334-A1-C36-1
Set-square for
mounting in 19"-
frame Designation Ordering number
Set-square C73165-A63-C200-2
Buffer battery
Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA Ordering number

VARTA 6127 501 501
SONNENSCHEIN 1110 150 301

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
Interface cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI 4..
Interface cable between PC and SIPROTEC Ordering number

Cable with 9-pole male/female connector 7XV5100-4
Round cable as- A 3-pole round cable assembly for communication between the SIPROTEC device
sembly, 3-pole and the PC or laptop is required for devices without an operating unit.

Round cable assembly, 3-pole C37195-A100-B65-1
Operator control Software for configuring and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices

software
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 4 protect. operating&configuration software Ordering number
DIGSI 4, basic packet, licence for 10 computers 7XS5400-0AA00

DIGSI 4, professional packet + all option packets 7XS5402-0AA0
The basic packet can be used for commissioning purposes.

The professional packet is required for configuring the 6MD66 bay control device, as
the basic packet does not include the Display Editor and the SIMATIC CFC.
Display Editor Software for creating default and control displays

(Option packet for DIGSI 4 full version)
Display Editor 4 Ordering number
Full version with licence for 10 computers 7XS5420-0AA0
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remote operation of protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
coupler) using DIGSI 4. Language: German
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Ordering number

SIMATIC CFC 4 Software for graphical setting of interlocking conditions and for creating extended
functions
SIMATIC CFC 4 Ordering number


C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.2 Overview diagrams
The overview diagrams for the 6MD663/6MD664 devices are illustrated on the follow-
ing pages.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.2.1 Housing for panel surface mounting and cabinet mounting
6MD663D/E
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BI16
G8 BI17
G9 BI18
G10 BI19
G11 BI20
G12
K15 BI21
K16 BI22
K17 BI23
K18 BI24
J1 BI25
J2 BI26
J3 BI27
J4 BI28
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12
Continue next page Continue next page

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
M15 BI36 BO21 M1

M16 BI37 BO22 M2
M17 BI38 M3
M18 BI39 BO25 M5
L1 BI40 BO26 M4
L2 BI41 M6
L3 BI42 BO29 M12
L4 BI43 BO30 M14
L5 BI44 M13
L6 BI45 BO23 M7
L7 BI46 BO24 M8
L8 BI47 BO27 M9
L9 BI48 BO28 M10
L10 BI49
M11
L11 BI50 BO31
L12 R1
BO32 R2
(+) R9 BO33 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO34 R5
(+) R11 MU2
R6
() R12
BO35 R7
R8
Life- 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power (~)
F1
supply - F2
Service port,
faces see Tables 8-11 and 8-

Pin assignments of the Inter-
optical D
Service port
or IRC, electric C
Profibus FMS B 12 in Section 8.2
IRIG B / DCF77 A
Front PC
port
Grounding on the Interference suppression

device rear panel capacitors at relay outputs,
Ceramic, 4,7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-1 Overview diagram 6MD663-D/E (panel surface and cabinet mounting)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
6MD664D/E
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BO21 M1
BI16
G8 BI17 BO22 M2
G9 BI18 M3
G10 BI19 BO25 M5
G11 BI20 BO26 M4
G12 M6
K15 BI21 BO29 M12
K16 BI22 BO30 M14
K17 BI23 M13
K18 BI24 BO23 M7
J1 BI25 BO24 M8
J2 BI26 BO27 M9
J3 BI27 BO28 M10
J4 BI28 M11
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12
M15 BI36
M16 BI37
M17 BI38
M18 BI39
L1 BI40
L2 BI41
L3 BI42
L4 BI43
L5 BI44
L6 BI45
L7 BI46
L8 BI47
L9 BI48
L10 BI49
L11 BI50
L12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
P15 BI51 BO31 P1

P16 BI52 BO32 P2
P17 BI53 P3
P18 BI54 BO35 P5
N1 BI55 BO36 P4
N2 BI56 P6
N3 BI57 BO39 P12
N4 BI58 BO40 P14
N5 BI59 P13
N6 BI60 BO33 P7
N7 BI61 BO34 P8
N8 BI62 BO37 P9
N9 BI63 BO38 P10
N10 BI64
P11
N11 BI65 BO41
N12 R1
BO42 R2
(+) R9 BO43 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO44 R5
(+) R11 MU2
() R12 R6
BO45 R7
R8
Life 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power (~)
F1
supply - F2
Service port, D

optical
Service port
C
or IRC, electric
Profibus FMS B 12 in Seection 8.2
IRIG B / DCF77 A
Front PC
port
Grounding Interference suppression

device rear panel capacitors of relay outputs,
Figure A-2 Overview diagram 6MD664-D/E (panel surface mounting and cabinet mounting)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.2.2 Housing for surface mounting with remote operator control unit
6MD663A/C
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BI16
G8 BI17
G9 BI18
G10 BI19
G11 BI20
G12
K15 BI21
K16 BI22
K17 BI23
K18 BI24
J1 BI25
J2 BI26
J3 BI27
J4 BI28
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
M15 BI36 BO21 M1

M16 BI37 BO22 M2
M17 BI38 M3
M18 BI39 BO25 M5
L1 BI40 BO26 M4
L2 BI41 M6
L3 BI42 BO29 M12
L4 BI43 BO30 M14
L5 BI44 M13
L6 BI45 BO23 M7
L7 BI46 BO24 M8
L8 BI47 BO27 M9
L9 BI48 BO28 M10
L10 BI49
M11
L11 BI50 BO31 R1
L12
BO32 R2
(+) R9 BO33 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO34 R5
(+) R11 MU2
() R12 R6
BO35 R7
R8
Life 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power F1
(~)
supply - F2
Service port,

D

optical
Service port
or IGK, electric C
Profibus FMS B 12 n Section 8.2
IRIG B / DCF77 A

Operator Operator Grounding

port unit device rear panel
Figure A-3 Overview diagram 6MD663A/C (panel surface mounting with remote operator control unit)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
6MD664A/C
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BO21 M1
BI16
G8 BI17 BO22 M2
G9 BI18 M3
G10 BI19 BO25 M5
G11 BI20 BO26 M4
G12 M6
K15 BI21 BO29 M12
K16 BI22 BO30 M14
K17 BI23 M13
K18 BI24 BO23 M7
J1 BI25 BO24 M8
J2 BI26 BO27 M9
J3 BI27 BO28 M10
J4 BI28 M11
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12
M15 BI36
M16 BI37
M17 BI38
M18 BI39
L1 BI40
L2 BI41
L3 BI42
L4 BI43
L5 BI44
L6 BI45
L7 BI46
L8 BI47
L9 BI48
L10 BI49
L11 BI50
L12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
P15 BI51 BO31 P1

P16 BI52 BO32 P2
P17 BI53 P3
P18 BI54 BO35 P5
N1 BI55 BO36 P4
N2 BI56 P6
N3 BI57 BO39 P12
N4 BI58 BO40 P14
N5 BI59 P13
N6 BI60 BO33 P7
N7 BI61 BO34 P8
N8 BI62 BO37 P9
N9 BI63 BO38 P10
N10 BI64
P11
N11 BI65 BO41
N12 R1
BO42 R2
(+) R9 BO43 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO44 R5
(+) R11 MU2
R6
() R12
BO45 R7
R8
Life 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power F1
(~)
supply - F2
Service port,

optical D
Service port
or IRC, electric C
IRIG B / DCF77 A

Operator Operator Grounding

port unit device rear panel
Figure A-4 Overview diagram 6MD664A/C (panel surface mounting with remote operator control unit)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.2.3 Housing for panel surface mounting without operator control unit
6MD663B/F
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BI16
G8 BI17
G9 BI18
G10 BI19
G11 BI20
G12
K15 BI21
K16 BI22
K17 BI23
K18 BI24
J1 BI25
J2 BI26
J3 BI27
J4 BI28
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
M15 BI36 BO21 M1

M16 BI37 BO22 M2
M17 BI38 M3
M18 BI39 BO25 M5
L1 BI40 BO26 M4
L2 BI41 M6
L3 BI42 BO29 M12
L4 BI43 BO30 M14
L5 BI44 M13
L6 BI45 BO23 M7
L7 BI46 BO24 M8
L8 BI47 BO27 M9
L9 BI48 BO28 M10
L10 BI49
M11
L11 BI50 BO31
L12 R1
BO32 R2
(+) R9 BO33 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO34 R5
(+) R11 MU2
() R12 R6
BO35 R7
R8
Life 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power (~)
F1
supply - F2
Service port,
D

optical
Service port
or IRC, electric C
IRIG B / DCF77 A

Figure A-5 Overview diagram 6MD663B/F (panel surface mounting without operator control unit)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
6MD664B/F
Q1 BO1 H1
IL1
Q2 BO2 H2
Q3 H3
IL2 BO5
Q4 H5
Q5 BO6 H4
IL3
Q6 H6
R13 U1 BO9 H12
R14 U2 BO10 H14
R15 U3 H13
R16 BO3 H7
R17 BO4 H8
U4
R18 BO7 H9
BO8 H10
F5 BI1 H11
F6 BI2 BO11 K1
F7 BI3 BO12 K2
F8 BI4 K3
F9 BI5 BO15 K5
F10 BO16 K4
H15 BI6 K6
H16 BI7 BO19 K12
H17 BI8 BO20 K14
H18 BI9
K13
G1 BI10 BO13 K7
G2 BI11 BO14
G3 K8
BI12
BO17 K9
G4 BI13
G5 BI14 BO18 K10
G6 BI15 K11
G7 BO21 M1
BI16
G8 BI17 BO22 M2
G9 BI18 M3
G10 BI19 BO25 M5
G11 BI20 BO26 M4
G12 M6
K15 BI21 BO29 M12
K16 BI22 BO30 M14
K17 BI23 M13
K18 BI24 BO23 M7
J1 BI25 BO24 M8
J2 BI26 BO27 M9
J3 BI27 BO28 M10
J4 BI28 M11
J5 BI29
J6 BI30
J7 BI31
J8 BI32
J9 BI33
J10 BI34
J11 BI35
J12
M15 BI36
M16 BI37
M17 BI38
M18 BI39
L1 BI40
L2 BI41
L3 BI42
L4 BI43
L5 BI44
L6 BI45
L7 BI46
L8 BI47
L9 BI48
L10 BI49
L11 BI50
L12

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
P15 BI51 BO31 P1

P16 BI52 BO32 P2
P17 BI53 P3
P18 BI54 BO35 P5
N1 BI55 BO36 P4
N2 BI56 P6
N3 BI57 BO39 P12
N4 BI58 BO40 P14
N5 BI59 P13
N6 BI60 BO33 P7
N7 BI61 BO34 P8
N8 BI62 BO37 P9
N9 BI63 BO38 P10
N10 BI64
P11
N11 BI65 BO41
N12 R1
BO42 R2
(+) R9 BO43 R3
MU1
() R10 R4
BO44 R5
(+) R11 MU2
() R12 R6
BO45 R7
R8
Life 1 2
F3
contact 3 2
F4
+
Power (~)
F1
supply - F2
Service port,
D

optical
Service port
or IRC, electric C
IRIG B / DCF77 A
Front PC
port

Figure A-6 Overview diagram 6MD664B/F (without operator control unit)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.3 Connection examples
L1
Busbar
L2
L3
R13 UL1
R14 UL2
UL3
R15 R16
IL1
Q1 Q2
IL2
Q3 Q4
IL3
Q5 Q6
6MD663/6MD664
L1 L2 L3
Figure A-7 Transformer connections to a current transformer and a voltage transformer

(1-phase measuring transducer packet)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
L1
Busbar
L2
L3
R13 UL1
R14 UL2
UL3
R15 R16
IL1
Q1 Q2
IL2
Q3 Q4
IL3
Q5 Q6
k
6MD663/6MD664
l
L1 L2 L3
Figure A-8 Transformer connections to 3 current transformers and 3 voltage transformers

(3-phase measuring transducer packet)

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
L1
L2
L3
UL1
R13
R14 UL2
R15 UL3
R16
U4
R17
R18
IL1
Q1 Q2
IL2
Q3 Q4
IL3
Q5 Q6
6MD663/6MD664
L1 L2 L3
Figure A-9 Connections to 2 current transformers and 2 voltage transformers for an Aron
switching

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
L1
L2
L3
URef L1 UL1
R13
R14 UL2
R15 UL3
R16
UAbzw L1 UL4
R17
R18
6MD663/6MD664
L1 L2 L3
Figure A-10 Connection of the measured values for synchronization

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix
A.4 Pre-installed CFC plan
A CFC plan is already pre-installed upon delivery of the SIPROTEC device:
Keylock switches The pre-installed CFC plan includes two modules DI_TO_BOOL.
IN: LOCAL/MODE Contr.authority IE

IN: LOCAL/MODE Key_1 DP
IN: LOCAL/MODE Contr.authority IE

IN: LOCAL/MODE Key_2 DP
Figure A-11 CFC plan keyswitches

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Appendix B
B.1 Settings B-2
B.2 List of Information B-16
B.3 Metered Values B-36
B-1
B.1 Settings
B-2
Appendix
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 SecVoltgNomVal Measurement U 0.00..200.00 V 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value
1.packet
0 SecCurrNomVal Measurement I 0.00..5.00 A 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value

1.packet
0 SecVoltgNomVal Measurement 0.00..200.00 V 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value

1phase 1.packet
0 SecCurrNomVal Measurement 0.00..5.00 A 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value

1phase 1.packet

1phase 2.packet
1phase 2.packet

1phase 3.packet

1phase 3.packet

3phase 1.packet

3phase 1.packet
6MD663/6MD664 Manual
0 SecVoltgNomVal Measurement Aron 0.00..200.00 V 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value

C53000-G1876-C102-2
1.packet
0 SecCurrNomVal Measurement Aron 0.00..5.00 A 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value

1.packet
0 T-CB close SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
group 1
C53000-G1876-C102-2

0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC Function 0.80..1.20 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2
group 1
0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC Function 0..360 ; 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo )

group 1
0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC Function 0..170 V 100 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value

group 1 1

group 1 2
0 SyncSD SYNC Function synchronizable switching device

group 1
0 Umin SYNC Function 20..125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization
group 1
0 Umax SYNC Function 20..140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization

group 1
0 Udead SYNC Function 1..60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead

group 1 Bus
0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC Function YES NO Synchronize to U1> and U2<

group 1 NO
0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC Function YES NO Synchronize to U1< and U2>

group 1 NO
0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC Function YES NO Synchronize to U1< and U2<

group 1 NO
0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 1.00..600.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronism-
group 1 check
0 fmin SYNC Function 95..105 % 95 % Minimum frequency

group 1
Appendix
0 fmax SYNC Function 95..105 % 105 % Maximum frequency
group 1
B-3
B-4
Appendix
0 UdiffAsyn SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, asynchro-
group 1 nous
0 fdiff SYNC Function 0.03..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn.

group 1
0 f SYNCHRON SYNC Function 10..40 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async.
group 1
0 UdiffSyn SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchro-
group 1 nous
0 diff SYNC Function 2..60 10 Maximum angle difference, syn.

group 1
0 T SYNCHRON SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems
group 1
group 2

group 2
0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC Function 0..360 ; 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo)

group 2

group 2 1

group 2 2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 2

group 2

group 2
C53000-G1876-C102-2

group 2 Bus

group 2 NO

group 2 NO

group 2 NO
group 2 check

group 2

group 2

group 2 nous

group 2
group 2

group 2 nous

group 2
group 2
Appendix
group 3
B-5
B-6
Appendix
group 3

group 3

group 3 1

group 3 2

group 3

group 3
group 3

group 3 Bus

group 3 NO

group 3 NO

group 3 NO
C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 3 check

group 3

group 3
C53000-G1876-C102-2

group 3 nous

group 3
group 3

group 3 nous

group 3
group 3
group 4

group 4

group 4

group 4 1

group 4 2

group 4

group 4
Appendix
group 4
B-7
B-8
Appendix
group 4 Bus

group 4 NO

group 4 NO
group 4 NO
group 4 check
group 4

group 4

group 4 nous

group 4
group 4

group 4 nous

C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 4
group 4
group 5
C53000-G1876-C102-2

group 5

group 5

group 5 1

group 5 2

group 5
group 5

group 5

group 5 Bus

group 5 NO

group 5 NO

group 5 NO
group 5 check

group 5
Appendix
group 5
B-9
B-10
Appendix
group 5 nous

group 5
group 5
group 5 nous

group 5
group 5
group 6

group 6

group 6

group 6 1

group 6 2

C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 6

group 6

group 6
C53000-G1876-C102-2

group 6 Bus

group 6 NO

group 6 NO

group 6 NO
group 6 check

group 6

group 6

group 6 nous

group 6
group 6

group 6 nous

group 6
group 6
Appendix
B-11
group 7
B-12
Appendix
group 7

group 7

group 7 1

group 7 2

group 7

group 7
group 7

group 7 Bus

group 7 NO

group 7 NO

group 7 NO
C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 7 check

group 7

group 7
C53000-G1876-C102-2

group 7 nous

group 7
0 f SYNCHRON SYNC Function 10..40 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. threshold Sync/Async.
group 7

group 7 nous

group 7
group 7
group 8

group 8

group 8

group 8 1

group 8 2

group 8

group 8
Appendix
B-13
group 8
B-14
Appendix
0 Udead SYNC Function 1..60 V 5V Voltage Threshold for Dead Line/Dead
group 8 Bus

group 8 NO

group 8 NO
group 8 NO
group 8 check
group 8

group 8

group 8 nous

group 8
0 f SYNCHRON SYNC Function 10..40 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. threshold Sync/Async.
group 8

group 8 nous

C53000-G1876-C102-2
group 8
group 8
214 Rated Frequency Power System Data 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

1 60 Hz
C53000-G1876-C102-2

401 T Backlight on Device, General 1..60 min 10 min Time Backlight on
Settings
402 DIGSI backplane Device, General Disabled Disabled Serviceport for DIGSI
Settings Port C
Port D
Appendix
B-15
B.2 List of Information
B-16
Appendix
All informations are configurable
q from IRC
q to IRC
F. Description Function Type of In- Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix

No. formation
Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
Ground Fault Log On/

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock (>Time Device, General Settings SP_Ev * LED BI FK BO
Synch)
51 Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device, General Settings OUT on LED BO
56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General Settings OUT on LED BO
60 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, General Settings OUT_Ev on LED BO
67 Resume (Resume) Device, General Settings OUT on LED BO

C53000-G1876-C102-2
68 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Device, General Settings IntSP on off LED BO
69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
70 Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device, General Settings OUT * LED BO

C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
73 Local setting change (Local change) Device, General Settings OUT * LED BO
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device, General Settings OUT on off LED BO
1P1 Current Input I (1P1Input_I) Measurement 1phase MC

1.packet
1P1 Voltage Input U (1P1Input_U) Measurement 1phase MC
Appendix
1.packet
B-17
B-18
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
1P2 Current Input (1P2Input_I) Measurement 1phase MC
2.packet

2.packet
1P3 Current Input I (1P3Input_I) Measurement 1phase MC
3.packet

3.packet
3P1 Current Input I1 (3P1InputI1) Measurement 3phase MC

1.packet
1.packet

1.packet
3P1 Voltage Input U1 (3P1InputU1) Measurement 3phase MC

C53000-G1876-C102-2
1.packet

1.packet

1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device, General Settings SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 block (>Sy1 block) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 direct Command Output (>Sy1 dirCO) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 effective (>Sy1 eff.) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 Measurement only (>Sy1 Meas) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy1U1<U2<) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy1U1<U2>) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
>Sync1 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy1U1>U2<) SYNC Function group 1 SP on off LED BI BO
Appendix

B-19
B-20
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
C53000-G1876-C102-2

C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
>Sync5 Measurement Only (>Sy5 Meas) SYNC Function group 5 SP on off LED BI BO
Appendix
B-21
B-22
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
A1 Current Input I1 (A1Input_I1) Measurement Aron MC

1.packet
A1 Voltage Input I2 (A1Input_I2) Measurement Aron MC

1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2
A1 Voltage Input U1 (A1Input_U1) Measurement Aron MC

1.packet
A1 Voltage Input U2 (A1Input_U2) Measurement Aron MC

1.packet
bus disconnector Q1 (Q1) Control Device CF_D2 on off BO

C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
bus disconnector Q1 (Q1) Control Device DP on off BI CB
bus disconnector Q2 (Q2) Control Device CF_D2 on off BO
bus disconnector Q2 (Q2) Control Device DP on off BI CB
circuit breaker Q0 (Q0) Control Device CF_D2 on off BO
circuit breaker Q0 (Q0) Control Device DP on off BI CB
Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Device, General Settings IntSP_Ev * LED BO
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authorization IntSP ON LED

OFF
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Control Authorization IntSP ON LED

OFF
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeREMOTE) Control Authorization IntSP ON LED

OFF
Current Input I (MwCh_I) Measurement I 1.packet MC
earthing isolator Q8 (Q8) Control Device CF_D2 on off BO
earthing isolator Q8 (Q8) Control Device DP on off BI CB
feeder disconnector Q9 (Q9) Control Device CF_D2 on off BO
Appendix
feeder disconnector Q9 (Q9) Control Device DP on off BI CB
B-23
B-24
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Device, General Settings IntSP on off LED BO
Key Switch 1 (Local/Remote) (KeySwitch1) Control Authorization DP on off LED
Key Switch 2 (Interlocking OFF/ON) (KeySwitch2) Control Authorization DP on off LED
Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device, General Settings IntSP on off LED BO
Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled (Sync. U1< U2<) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled (Sync. U1< U2>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled (Sync. U1> U2<) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Appendix
Sync. Cond. U1> U2< fulfilled (Sync. U1> U2<) SYNC Function group 4 OUT on off LED BO
B-25
B-26
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. f1<<) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Appendix
B-27
B-28
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded (Sync.MonTime- SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Exc)
Exc)
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Exc)
Exc)
Exc)
Exc)
Exc)
Exc)
Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. Clos- SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
eRel)
eRel)
eRel)
Appendix
eRel)
B-29
B-30
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
eRel)
eRel)
eRel)
eRel)
Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2
Sync. Voltage difference exceeded (Sync. Vdiff>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Sync. Voltage diff. exceeded (Sync. Vdiff>) SYNC Function group 2 OUT on off LED BO
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync. Voltage v exceeded (Sync. Vdiff>) SYNC Function group 7 OUT on off LED BO
Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. U1>>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Appendix
Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
B-31
B-32
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
C53000-G1876-C102-2
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Appendix
Sync1, Voltage input U1 (Sy1 ChU1) SYNC Function group 1 MC

B-33
B-34
Appendix
No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Sync6, Voltage input U1, 1.PE (Sy6 ChU11) SYNC Function group 6 MC

C53000-G1876-C102-2
C53000-G1876-C102-2

No. formation

Event Log On/Off
Chatter Blocking
Marked in Oscill.
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Record
LED
Off
Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC Function group 1 OUT on off LED BO
Test mode (Test mode) Device, General Settings IntSP on off LED BO
Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Threshold-Switch IntSP on off LED BI FK BO CB
Voltage or Current Input U/I (Input U/I) Measurement U 1.packet MC
Appendix
B-35
B.3 Metered Values
B-36
Appendix
F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Ma-
trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement CFC CD DD
997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement CFC CD DD
1P1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (1P1_cos) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD
1.packet
1P1 Active Power P (1P1_P) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
1P1 Apparent Power S (1P1_S) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
1P1 Current I (1P1_I) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
1P1 Frequency of U (1P1_f) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2
1P1 Phase Angle Phi (1P1_) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
1P1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (1P1_sin) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD
1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2

trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
1P1 Reactive Power Q (1P1_Q) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD
1.packet
1P1 Voltage U (1P1_U) Measurement 1phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
2.packet

2.packet

2.packet
2.packet

2.packet

2.packet
2.packet

2.packet
Appendix
B-37
2.packet
B-38
Appendix
trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
3.packet

3.packet

3.packet

3.packet

3.packet

3.packet
3.packet

3.packet

C53000-G1876-C102-2
3.packet
3P1 Active Power Factor Three Phase (3P1_cos) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD
1.packet
3P1 Active Power Three Phase (3P1_P) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2

trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
3P1 Apparent Power Three Phase (3P1_S) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD
1.packet
3P1 Frequency (3P1_f) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
3P1 Phase Angle Three Phase (3P1_) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
3P1 Phase Current I1 (3P1_I1) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet

1.packet
1.packet
3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U1 (3P1_U1) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet

1.packet

1.packet
3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 (3P1_U12) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
Appendix
B-39
1.packet
B-40
Appendix
trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
1.packet
3P1 Reactive Power Factor Three Phase Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

(3P1_sin) 1.packet
3P1 Reactive Power Three Phase (3P1_Q) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
3P1 Zero Sequence Current (3P1_I0) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage (3P1_U0) Measurement 3phase CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (A1_cos) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Active Power P (A1_P) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Apparent Power S (A1_S) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Frequency (A1_f) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

C53000-G1876-C102-2
1.packet
A1 Phase Angle Phi (A1_) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD
1.packet
A1 Phase Current I2 (A1_I2) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
C53000-G1876-C102-2

trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
A1 Phase Current I3 (A1_I3) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD
1.packet
A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 (A1_U12) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U13 (A1_U13) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (A1_sin) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
A1 Reactive Power Q (A1_Q) Measurement Aron CFC CD DD

1.packet
Current I (I) Measurement I 1.packet CFC CD DD
frequency (f) Measurement U 1.packet CFC CD DD
frequency (f) Measurement I 1.packet CFC CD DD
Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC Function group 1 CFC CD DD

Appendix
B-41
B-42
Appendix
trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC Function group 1 CFC CD DD
Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC Function group 1 CFC CD DD

C53000-G1876-C102-2

C53000-G1876-C102-2

trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC Function group 1 CFC CD DD
Appendix
B-43
B-44
Appendix
trix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC Function group 1 CFC CD DD

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Voltage U (U) Measurement U 1.packet CFC CD DD

Glossary
Additional protocol A SIPROTEC 4 device from Version 4.2 also allows communication via
the system interface on the basis of the protocols PROFIBUS DP, DNP
3.0 and MODBUS. In the DIGSI 4 terminology these protocols are
referred to as Additional Protocols.
Bay controllers Devices with control or monitoring functions, but without protection func-
tions are defined as bay controllers.
Bay devices General term summarizing all devices assigned to the bay level: protec-
tion devices, combined bay protection and control units, bay controllers.
Binary input A binary input usually is an optocoupler input for entering binary process
messages. The number of binary outputs depends on the individual
device.
Binary output A binary output usually is a relay for outputting a binary signal. The num-
ber of binary outputs depends on the device.
CFC The DIGSI 4 CFC program serves for creating logical functions for
SIPROTEC 4 devices.
Chatter blocking Chatter blocking detects binary inputs permanently changing their state
due to an error in the hardware connected to the binary inputs. Chatter
blocking inhibits these binary inputs and thus prevents the creation of
meaningless messages.
Clean Up Frequently adding and deleting objects causes some storage areas to be
no longer usable. These storage areas are released by reorganizing the
storage areas. However, in addition to this, the VD addresses are reas-
signed during the restorage process. Consequently, all SIPROTEC 4
devices must be initialized again.
Combined bay pro- Bay devices performing protection functions and equipped with a control
tection and control display are defined as combined bay protection and control units.
units
6MD663/6MD664 Manual Glossary-1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Command An output signal of a control function for triggering a switching device is

defined as a command. It is a more complex signal than an output indi-
cation:
q Commands can be single-pole, 1-pole or double-pole
q Commands can be single or double commands
q An output time interval is assigned to each individual command
q Each command can have a feedback for monitoring its execution.
Command, single Only one output contact is involved in the command output. Closing this
pole contact actuates the switching device.
Command, 1.5-pole Closing the output contact relating to the individual command as well
closing a root relay commonly used by all commands actuates the
switching device.
Command, double Two output contacts are involved in the command output. One output
pole command is positioned in the + and in the - circuit of the coil respectively.
Communication The communication reference describes the type and design of a station
reference CR participating in communication via PROFIBUS.
Configuration Configuration signifies that information is linked to a source and/or desti-

nation within the matrix. Configuring information to a source means that
a certain event is a precondition of this information. Configuring informa-
tion to a source means that information is passed on or leads to a reac-
tion.
Container General term summarizing objects comprising further objects.
Controlling Controlling changes the actual status of operational equipment. Either

use the keyboard of the SIPROTEC 4 device or the DIGSI 4 Device Pro-
cessing for switching operational equipment.
Control display The display visible in devices with a large (graphical) display after press-
ing the Control key is defined as control display. It comprises the switch-
ing devices to be controlled in a feeder and also includes a status
representation. It serves for performing switching actions. The control
display is specified within the framework of project configuring.
Decimal Parameter Some parameters are defined by an individual numerical value.
Default display This term describes the device display visible during normal operation
without actuating keys. The default display contains operational mea-
sured values and (for devices with graphics display) a mimic diagram for
Glossary-2 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
representing the switching status. In contrast to the control display, the

default display cannot be used for selecting a switching device for per-
forming switching actions. You can always return to the default display by
pressing the <ESC> key as frequently as required.
Delay The seal-in time starts as soon as the output time of a command has
expired. The command cannot be transmitted a second time within the
delay time. Consequently, this time serves for coordinating command
sequences. It is, however, a prerequisite that the command is outputted
as Pulse.
Device matrix The device matrix is a versatile tool for configuring information as well as
for editing informational properties and functional settings.
Display Editor The DIGSI 4 Display Editor program serves for editing the default and
control display of SIPROTEC 4 devices.
Display text The display text describes information displayed in a SIPROTEC 4

device.
Double command Commands for switching a switching device On and OFF are defined as
double commands. A double command always requires two lines of the
configuration matrix. There are one pole, 1-pole and 2-pole double
commands.
Double point indi- Double-point indications are defined as process information (preferably
cation position messages of switching devices) which, for safety reasons, are
transmitted to the device by way of two contacts. Inconsistent signals
lead to an intermediate fault position. 2 bits are required for the internal
representation and in transmission protocols.
DU type The DU type is only relevant for messages. It specifies the principle mes-
sage type. The Event Log (Operational Indications) and Trip Log (Fault
Indications) types are available.
Feedback monitor- A command feedback must be transmitted during the feedback monitor-
ing time ing time. If this is not the case, the command may be considered to have
failed. If the feedback message arrives when the feedback monitoring
time has expired, it will be saved as a spontaneous message.
Filter time The filter time describes how long a signal must be present to be inter-
preted as a message.
Function type In an IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, the function type specifies the type of a
SIPROTEC 4 device. For example, there are function types for a distance
protection device or a machine protection device.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Function keys Each SIPROTEC 4 device is equipped with function keys. Actuating a
key can be combined with the transmission of an input message.
General interroga- The current status of all signals subordinate to a general interrogation is
tion detected and displayed (in DIGSI) within the framework of a general
interrogation.
Graphic Tools The DIGSI 4 Graphic Tools program displays user-defined characteris-
tics and allows to edit these characteristics using the mouse.
Group Information is summarized to groups within the matrix. There are pre-
defined and user-defined groups.
Indication Messages are created either internally in the SIPROTEC 4 device or are
triggered by the connected peripheral units. The SIPROTEC 4 device
creates the message by the time of the event.
IEC address A unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device
within an IEC bus. A total number of 254 IEC addresses is available for
each IEC bus.
Inter-device The inter-device communication, IDC for short, is used for the direct
communication exchange of process information between SIPROTEC 4 devices.
Information General term describing all available measured values, metered values,
indications and commands.
Information An information number must be allocated to each selected function type.

number This information number describes the information type (message or
command) to be transmitted via the system interface.
Input indication This term defines a single point indication created in the process and
which can be transmitted to the SIPROTEC 4 device by way of binary
input or the serial interface. Input messages can be single point mes-
sages, double point messages or transformer tap messages.
Input interlock If an input interlock is set, messages present at the binary inputs of a
SIPROTEC 4 device will not be accepted by the device. The input inter-
lock is set by means of the keyboard of the SIPROTEC 4 device.
Interconnection As part of an inter-device comminications network, IDC network for short,

matrix up to 16 suitable SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with each
other. Which devices exchange which information is specified using the
interconnection matrix.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Internal indication See Tagging.
Link address The link address indicates the address of a V3/V2-device. You can
change this address by means of DIGSI 3.x.
List view The right pane of the device window displays the names and symbols of
the objects positioned in a container selected in the tree view. As the
objects are represented in a list, this pane is also called list view.
Long text The long text describes information in detail.
Manual tagging Tagging the actual status of operational equipment manually means that
the operational equipment status registered in the SIPROTEC 4 device
is adapted to its actual status. For example, this procedure is necessary
if no feedback has been transmitted for a defective auxiliary contact in
operational equipment. Use the keyboard of the SIPROTEC 4 device to
perform manual tagging operations.
Measured value Measured values are captured by the transformers of a device as voltage
and current effective values. In addition to this, they are captured by mea-
suring transducers as frequency, temperature and pressure values.
Measured value The scaling of measured values is important when additional protocols
scaling are used as soon as a measured value is configured on the system inter-
face as the target. Scaling of a measured value is generally necessary as
soon as the resolution of a measured value must be reduced. If, for
example, a 32-bit measured value is reduced to 16 bits, information may
be lost that are particularly important for this measured value. This effect
can be counteracted by scaling the measured value.
MLFB number MLFB is the abbreviation of the term Maschinenlesbare Fabrikate-

bezeichnung. It is the order number. This number includes a code of the
type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Object General term specifying each element in a 6MD663/6MD664 project

structure.
Object properties Each object has individual properties. These properties can either be
general properties which several objects have in common or object-spe-
cific properties.
Offline If you are working in the Offline operating mode, you dont need to estab-
lish a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device as you are using data stored
in files.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Online If you are working in the Online operating mode, a physical connection
has been established to a SIPROTEC 4 device. This connection can be
implemented as a direct connection, via modem or via PROFIBUS FMS.
Operating language Depending on the type of the current SIPROTEC 4 device, several oper-
ating languages are available for displaying the texts of the SIPROTEC
4 device.
Operational equip- Physical components within a process are defined as operational equip-
ment ment. The following components are examples of operational equipment:
Isolators, circuit breakers or high-voltage safety doors.
Oscillographic fault Each line fault is described by numerous instantaneous values recorded
records in an oscillographic fault record. These instantaneous values are defined
as oscillographic fault records.
Output indication Term specifying an message created by the SIPROTEC 4 device. This
message can be transmitted via a binary output, LED or the serial inter-
face.
Output interlock Setting an output interlock prevents commands being transmitted by way
of the relays of a SIPROTEC 4 device. Use the keyboard of your SIPRO-
TEC 4 device to set the output interlock.
Parameter A parameter is unambiguously characterized by a name, a setting value,

a setting range or the setting options as well as by a four-digit parameter
number.
Parameterization Comprehensive term summarizing all settings to be performed on a

device. Parameterization jobs are executed by means of DIGSI 4 or, in
some cases, directly on the device.
Parameter number This number serves for identifying a parameter and its description in the
corresponding device documentation.
Parameter set General term summarizing all parameters which can be set for a SIPRO-
TEC 4 device.
Process data There are three types of process data: Messages, measured values and
oscillographic fault records. The number and the type of the available
process data depends on the device type and the device order number,
the parameterized functional scope as well as on the current operating
mode.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and Field bus standard spec-
ified within the framework of EN 50170, volume 2, PROFIBUS. This stan-
dard specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical properties of a
bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address Each SIPROTEC 4 device must be allocated with an unambiguous

PROFIBUS address within a PROFIBUS network. A total number of 254
PROFIBUS addresses is available for each PROFIBUS network.
Protection devices Term summarizing all devices with protection functions, but without con-
trol display.
Protection interlock The term protection interlock means that a protection device has trig-
gered and switched off due to an error. The command is not transmitted
in this case.
Reset During a start-up (Reset) of a SIPROTEC 4 device, all settings are reset
to the factory default.
Restoring The transmission of metered values from the storage of a SIPROTEC 4

device to the control center is called restoring. Metered values are
restored cyclically.
Resume A restart (Resume) of a SIPROTEC 4 device resets all device buffers.
Root relay You can assign a common binary output as the root for several 1.5-pole
double controls, thus saving binary outputs. As a prerequisite, however,
the signals at the root outputs must have the same potential. A common
frame potential is an example of a root relay application.
Seal-in time The output time is extended by the seal-in time if the Scheduled switch
position has not yet been reached even though the feedback has already
arrived. However, a pulse output of the command is a prerequisite. The
seal-in time is only relevant for operational equipment which must always
transmit feedback before the switching operation has been completed.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Service interface Rear serial interface of devices. The service interface serves for connect-
ing DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem).
Setting group The setting group is a subset of a parameter set. The setting group usu-
ally comprises parameters for setting functions. However, for example
interface settings are not comprised in a setting group. SIPROTEC 4
devices usually support several setting groups to be activated alter-
nately.
Setting value General term describing the value of a parameter to be defined by the
user. The setting value can be any number within the permissible setting
range. In addition to this, it can also be a text from a list of permissible
texts. The setting value of table parameters consists of several value
pairs.
Short view The short view of the matrix displays both the Binary Inputs source and
the Binary Outputs and LED destinations in one collective column,
respectively.
Signalling relay A signalling relay is triggered for as long as a command is transmitted.

You can configure several commands to the same signalling relay and,
for example, connect this relay to a control center.
Single command Term describing the output signal of a control function in cases where no
double command is required.
Single point indica- This term describes simple binary signals (internal representation with
tion more than 1 bit) transmitted from the process to the SIPROTEC 4 device
(input message) or created by the SIPROTEC 4 device (output mes-
sage).
SIGRA 4 With the program SIGRA 4, you can display stored fault records and
evaluate them.
SIPROTEC The registered trademark SIPROTEC 4 is used for all devices imple-
mented on the V4 system basis.
SIPROTEC 4 device This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device including all set-
ting values and process data.
Standard view The standard view of the matrix allows you to access all columns of the
Binary Inputs source as well as of the Binary Outputs and LED desti-
nations.
System interface Rear serial interface of the SIPROTEC 4 devices. It serves for interfacing
the device to a control center via IEC or PROFIBUS.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
Table parameters A characteristic is defined by a number of value pairs. The setting value
of a parameter results from the total number of these value pairs. This
parameter type is defined as a table parameter.
Tagging Tags (flags) are internal messages without a physical connection to the
process. This message type is important for the SIPROTEC 4 device and
the control center. There is no connection to the process or perhaps there
are only logical connections to the process, such as interlock conditions.
The information as to which setting group is active can serve as an exam-
ple of a tag. This information is stored as an internal message.
Text parameters Some parameters can only have defined values, such as ON, OFF, etc.
This parameter type is defined as text parameter.
Transformer tap Transformer tap indications are process information transmitted to the
indication SIPROTEC 4 device via n contacts. If the transmitted signals are incon-
sistent, an intermediate fault position is detected.
Transmission inter- A transmission interlock must be set to prevent the transmission of mes-
lock sages via the system interface to the center. Either use the keyboard of
the SIPROTEC 4 device or the DIGSI 4 Device Processing for setting a
transmission interlock.
Transmission The transmission threshold determines the transmission frequency of

threshold measured values. It is specified in percent. If zero is selected as the
threshold value for the transmission threshold, each measured value will
be transmitted to the higher-level station. A threshold not equal to zero
results in all changes to new measured values being added compared to
the last measured value transmitted. If the sum of the changes reaches
the set percentage, a new measured value is transmitted at the next pos-
sible point in time.
Tree view The left pane of the device window displays the names and icons of all
containers in a hierarchical tree structure. This pane is called tree struc-
ture.
User-defined logic The logical switchings to be created by the user by means of the CFC
comprised in DIGSI 4 are defined as user-defined logic.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Glossary
VD address Each component in a system or station is assigned with an unambiguous

VD address (= Virtual Device Address). In this context, a component can
bei a device (e.g. a SIPROTEC 4 device), a device module or a software
module (e.g. DIGSI 4 Device Processing). Device components can have
four different VD addresses, depending on the type of the individual com-
ponent:
q DIGSI4 VD address
q SIPROTEC System VD address
q SIPROTEC T103 VD address
q SICAM Proxy VD address
The DIGSI 4 VD address must changed by the user, if required for the
individual application. All other VD addresses are not relevant for the
user during daily operation, but are only displayed for testing and diag-
nostic jobs.
VFD A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects as well
as their properties and states, used via services by a communication
partner.
Zone diagram The zone diagram graphically presents the zone characteristic of a dis-
tance/impedance protection. Fault locations stored in fault record files
can be displayed as additional information in the zone diagram. The zone
diagram display is implemented by means of DIGSI 4 Graphic Tools.
As a prerequisite, however, the currently configured SIPROTEC 4 device
must support distance protection functions.

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4 Manual

E50417-H1176-C070-A3
/2/ SIPROTEC Protection Systems CD Documentation
E50417-A1174-C094-A1
/3/ SIPROTEC, System Description
E50417-H1176-C151-A1
/4/ SIPROTEC DIGSI 4, Start UP
E50417-G1176-C152-A2
/5/ DIGSI CFC, Manual
E50417-H1176-C098-A4
/6/ IEC 60870-5-103: TELECONTROL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
PART 5: Transmission Protocols, Section 103: Communication
Standards for Informative Interface of Protection Equipment
/7/ PROFIBUS: Process Field Bus (DIN 19245) Transmission
Technology, Bus Access and Transmission Protocol, Service
Interface to Application Layer, Management
6MD663/6MD664 Manual Literature-1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Literature
Literature-2 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
A C
Access rights 4-34 Central threshold 5-41
Adaptation of the hardware 8-6 CFC 4-15, 4-23, 4-26
Additional Logic 5-78 configuring as destination 5-32
Analog inputs and outputs editing user-definable functions 5-69
general device data 10-2 fleeting indications 5-73
Assembly of the device 8-19 function modules 5-71
Automatic address recognition 5-59 interlocking isolator (example) 5-76
Auxiliary voltage 8-6 pre-installed CFC plan A-22
general device data 10-3 release logic 6-49
run sequences 5-69
B setting and connecting function
Baud rate 5-59 modules 5-72
Bay interlockings 6-51 work sheets 5-72
Bay-specific interlocking 6-46 CFC plans A-5
Binary inputs Changing the Time 7-15
configuring as sources 5-25 Chatter blocking 5-34
control voltage 8-6 setting 5-34
Binary inputs and outputs 1-3 Chatter idle time 5-34
General device data 10-3 Chatter suppression 5-15, 6-4
Binary Outputs 7-3 Check switching authority 5-19
Binary outputs Check system locking 5-18
for switching devices 5-27 Check zone control 5-18
Blocking by protection 6-46, 6-51 Checking a command task 6-43
Blocking for protection activation 5-19 Checking data connection 8-20
Buffer battery Checking switching statuses 8-25
replacing 9-4 Circuit breaker
Bus arbitration 5-59 specifying synchronization 5-66
Bus-capable serial interface 8-18 synchronization 5-65
terminating 8-7 Clock fault 6-5
Clock Sync 6-5
Combination matrix
open combination matrix 5-54
Command
setting object properties 5-17
Command acknowledgement 6-52
Command editing 6-41
operating via DIGSI 4 6-42
operation via binary inputs 6-42
operation via system interface 6-42
Command end 5-21
Command execution monitoring 6-44
Command output 6-52
Command path 6-43
6MD663/6MD664 Manual Index-1

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
Commands 5-5 D
Commands to the process 6-42 Data connection
Communication 1-5, 4-3 checking 8-20
Configuration 4-18, 4-21 DataStop 6-4
Configuration matrix Date/time
handling 5-9 setting and reading 7-14
information 5-11 DayLightSav Time 6-5
inserting informations 5-12 DCF77 5-88, 5-89
specifying informations 5-14 Default display 4-24
Configuring 5-4 creating 5-79
a LED Display as a Destination 5-30 Define the device model 5-49
Binary Outputs as a Destination 5-26 Delay time
Configuring a function key as a source 5-26 end of command 5-20
Configuring control as destination 5-32 Deleting groups and information 5-24
Configuring measured values 5-40 Design
Configuring measured-value channels 5-40 Panel surface mounting and cabinet
Configuring measured-value window as mounting 2-2
destination 5-32 with a separate operating unit 2-15
Configuring measuring transducers 5-40 without local operation 2-26
Configuring message buffers as Device
destination 5-30 assembly 8-19
Connection examples A-18 checking data connection 8-20
Connection method 2-11 , 2-13, 2-14, 2-22, connection variants 8-5
2-24, 2-25, 2-33, 2-35, 2-36 creating default display 5-79
Connectors 2-10, 2-21, 2-32 designing a control display 5-82
Control dismounting 8-7, 9-12
configuring as destination 5-32 importing 5-48
Control authorization 6-9, 6-49 maintenance 9-2
DIGSI 6-45 operator control panel 7-3
LOCAL 6-45 ready for operation 6-3
REMOTE 6-45 reassembling 9-14
Control authorization and control mode 6-9 return 9-16
Control device routine checks 9-3
actuateing 7-23 Device status 5-19
retreaving the current positions 7-23 Device-internal commands 6-43
Control devices 6-11 DIGSI backplane 6-3
Control display 4-24 Dismounting the device 9-12
designing 5-82 Display 4-6
Control message 7-32 illumination 6-3
Control mode 6-9, 7-31 Display Editor 4-24
Control mode / deactivation 6-50 creating default display 5-79
Control panel designing a control display 5-82
mounting 8-2 DNP3.0 4-32
Control voltage of the binary inputs 8-6 Double operation 5-19
Controlling 4-14 Double operation blocking 6-46, 6-51
Corrective action Double Point indication (DP) 5-15
hardware 9-12
software 9-12 E
Cover caps 2-9, 2-20, 2-31 EMC Tests for Immunity 10-8
CPU processor module 8-9 Energy flow direction 5-23
Current connections 2-7, 2-8, 2-18, 2-19, Energy metering 5-92
2-29, 2-30 Error Board1 6-6
Cyclic restoring 5-33 Error power supply unit 6-4
Index-2 6MD663/6MD664 Manual

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
Event recording 4-15 IEC 608705103 4-32

Exchanging interfaces 8-7 Indications 5-4
Extraction tool 2-13, 2-24, 2-35 Information
completing 6-2
F configuring 6-2
Fail battery 6-4 Information properties specifying 5-14
Feedback monitoring 6-52 Information type
Feedback monitoring time 5-22 abbreviations 5-11
Fiber optics Informations
checking 8-21 inserting 5-12
Fine-wire fuse specifying 5-14
replacing 9-13 Initial start 6-4
Front Elements 1-3 Initial test time 5-34
Function keys 4-22 Inserting some information 5-12
Functional scope 4-20, 5-37 Inserting synchronization function 5-65
inserting synchronization function 5-65 Interface
specifying 5-2, 6-2 terminating bus-capable interface 8-7
Interface module
G exchanging 8-17
General device data Interfaces
adittional functions 10-17, 10-18 exchanging 8-7
analog inputs and outputs 10-2 Interlock 7-30
auxiliary voltage 10-3 Interlocking checks 6-44
binary inputs and outputs 10-3 Internal Double-Point indication 5-14
breaker control 10-12 Internal Single-Point indication 5-14
circuit breaker synchronization 10-13 Inter-relay communication
constuction 10-11 address management 5-84
EMC 10-8 checking the current status 5-60
mechanical stress tests 10-9 configuring as destination 5-32
operational measured values 10-15 configuring as source 5-26
Service Conditions 10-10 failure message 5-49
General device settings 4-30 Functional principle 5-47
Group 5-55 setting the slot 5-56
time synchronization 5-63
H
IRC combination
Hardware
bus arbitration 5-59
adaption 8-6
update parameter sets 5-61
Hardware filter time 5-15
IRIG B 5-88, 5-89
Hardware Test Dialog Box 8-25
Housing 2-15, 2-26 K
Design 2-2 Key switch
for panel surface mounting and cabinet control authorization 6-9
mounting A-6 Keys 4-7
for panel surface mounting without oper-
ator control unit A-14 L
for surface mounting with remote opera- LED 4-7, 7-2
tor control unit A-10 Level-2 Param. 6-5
HWTestMod 6-5 Life contact 8-6
Light on 6-4
I Limit value
I/O-4 module 8-13 inserting 5-98
I/O-5 module 8-15 setting 5-99
IEC 4-32 Loading settings 6-5
IEC 60 8705103 4-32

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
Locked/unlocked control 6-44 Operating serial interface 4-15, 4-17, 6-3,

Low Current Monitor 5-75 8-20
Operating unit 2-15
M Operational measured value
Maintenance 9-2 inserting 5-98
Manual overwrite 7-26 setting 5-100
Measured value 5-41 Operations 4-4
central threshold 5-41 Operator
processing 5-36 Control Panel 3-4
routing 5-98 Operator control panel 4-5, 4-6, 4-9, 4-14,
transmission threshold 5-41 4-29, 7-3
Measured values 1-5, 4-12, 4-24 Operator-process interface 4-7
user-defined 5-22 Order designation 3-3
Measured-value group 6-12 Ordering Number 9-10
Measurement 1phase 1.packet Output of a message 7-2
(MU1P_1) 6-16 Output time 5-21
Measurement 3phase 1.packet Overview diagram A-5
(MU3P_1) 6-18
Measurement Aron 1.packet P
(MUAron_1) 6-21 Parameterized threshold 5-41
Measurement I 1.packet (MU I_1) 6-15 parameterized threshold 5-41
Measurement U 1.packet (MU U_1) 6-14 Password 5-19
Measuring transducer Passwords 4-8, 4-15, 4-34
setting 5-38 Pauses 5-59
Measuring transducer modules 5-36 PCInterfaces 7-3
Mechanical stress tests 10-9 Permanent outputs 5-21, 5-22
Messages 1-5, 4-10 Power
output 7-2 Supply 1-4
Metered value of measured value Power system data 4-27
inserting 5-95 Power System Data 1
routing 5-96 rated Frequency 6-8
setting 5-96 Power system data 1 4-27
Metered values 5-22 Power system data 2 4-27
setting 5-92 Pre-installed CFC plan A-22
Minimum cycle time 5-59 Priority classes
MLFB 9-10 user-definable logic functions 5-69
MODBUS ASCII/RTU 4-32 PROFIBUS 4-3, 4-32
Module PROFIBUS connection 5-86
CPU 8-9 PROFIBUS DP 4-32
I/O-4 8-13 PROFIBUS FMS 4-3, 4-32
I/O-5 8-15 Protection concept 4-2
Monitor 9-9 Pulse metered value
Mounting inserting 5-92
control panel 8-2 routing 5-93
frame and cabinet 8-3 Pulse outputs 5-21
N R
Nominal currents 8-6 Reading out
operational measured values 3-9
O Relay triggering 6-52
Operating and display elements 2-4 Release logic via CFC 6-49
Operating and Service interface 5-85 Release ON and OFF 5-18, 5-20
Operating mode 5-21, 5-22

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
Replacing Synchronization
buffer battery 9-4 circuit breaker 5-65
fine-wire fuse 9-13 functional scope 5-65
Representation of the Time 7-15 inserting function 5-65
Reset device 6-4 specifying 5-66
Reset LED 6-4 Synchronization function
Resume 6-4 angle adjustment 6-35
Retrieving and changing interface settings on angle difference 6-37
device 5-87 checking start conditions 6-27
Retrieving device configurations from the de- circuit breaker closing time 6-35
vice front 5-32 commands 6-30
Return of the complete device 9-16 control 6-29
Round cable assembly, 3-conductor 2-26 deselection of SYNC function 6-30
Routine checks 9-3 factor U1/U2 6-35
RS 232 2-14, 2-25, 2-36 frequency difference 6-37
RS 485 2-14, 2-25, 2-36 frequency range 6-36
functioning 6-23
S input messages 6-31
Seal-in time 5-21 interfaces 6-30
SecCurrNomVal 6-15, 6-16, 6-19, 6-21 maximum duration of synchronism
SecVoltgNomVal 6-14, 6-16, 6-19, 6-21 check 6-36
Selecting maximum voltage for synchronization
date and the time of day 3-11 Umax 6-36
Serial interfaces 1-4, 4-32, 5-84 measuring 6-28
Serial port on PC 5-85 minimum voltage for synchronization
Serial port settings Umin 6-36
defining 5-58 output messages 6-33, 6-35
Service interface 1-5, 4-9, 4-15, 4-17, 5-85, secondary transformer nominal value
6-3 U1 6-35
Settings 4-4 secondary transformer nominal value
specifying 6-2 U2 6-35
Settings check 6-5 subfunctions 6-26
Settings local 6-6 switch delay time 6-37
Shock 10-9 synchronizable control device 6-36
Short 2-8, 2-19, 2-30 voltage application 6-25, 6-26
Short-circuit links 2-8, 2-19, 2-30 voltage deselection 6-30
Single-Point indication 5-14 voltage difference 6-37
Standard interlockings 6-45 voltage threshold 6-36
Status System (SCADA) Interface 7-4
setting 7-28 System control 7-22
Substation control system 7-23 via higher-level control technology 7-23
Switch position check 6-51 System interface 1-5, 4-9, 4-14
Switching direction check 6-46 checking 8-20
Switching error protection 6-44 testing 8-28
Switching test of the configured operating System interlocking 6-44, 6-46
equipment 8-27 System interlockings 6-51
Switching the device available for System overview 4-1
operation 8-30
Switching via command input 8-27 T
SYNC Function group 1 (SYNC function T Backlight on 6-3
1) 6-23 Tagging 4-16
Target 5-55
Telegram repetitions 5-59

C53000-G1876-C102-2
Index
Test mode 6-4, 8-25 Transmission mode 5-58

Test operation 7-19 Transmission threshold 5-41, 6-13
Threshold value switch 6-13 Troubleshooting 9-2
Time
setting and reading 7-14 U
status 7-14 Update parameter sets 5-61
Time format 5-91 User Guide 4-8
Time Synchronization 5-88 User interface 1-5
Time synchronization 4-31 User-definable functions
interface 8-21 checking CFC 8-24
offset 5-90 User-definable logic functions 5-69
Time synchronization interface 2-14, 2-25, User-defined measured values 5-22
2-36
Time synchronous 6-5 V
Transducer Vibration 10-9
selecting functional scope 5-37 Viewing
Transformer Measured Values 3-5
connection examples 5-36 Operational Messages 3-5
Transmission blocking 8-25 Voltage connections 2-7, 2-18, 2-29

C53000-G1876-C102-2
TO:
Siemens AG
PTD PA D PSN
Postfach 4806
D-90026 Nrnberg
Germany
FROM:
Your name : ..........................................................................................................
Your title : ..........................................................................................................
Your company : ..........................................................................................................
Department : ..........................................................................................................
Street : ..........................................................................................................
City, State : ..........................................................................................................
Phone : ..........................................................................................................
Fax : ..........................................................................................................
Please tick your area of work:
q Automation q Building services, air conditioning

q Mining (incl. strip mining) q Heavy machine construction,
handling systems
q Chemical industry
q Power generation
q Pipelines
q Power distribution,
q Shipbuilding, navigation
power system management q Environmental technology
q Gas/water/sanitary utilities q
Traffic and transportation
q Other...........................................................................................................................
Remarks / Suggestions
Your remarks and suggestions will help us to enhance the usability of our documenta-
tion. Please fill in this questionnaire and mail or fax it back to Siemens (fax number
++49 - 9 11 - 433 85 18).
Title of the Manual: 6MD663/6MD664

Order no. of the Manual: C53000-G1876-C102-2
Please answer the following questions by giving a rating between

1 = good and 5 = poor.
1. Does the contents cover your requirements? ................

2. Could you spot the information you needed without any problems? ................
3. Did you find the texts easy to understand? ................
4. Does the information depth meet your requirements? ................
5. How do you judge the quality of the illustrations? ................
If you have encountered any concrete problems, please give us a concise description
below:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

6md663 664 en

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

6md663 664 en

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

3UHIDFH7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV

Disclaimer of liability Copyright

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Document-Nr. C53000-G1876-C102-2

6MD663/6MD664 Manual iii

Earth fault device-internal logical input signal

Earth fault device-internal logical output signal

UL1L2 internal input signal of an analog value

>Release external binary input signal

Dev. Trip external binary output signal

Liability statement Copyright

1.1 Overall function ................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Fields of application............................................................................................................. 1-5

1.3 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-6

1.4 Functional scope ................................................................................................................. 1-7

2 Design and Connection System ...................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Type 6MD663/6MD664 with a separate operator unit....................................................... 2-15

2.3 Type 6MD663/6MD664 without operating unit .................................................................. 2-26

3 First Steps ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Unpacking and re-packing the device ................................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Receiving inspection and testing of the device.................................................................... 3-3

3.3 User interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.4 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-12

4 SIPROTEC 4 Devices ..................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4.2 Operator control facilities ..................................................................................................... 4-5

4.3 Information retrieval ............................................................................................................. 4-9

4.4 Controlling.......................................................................................................................... 4-14

4.5 Manual overwrite / tagging................................................................................................. 4-16

4.6 General setting information................................................................................................ 4-17

4.7 Functional scope................................................................................................................ 4-20

4.8 Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 4-21

4.9 Display Editor..................................................................................................................... 4-24

4.10 CFC programmable logic................................................................................................... 4-26

4.11 Power system data ............................................................................................................ 4-27

4.12 Setting groups ................................................................................................................... 4-28

4.13 General device settings ..................................................................................................... 4-30

4.14 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-31

4.15 Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................. 4-32

4.16 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-34

5 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Specifying the functional scope ........................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Configuring information, measured variables and commands............................................. 5-4

5.3 Setting measuring transducers.......................................................................................... 5-36

5.4 Setting inter-relay communication ..................................................................................... 5-44

5.5 Synchronizing circuit breakers........................................................................................... 5-65

5.6 Creating user-definable functions with CFC ..................................................................... 5-69

5.7 Establishing a default display ............................................................................................ 5-79

5.8 Designing a control display................................................................................................ 5-82

5.9 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-84

5.10 Date and time control ........................................................................................................ 5-88

5.11 Configuring metered values............................................................................................... 5-92

5.12 Configuring limit values (LV).............................................................................................. 5-98

6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.2 Device, General Settings (Device, General)........................................................................ 6-3

6.3 Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) ........................................................................... 6-8

6MD663/6MD664 Manual iii

6.4 Control Authorization (Cntrl Authority) ................................................................................. 6-9

6.5 Control Device (Control Device) ........................................................................................ 6-11

6.6 Measurement (Measurement) ........................................................................................... 6-12

6.7 Threshold-Switch (Thresh.-Switch).................................................................................... 6-13

6.8 Measurement U 1.packet (MU U_1) .................................................................................. 6-14

6.9 Measurement I 1.packet (MU I_1) ..................................................................................... 6-15

6.10 Measurement 1phase 1.packet (MU1P_1) ........................................................................ 6-16

3UHIDFH7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV